JP7520526B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that allows gaming.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines and slot machines, are equipped with electronic components such as display means such as liquid crystal displays and light-emitting means such as LEDs (light-emitting diodes).

In this type of gaming machine, for example, there is one that makes it possible to execute an effect similar to that of moving a movable body as a structure by displaying a pseudo-movable body display in a moving manner (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2019-92949 A

Unlike the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 above, the pseudo-movable body is simply displayed moving in the same way as a movable body, and there was a problem in that it was not possible to enhance the entertainment value of the presentation.

The present invention has been made in consideration of such problems, and has an object to provide a gaming machine that can increase the interest of the simulated moving body display.

The gaming machine of means A is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player and is provided with a performance movable body ,
an electronic component arranged to be visible to a player;
A specific member provided around the electronic component;
a light-transmitting member that is a member having light-transmitting properties and that is provided so that a player can see the electronic components and the specific member through the member;
a display means for moving and displaying a pseudo movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position;
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance;
Equipped with
the light-transmitting member is provided in front of the electronic component and the specific member,
The performance execution means includes:
A special effect can be executed to notify the player that the game is controlled to the advantageous state.
A specific effect can be executed before the special effect is executed,
A moving performance can be executed by moving the movable body for performance,
The display means includes:
The pseudo movable body display can be moved and displayed in the specific performance and the special performance,
When the pseudo-movable object display is moved in the specific performance, the pseudo-movable object display can be moved from the first display position to the second display position, and then hidden without being moved from the second display position to the first display position, and a suggestion image suggesting the execution of the special performance can be displayed in a display area including the second display position;
When the pseudo-movable object display is moved during the special performance, the pseudo-movable object display may be moved from the first display position to the second display position, and then moved from the second display position to the first display position, and then hidden;
The pseudo movable object display is not displayed as moving during the period in which the movement performance is being performed.
It is characterized by the following.
Furthermore, the gaming machine of the first means is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1,75SG001) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
Electronic components (e.g., LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803) that are visible to the player;
A specific member (e.g., base member 301, 401, 601, 801) provided around the electronic component and formed in a similar color to the electronic component;
a light-transmitting member (e.g., cover member 302, 402, 602, 802) that is a light-transmitting member and is provided so that a player can visually recognize the electronic components and the specific member through the member;
a display means for moving and displaying a pseudo movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position;
a movable body movable from a first position to a second position different from the first position;
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance;
Equipped with
The light-transmitting member (e.g., the cover member 302) has a decorative pattern (e.g., the decorative pattern 331) formed so as to straddle the electronic component (e.g., the LED board 303) and the specific member (e.g., the base member 301) (see FIGS. 10-12 ),
The performance execution means includes:
a pseudo movable body display effect of moving the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position;
A movable body effect of moving the movable body from the first position to the second position;
It is possible to execute
When the performance execution means executes the movable body performance and the pseudo-movable body display performance during a predetermined period, the rate of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the performance execution means executes the pseudo-movable body display performance without executing the movable body performance during the predetermined period.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, even if the electronic components are arranged so as to be visible to the player, the electronic components are less noticeable due to the decorative pattern, so that the degree of freedom of design can be increased. Also, the player can be drawn to the fact that the movable body effect and the pseudo movable body display effect are being executed.

In addition, the embodiments for implementing the invention described below include the invention relating to the gaming machine of Means 2 below. Conventionally, there have been gaming machines capable of executing effects using movable bodies that can be operated, as shown in JP 2019-92949 A, and capable of executing effects similar to effects in which a movable body as a structure is moved by moving and displaying a pseudo-movable body display. However, such gaming machines have a problem in that they only move and display the pseudo-movable body in the same way as a movable body, and are unable to enhance the interest of the effects. In view of this, there is a demand for a gaming machine that can enhance the interest of the pseudo-movable body display.

The gaming machine according to the second means is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a display means for moving and displaying a pseudo movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position;
a movable body movable from a first position to a second position different from the first position;
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance;
Equipped with
The performance execution means includes:
a pseudo movable body display effect of moving the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position;
A movable body effect of moving the movable body from the first position to the second position;
It is possible to execute
When the performance execution means executes the movable body performance and the pseudo-movable body display performance during a predetermined period, the rate of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the performance execution means executes the pseudo-movable body display performance without executing the movable body performance during the predetermined period.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the execution of the movable body effect and the pseudo movable body display effect.

The present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, or may have the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention as well as configurations other than the invention-specific matters.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. A diagram showing an example configuration of a performance control board related to characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a storage area related to characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing an example of determining moving image data and a text display process table relating to feature parts 91AK and 92AK. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a text display process table relating to feature parts 91AK and 92AK. A figure showing an example of text display control related to characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. A figure showing an example of the configuration of text display setting information related to feature parts 91AK and 92AK. A figure showing an example of text display related to characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. A figure showing an example of text display related to characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. A figure showing an example of text display related to characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a screen display relating to feature parts 01AK and 02AK. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing drawing commands for effects related to feature parts 01AK and 02AK. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a screen display relating to feature parts 01AK and 02AK. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of an effect drawing synthesis process related to characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing an example of image processing relating to characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing examples of image display relating to characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK. A diagram showing the reach performance contents and drawing processing patterns related to feature parts 01AK and 02AK. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing an example of determining a drawing process pattern for characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK; A diagram showing the performance execution period for feature parts 01AK and 02AK. A figure showing an example of performance execution related to feature parts 01AK and 02AK. A figure showing an example of performance execution related to feature parts 01AK and 02AK. A figure showing an example of performance execution related to feature parts 01AK and 02AK. A figure showing an example of performance execution related to feature parts 01AK and 02AK. A front view showing a pachinko gaming machine as a characteristic part 75SG. This is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like installed in a pachinko gaming machine as a characteristic part 75SG. A front view showing the game board of a pachinko game machine as the characteristic part 75SG. This is a cross-sectional view of Figure 10-3 taken along line AA. FIG. 2 is a front view showing the light guide plate device. 1A is an enlarged front view showing a main part of the light guide plate device, FIG. 1B is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB of FIG. 1A, and FIG. 1C is an enlarged view showing a main part of FIG. (A) is a front view showing the first performance unit, and (B) is a rear view. This is a disassembled oblique view showing the configuration of the first performance unit as viewed from diagonally front. 10-7(A) is a cross-sectional view taken along line CC of FIG. 10-7(A), (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD of FIG. 10-7(A), and (C) is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE of FIG. 10-7(A). 1A is a front view showing a base member, FIG. 1B is a front view showing an LED board, and FIG. 1C is a front view showing a cover member. (A) is a front view showing the first performance unit with the cover member removed, and (B) is a front view showing the first performance unit with the cover member attached. FIG. 10-11(B) is an enlarged view showing a main part of FIG. (A) is a front view showing the variable winning ball unit, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line F-F of (A). (A) and (B) are cross-sectional views showing the main parts of the first presentation unit, and (C) and (D) are cross-sectional views showing the main parts of the variable winning ball unit. A diagram for comparing the first presentation unit and the variable winning ball unit. FIG. 1 is a diagram for explaining similar colors. (A) is a front view showing the second performance unit, and (B) is a front view showing the second performance unit with the cover member removed. 10-17(A) is a cross-sectional view taken along line G-G of FIG. 10-17(A), and FIG. 10-17(B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line H-H of FIG. 10-17(A). (A) is a diagram explaining the boundary between the base material and the LED board, and (B) is a diagram showing the configuration of the second performance unit. (A) is a front view showing the third performance unit and the fourth performance unit. 10-20, (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along line II in FIG. 10-20, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line JJ in FIG. 10-20. This is a cross-sectional view taken along the line K-K in Figure 10-20. An explanatory diagram showing the visibility status of the third performance unit and the fourth performance unit. A diagram showing the configuration of the third performance unit and the fourth performance unit. A diagram showing the presentation mode when the third presentation unit and the fourth presentation unit emit light. (A) is a schematic front view showing the third performance unit located at the origin position, and (B) is a schematic front view showing the third performance unit located at the performance position. FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. A diagram showing the numerical range of a jackpot and the numerical range of a miss with time-saving in the variable display of the first special chart in normal state or time-saving state. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. A front view showing a pachinko gaming machine as a characteristic part 241SG. This is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like installed in a pachinko gaming machine as a characteristic section 241SG. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating examples of performance control commands. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. 1A is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 1, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 2. FIG. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern. 13A and 13B are explanatory diagrams showing the relationship between the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern. A diagram showing the execution periods of various effects in normal reaches and super reaches. This is a diagram to explain the content and configuration of various effects in Super Reach. This shows the expected probability of a jackpot depending on the execution status of development effects A and B. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing an outline of the development process of a pachinko gaming machine. 1A is a diagram showing a manner in which the mounted movable body moves, and FIG. 1B is a diagram explaining a situation in which the mounted movable body is lifted. 1A is a diagram showing the movement display mode of the first pseudo movable body display, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the movement mode of the first non-mounted movable body. 13A is a diagram showing the movement display mode of the second pseudo movable body display, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing the movement mode of the second non-mounted movable body. 1A is a diagram showing the movable range of the mounted movable body, (B) is a movement display area of the first pseudo movable body display, and (C) is a diagram showing the movement display area of the second pseudo movable body display. 13A is a diagram showing a specific movement display area of the first pseudo movable body display, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing a specific movement display area of the second pseudo movable body display. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable display start setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing the preview performance type determination process. 1A is a diagram showing a table for determining the type of preview performance A, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a table for determining the type of preview performance B. 1A is a flowchart showing the process of determining the type of advanced performance A, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a table for determining the type of advanced performance A. 1A is a flowchart showing the process of determining the type of development suggestion effect, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a table for determining the type of development suggestion effect. 1A is a flowchart showing the process of determining the type of advanced performance B, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a table for determining the type of advanced performance B. 1A is a flowchart showing the process for determining the final performance type, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a table for determining the final performance type. (A) to (H) are figures showing examples of the performance operations of Super Reach β, mainly in normal reaches. (A) to (J) are figures showing examples of performance actions mainly in weak super reaches. (A) to (F) are figures showing examples of the performance operations in a weak super reach. (A) to (D) are figures showing examples of performance actions mainly during strong super reaches. (E) to (J) are diagrams showing examples of the performance operations of strong super reach performances. (A) to (F) are diagrams showing examples of presentation operations after a confirmed jackpot is announced. 13A to 13D are diagrams showing details of the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display. 13 is a diagram showing the relationship between the light-emitting display unit and the mounted movable body LED. FIG. 13A to 13F are diagrams showing examples of the performance of preview performance B in super reach γ. 13A to 13F are diagrams showing examples of the performance of preview performance B in super reach γ. 11 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display with the mounted movable body. FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display with the mounted movable body. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display with the mounted movable body. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display with the mounted movable body. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display with the mounted movable body. 11 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the first pseudo movable body display and the second pseudo movable body display. FIG. 13A to 13D are diagrams showing a first modified example of the characteristic portion 241SG. 13A to 13H are diagrams showing a second modified example of the characteristic portion 241SG. 13A to 13C are diagrams showing a third modified example of the characteristic portion 241SG.

The following describes an embodiment of the gaming machine according to the present invention with reference to the drawings.

(form)
The gaming machine of form 1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing a game (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 75SG001),
Electronic components (e.g., LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803) that are visible to the player;
A specific member (e.g., base member 301, 401, 601, 801) provided around the electronic component and formed in a similar color to the electronic component;
a light-transmitting member (e.g., cover member 302, 402, 602, 802) that is a light-transmitting member and is provided so that a player can visually recognize the electronic components and the specific member through the member;
The present invention is characterized by the following:
According to this feature, even if the electronic components are arranged so as to be visible to the player, the specific materials of similar colors make the electronic components less noticeable, thereby increasing the freedom of design.

A gaming machine according to a second aspect is the gaming machine according to the first aspect,
Predetermined electronic components (e.g., the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.) that are difficult or impossible to see by a player;
A predetermined component (e.g., a component for fixing the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the solenoids 81, 82, etc.) provided around the predetermined electronic component;
Equipped with
The predetermined member is characterized in that it has a color that is not similar to that of the predetermined electronic component.
According to this feature, for the specified electronic components that are difficult or impossible to see by the player, general-purpose products can be used without considering the balance with the specified materials, thereby reducing manufacturing costs.

A gaming machine according to a third aspect is the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect,
A display means (e.g., an image display device 5) is provided,
The electronic component (for example, the LED board 303) is characterized in that it is provided at a position farther away from the display means than the specific member (for example, the upper part of the base member 301).
According to this feature, the electronic components are located away from the display means that the player focuses on, making them less noticeable.

A gaming machine according to a fourth aspect is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to third aspects,
A protrusion (e.g., protrusion 3A) is provided above the electronic component (e.g., LED board 603, 803) and protrudes toward the player from the electronic component,
The protrusion is larger than the electronic component.
According to this feature, the electronic components are hidden in the shadow of the protruding portion, making them less noticeable.

A gaming machine according to a fifth aspect is the gaming machine according to the fourth aspect,
The electronic components (e.g., LED boards 603 and 803) and the specific members (e.g., base members 601 and 801) are dark in color (e.g., black) (modified example).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the electronic components can be more easily hidden in the shadow of the protruding parts, making them less noticeable.

A gaming machine according to a sixth aspect is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to fifth aspects,
The specific member has a higher color brightness or saturation than the electronic component.
According to this feature, the specific member is more visible than the electronic component, so that the electronic component can be made relatively less noticeable.

A gaming machine according to a seventh aspect is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to sixth aspects,
The light-transmitting member (e.g., the cover member 302) has a decorative pattern (e.g., the decorative pattern 331) formed so as to straddle the electronic component (e.g., the LED board 303) and the specific member (e.g., the base member 301) (see FIGS. 10-12).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, even if the electronic components are arranged so as to be visible to the player, the decorative pattern makes the electronic components less noticeable, thereby increasing the freedom of design.

The gaming machine of aspect 8 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 7,
The electronic component (e.g., the LED board 303) is a circuit board,
The specific member (e.g., base member 301) is provided with a decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern 341) that has at least a part of the same aspect as the circuit pattern (e.g., printed wiring 320) formed on the circuit board (see Figures 10-12).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the circuit pattern formed on the circuit board becomes less noticeable.

A gaming machine according to a ninth aspect is the gaming machine according to the seventh or eighth aspect,
The specific member (e.g., the base member 301) has a predetermined area (e.g., rear wall portions 313A to 313D) that can be seen from the player side without passing through the translucent member (e.g., the cover member 302),
The predetermined area is provided with a predetermined decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern 341) that is the same or similar in appearance to the decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern 331) of the translucent member (see FIGS. 10-12).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it becomes difficult to tell that the specific member and the translucent member are different members.

A gaming machine according to a tenth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to ninth aspects,
A decorative part (e.g., decorative part 420) is provided at a position corresponding to the boundary (e.g., boundary part BD) between the electronic component (e.g., LED board 403) and the specific member (e.g., base member 401) (see FIG. 10-19).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, even if the electronic components are arranged so that they are visible to the player, the decorative part makes it difficult to see the boundary between the electronic components and the specific member, making the electronic components less noticeable, thereby increasing design freedom.

A gaming machine according to an eleventh aspect is the gaming machine according to the tenth aspect,
The decorative portion includes a plurality of decorative portions,
A plurality of predetermined decorative parts are provided at positions that do not correspond to the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member,
The plurality of decorative portions is characterized in that the number of the decorative portions is greater than the number of the predetermined decorative portions.
According to this feature, the boundaries between the electronic components and the specific member are made less visible by the multiple decorative portions, making the electronic components less noticeable.

A gaming machine according to a twelfth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to eleventh aspects,
the light-transmitting member (e.g., cover member 402) has a boundary-corresponding region (e.g., convex portion 410) corresponding to a boundary (e.g., boundary portion BD) between the electronic component (e.g., LED board 403) and the specific member (e.g., base member 401) and a boundary non-corresponding region (e.g., a region other than convex portion 410) not corresponding to the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member,
The boundary-corresponding area has a lower light transmittance than the boundary non-corresponding area.
According to this feature, it becomes difficult for a player to see the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member through the boundary corresponding area, so that the electronic component becomes less noticeable.

A gaming machine according to a thirteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to the eleventh or twelfth aspect,
The decorative portion (e.g., decorative portion 420) displays a logotype (e.g., the letter "V") (see FIG. 10-19).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, since the player focuses on the logotype and is less conscious of the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member, the electronic component becomes less noticeable.

A gaming machine according to a fourteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the eleventh to thirteenth aspects,
The electronic component (e.g., LED board 403) includes a light-emitting means (e.g., second performance LED 404A) capable of emitting light from the decorative part (e.g., decorative part 420) (see FIG. 10-18).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, since the decorative portion stands out due to the light emitted, the player is less likely to be aware of the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member, so that the electronic component becomes less noticeable.

A gaming machine according to a fifteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to the fourteenth aspect,
The light emitting means (e.g., the second performance LED 404A) is provided so as to be capable of surface-emitting the decorative part (e.g., the decorative part 420) (e.g., the light from the second performance LED 404A is emitted forward approximately evenly from the entire front surface of the inner lens 405 and incident on the area corresponding to the convex part 410, so that the entire front surface of the convex part 410 including the decorative part 420 emits surface light).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the decorative portion stands out due to surface illumination, making it difficult for the player to be aware of the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member, so that the electronic component becomes less noticeable.

A gaming machine according to a sixteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to fifteenth aspects,
A performance means (e.g., a third performance unit 600) having higher visibility than the electronic components and the specific components is provided around the electronic components (e.g., the LED board 803) and the specific components (e.g., the base member 801) (see FIG. 10-20).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, even if the electronic components are arranged so as to be visible to the player, the visibility of the presentation means is higher than that of the electronic components, making the electronic components less noticeable, thereby allowing for greater freedom in design.

A gaming machine according to a seventeenth aspect is the gaming machine according to the sixteenth aspect,
The performance means (e.g., the third performance unit 600) is provided closer to the player (front side) than the electronic components (e.g., the LED board 803) (see FIG. 10-22).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to easily increase the visibility of the presentation means.

A gaming machine according to an eighteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to the sixteenth or seventeenth aspect,
The performance unit (e.g., the light-emitting performance unit 630) that is provided in the performance means (e.g., the third performance unit 600) so as to be visible to the player is larger than the electronic component (e.g., the LED board 803) (see FIG. 10-20).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to easily improve the visibility of the presentation means.

A gaming machine according to a nineteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the sixteenth to eighteenth aspects,
The presentation means (e.g., the third presentation unit 600) has a presentation section (e.g., the light-emitting presentation section 630) that is arranged to be visible to the player and is characterized by being made of a color that is more visible than the color of the electronic component (e.g., the LED board 803).
This feature makes it possible to easily increase the visibility of the presentation means.

A gaming machine according to a 20th aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the 16th to 19th aspects,
The performance means (e.g., the third performance unit 600) has a light emitting means (e.g., the third performance LEDs 604A, 604B) capable of irradiating light toward the player (see FIG. 10-21 (A)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to easily increase the visibility of the presentation means.

A gaming machine according to a twenty-first aspect is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to twenty aspects,
Further, the game machine includes a specific light-transmitting member (for example, a cover plate 702A of the variable winning ball unit 700) that is a light-transmitting member and is provided at a position different from the light-transmitting member,
The transmittance (e.g., XA%, XB%) of the light that has entered the light-transmitting member (e.g., the cover member 302) in a predetermined direction (e.g., the T direction) is lower than the transmittance (e.g., Y%) of the light that has entered the specific light-transmitting member in the predetermined direction (see FIGS. 10-14).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, even if the electronic components are arranged so as to be visible to the player, the electronic components are less noticeable because the translucency of the translucent member is lower than the translucency of the specific translucent member, thereby increasing the freedom of design.

A gaming machine according to a twenty-second aspect is the gaming machine according to the twenty-first aspect,
The thickness of the light-transmitting member (e.g., the front-rear dimension L1A, L1B of the cover member 302) is thicker than the thickness of the specific light-transmitting member (e.g., the front-rear dimension L2 of the cover plate 702A) (see FIGS. 10-14).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the light transmittance of the light-transmitting member is reduced, so that the electronic components become less noticeable.

A gaming machine according to a twenty-third aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to twenty-second aspects,
The light-transmitting member (e.g., the cover member 302) is colored in a predetermined color,
The predetermined color is characterized by being similar to the color of the electronic component (for example, the LED board 303) and the specific member (for example, the base member 301).
According to this feature, since the light-transmitting member blends in with the electronic components and the specific member, the electronic components become less noticeable.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which also applies to the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls as game media are shot into this game area by a predetermined ball shooting device.

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (the bottom left of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1), a first special pattern display device 4A and a second special pattern display device 4B are provided that perform a variable display (also called a special pattern game) of special patterns (also called special patterns) as multiple types of special identification information. Each of these is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special patterns are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The special patterns may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

Note that the "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, a variable display of multiple types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described below). Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative symbols described below, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variations also include a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or variation.

The special pattern variably displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A is also called the "first special pattern," and the special pattern variably displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B is also called the "second special pattern." A special pattern game using the first special pattern is also called the "first special pattern game," and a special pattern game using the second special pattern is also called the "second special pattern game." There may be only one type of special pattern display device that variably displays the special patterns.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (electro luminescence) device, and displays various presentation images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. Various presentation images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, multiple types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) that are different from the special patterns are variably displayed as decorative identification information. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. The special game and the variable display of decorative patterns that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

The screen of the image display device 5 may be provided with a display area for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display-compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of reserved variable displays is also called the reserved memory number. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also called the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also called the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also called the total reserved memory number.

In addition, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each of which includes a plurality of LEDs, are provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (the bottom left of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs, and the second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state so that game balls can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) forms a second start winning port that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, a start winning port door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 81, and when the solenoid 81 is in an off state, the start winning port door is in a closed position, so that the second start winning port is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning port being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in an on state, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning port (also referred to as the second start winning port being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning port, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to devices that have an electric tulip-type device with a pair of movable wings.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions are provided at the lower left and right of the game area), general winning openings 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a game ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 2), and the large winning opening door forms the large winning opening as a specific area that can be switched between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric device) is in the OFF state, the large prize opening door closes the large prize opening, and game balls cannot enter (pass through) the large prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the ON state, the large prize opening door opens the large prize opening, and game balls can easily enter the large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 14 balls) are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each winning port, including the general winning port 10, is also called a "winning". In particular, a winning ball into the starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) is also called a starting winning port.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (the bottom left of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbols may also include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

A pass gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the right of the image display device 5. When the game ball passes through the pass gate 41, a regular game is executed.

A regular symbol pending display 25C is provided below the regular symbol display 20. The regular symbol pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the regular symbol pending memory number, which is the number of regular symbol games that are pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the very bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L and 8R for playing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and gaming effect lamps 9 for gaming effects are provided around the periphery of the gaming area. The gaming effect lamps 9 are composed of LEDs.

A movable body 32 that moves according to the performance is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (not shown in Figure 1).

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided, which is operated by the player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or gaming balls loaned from a predetermined ball loaning machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. Below the upper tray, a ball supply tray (lower tray) is provided from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. Operations on the stick controller 31A are detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that the player can press to give a predetermined command. The operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

(Outline of game progress)
A game ball is launched toward the game area by a player rotating a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through a passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If a game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period when the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on the passing cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on the passing is put on hold up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal winning". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal losing". When a "normal winning" occurs, an opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B in an open state for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B.

In addition, if the game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when the special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to a big win game state or a small win game state (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on the start winning cannot be played immediately), the special game based on that entry will be put on hold until a specified upper limit number (for example, 4).

In special game, if a specific special symbol (a big win symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol varies depending on the type of big win, as described below) is displayed as the confirmed special symbol, it is a "big win", and if a specific special symbol different from the big win symbol (a small win symbol, for example, "2") is displayed as a "small win". Also, if a special symbol different from the big win or small win symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as a "losing" symbol, it is a "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game state is controlled to a big win game state, which is advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "small win", the game state is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 9), whichever comes first. The predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is open is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can get prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds there are in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the upper limit opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

The "jackpot" has a jackpot type set. For example, there are multiple types of opening modes of the jackpot opening (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, special state, etc., as described below), and the jackpot type is set according to these. There may be jackpot types that offer many prize balls, jackpot types that offer few prize balls, or jackpot types that offer almost no prize balls.

In the small win game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening state. For example, in the small win game state, the large prize opening is opened in the same opening state as the large prize opening in the large prize game state for some large prize types (the number of times the large prize opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the timing of closing the large prize opening is also the same, etc.). Note that, like the large prize types, small prize types may also be set for "small wins".

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (period during which the special symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state and by improving the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in the regular symbol game more than in the normal state. The time-saving state is an advantageous state for the player because it is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

In the probability variable state (probability fluctuating state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is executed, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for the player, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuation, but also makes it easier to get a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability of a special bonus state will continue until one of the end conditions is met first, such as the specified number of special games being played or the start of the next big win game state. The end condition of the state in which the specified number of special games have been played is also called a count-cut (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability of a special bonus state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a game state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability-varying state, and is a state in which the pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified return process is not executed after the power is turned on).

The state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. The high probability state and low base state are also called a high probability low base state.

After the small win game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special game becomes "small win" is continued (however, if the special game when the "small win" occurs is the special game of the specified number of times in the number cut, the game state will naturally change). Note that the display result of the special game does not have to be "small win".

The game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area within a big prize opening) during a big win game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game state may be controlled to a special probability state after the big win game state.

(Progression of the performance, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects to notify the progress of the game or to liven up the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effects are described below. The effects are executed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, the effects may be executed as sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, turning on or off the game effect lamp 9, operating the movable body 32, or as an effect using any effect device including some or all of these.

As an effect that is executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative patterns begins in response to the start of the first or second special pattern game. At the timing when the display result (also called the determined special pattern) in the first or second special pattern game is displayed statically, the determined decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is also displayed statically (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts to when it ends, the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, which will be described later.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach state occurs during the variable display of the decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple types of reach effects are executed with different rates (also called jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation) of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" depending on the performance state. Reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative patterns (for example, "7") are displayed stopped in line on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" that is controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, odd decorative symbols (e.g., "7") are displayed in a line, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (normal jackpot)" that is not controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, even decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line. In this case, odd decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and even decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (normal symbols). After a reach state is reached with non-probability jackpot symbols, a promotion effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "probability jackpot".

When the display result of the special game is a "small win", a fixed decorative pattern (such as "1 3 5") that is a predetermined small win combination is derived on the screen of the image display device 5 as a display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a "small win"). As an example, decorative patterns that constitute chance eyes are displayed stationary on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Note that a common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed when the display result of the special game is a "big win" of some big win types (big win types in a big win game state that are the same as a small win game state) and when it is a "small win".

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") as a "non-reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination as a "reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Preview effects include a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, and a pre-reading preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is on hold). As a pre-reading preview effect, an effect that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, a pseudo consecutive performance may be executed in which a single variable display appears to be multiple variable displays by temporarily pausing the decorative pattern during the variable display and then restarting the variable display.

During a big win game state, a big win performance is executed to notify the player of the big win game state. As a big win performance, a performance to notify the number of rounds or a promotion performance to indicate that the value of the big win game state will increase may be executed. Also, during a small win game state, a small win performance to notify the player of the small win game state is executed. In addition, a common performance may be executed during a small win game state and a big win game state for some big win types (a big win type of a big win game state in the same manner as a small win game state, for example, a big win type in which the game state after that is a high probability state), so that the player cannot know whether he is currently in a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, a common performance may be executed after the end of the small win game state and after the end of the big win game state, so that it is not possible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state.

In addition, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo performance is executed).

(Board configuration)
2, a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. are mounted on the pachinko game machine 1. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, a power supply board, etc. are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1.

The main board 11 is the main control board, and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of the special game (including management of reserved balls), execution of the regular game (including management of reserved balls), big win game state, small win game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes the programs stored in the ROM 101 to perform processes that control the progress of the game (processes that realize the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the programs stored in the ROM 101 may be deployed to the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (gaming random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The gaming random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, the normal pattern display device 20, the first hold display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, the normal hold display device 25C, etc., solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23) and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 and solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

As part of controlling the progress of the game, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 according to the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. The presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various determination results in the main board 11 (for example, the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable pattern used when executing the special game (described in detail later)), the game status (for example, the start or end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot opening, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notifying errors, and notifying of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes the programs stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The presentation control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the performance based on instructions to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display unit 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display unit 5 based on an instruction to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal designating the on/off state of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal to operate the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the turning on and off of the lamp.

The performance control CPU 120 may be configured to execute control of audio output, turning on/off the lamp (such as supplying a sound designation signal or a lamp signal), and controlling the movable body 32 (such as supplying a signal to operate the movable body 32).

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for performance) used to execute various performances. The random numbers for performance may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

The boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main Operations of Main Board 11)
First, a description will be given of the main operations of the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and a game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. Fig. 3 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Then, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to be accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on or not (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on with the clear switch in the on state, the output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), an initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 executes a RAM clear process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the working area.

The CPU 103 also transmits a presentation control command to the presentation control board 12 to instruct initialization (step S9). When the presentation control CPU 120 receives the presentation control command, it displays a screen on the image display device 5, for example, to notify the user that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power outage or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes a power supply stop processing immediately before the machine becomes unable to operate due to the power supply stop. In this power supply stop processing, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process for the RAM 102, etc. are executed. The data protection process includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The backed up data includes various data for progressing the game (including various flags, the status of various timers, etc.), as well as the status of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. If the backup flag is off and no backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), CPU 103 performs a data check of the backed up data (using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, a parity bit or a checksum is used to determine whether the data in RAM 102 matches the data at the time the power supply was stopped. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be restored to the state it was in when the power supply was stopped, so an initialization process (step S8) is performed.

If it is determined that the data in RAM 102 is normal (Step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (Step S6) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state it was in when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets a working area based on the memory contents of RAM 102 (contents of the backed-up data). This restores the game state to the state it was in when the power supply was stopped, and if the special symbols were changing, the change of the special symbols will be resumed from the state before the recovery by executing the game control timer interrupt process described below.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a presentation control command to the presentation control board 12 to instruct recovery from the power outage (step S7). In conjunction with this, a presentation control command specifying the backed-up game state before the power outage, or, if a special symbol game was being played, a presentation control command specifying the display result of the special symbol game being played may be transmitted. These commands can be the same as the commands transmitted and set in the special symbol process processing described below. When the presentation control CPU 120 receives a presentation control command specifying the time of recovery from the power outage, it displays a screen on the image display device 5, for example, to notify that recovery from the power outage has been achieved or that recovery from the power outage is in progress. The presentation control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the presentation control command.

After completing the recovery or initialization process and sending a performance control command to the performance control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12). After that, a loop process is entered. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 4. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main side error process, it diagnoses an abnormality in the pachinko game machine 1, and can issue a warning if necessary depending on the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, it outputs data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start winnings), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability fluctuation state has occurred) that are supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process is executed to update at least a portion of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, the execution and reservation management of the special symbol game, the control of the big win game state and the small win game state, the control of the game state, etc. are realized (described in detail later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, enabling the execution and reservation management of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), and the opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol hit". The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting the normal symbol reservation display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. Then, the CPU 103 executes a command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a performance control command for transmission in each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, a process is performed to transmit the performance control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the performance control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Figure 5 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Figure 4. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning judgment process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a start winning, store the reserved information in a specified area of the RAM 102, and update the reserved memory number. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information. In addition, a process for predicting and judging the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value may be executed. After the reserved information and the reserved memory number are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory number, and the predictive judgment. The performance control command at the time of the start winning that has been transmitted and set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting is made to transmit a performance control command corresponding to each step to the performance control board 12.

The normal special pattern processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special pattern processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game based on the presence or absence of reserved information. In addition, in the normal special pattern processing, based on a random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be a "big win" or a "small win", and if it is a "big win", the type of big win is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the normal special pattern processing, a determined special pattern (either a big win pattern, a small win pattern, or a miss pattern) to be stopped and displayed in the special pattern game is set in response to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "1", and the normal special pattern processing is terminated. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed in priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also called special pattern 2 priority consumption). Also, the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also known as winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which decision values compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining the fluctuation pattern to one of multiple types using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a pre-determined result of whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2" and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (special game variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special pattern change process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "2". This special pattern change process includes a process for making settings to change the special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, and a process for measuring the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special pattern change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change reaches the special pattern change time, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "3", and the special pattern change process ends.

The special pattern stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "3". This special pattern stop process includes a process for setting the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special pattern and to stop displaying (deriving) the confirmed special pattern that is the display result of the special pattern. If the display result is a "big win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, if the big win flag is off and the display result is a "small win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is a "miss", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0". If the display result is a "small win" or "miss", when the time-saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of times is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special pattern process flag is updated, the special pattern stop process ends.

The pre-opening process for the jackpot in step S114 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4". This pre-opening process for the jackpot includes a process for starting the execution of a round in the jackpot game state and setting the jackpot opening port to an open state, based on the display result being "jackpot", etc. When the jackpot opening port is opened, a process for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening port is executed. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the maximum open period for the jackpot opening port and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", and the pre-opening process for the jackpot is completed.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the jackpot opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the jackpot opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the jackpot opening is to be returned to a closed state, a process for stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed, and then the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", and the jackpot opening process is terminated.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the big prize opening has been executed has reached a set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. When the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", whereas when the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special chart process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation is executed as a presentation operation that notifies the end of the jackpot game state has elapsed, and a process of making various settings for starting special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small win pre-opening process in step S118 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "8". This small win pre-opening process includes a process for setting the large prize opening to an open state in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "9", and the small win pre-opening process ends.

The small win open processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "9". This small win open processing includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the large prize opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the large prize opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time. When the large prize opening is returned to a closed state and it is time to end the small win game state, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "10" and the small win open processing ends.

The small win end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "10". This small win end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which the presentation operation that notifies the end of the small win game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small win game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before the small win game state is entered is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small win game state has elapsed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the small win end process ends.

(Main operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described. When the performance control board 12 receives a power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6. When the performance control main process shown in FIG. 6 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12. In addition, it executes an initial operation control process (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return it to its initial position and control to perform a predetermined operation check.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on or not (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example based on the register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the system waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, an interrupt occurs to receive a performance control command from the main board 11, in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 becomes ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be prohibited, but if a CPU that does not automatically become interrupt prohibited is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt prohibition command (DI command). In response to an interrupt due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, among the input ports included in the I/O 125. The performance control command taken in at this time is stored in a performance control command reception buffer provided in, for example, the RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then sets the interrupt to permitted and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read presentation control commands are performed. For example, the read presentation control command is stored in a specified area of the RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on so that which presentation control command was received and the contents specified by the presentation control command can be confirmed by the presentation control process process, etc. In addition, if the presentation control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, for example, control is performed to operate various performance devices, such as the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. In addition, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are made regarding the control contents of the performance operations using the various performance devices in accordance with the performance control commands, etc. transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing of step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Before returning to step S73, other processes may be executed.

Figure 7 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of Figure 6 as the performance control process processing. In the performance control process processing shown in Figure 7, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a look-ahead preview setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead preview setting process, for example, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing the look-ahead preview performance are made based on the performance control command at the time of the start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, processing is executed to display the hold display based on the number of hold memories identified from the performance control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below, depending on the value of a performance process flag provided in, for example, RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the change pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "3". In this special winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state is received, if the command specifies the start of a big win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "6". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. Also, when a command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special game was "miss", and the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0". Once the value of the performance process flag is updated, the special drawing hit waiting process ends.

The small win presentation process of step S174 is a process executed when the presentation process flag value is "4". In this small win presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets, for example, a presentation control pattern corresponding to the presentation content in the small win game state, and executes various presentation controls in the small win game state based on the set content. In addition, in the small win presentation process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the small win game state is to be ended, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the small win end presentation, and the small win presentation process is ended.

The small win end presentation process in step S175 is executed when the presentation process flag value is "5". In this small win end presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a small win game state, and executes various presentation controls at the end of the small win game state based on the settings. After that, the presentation process flag value is updated to the initial value "0", and the small win end presentation process ends.

The jackpot performance process of step S176 is executed when the performance process flag value is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process ends.

The ending presentation process of step S177 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "7". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Modification of the basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a prize is won, but it may also be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a prize is won.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol showing "- ") may be displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be achieved by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the pattern. Furthermore, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the display result may not include the symbol showing "- ").

In the above basic explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to slot machines (e.g., slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.)) that can play a game in which medals are inserted and a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

The programs and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to being distributed or provided to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, but may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device of the computer device or the like. Furthermore, the programs and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communications processing unit.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory, or by directly executing the game using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions of comparison of various percentages such as the execution percentage of effects (such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) may include one being a "0%" percentage. For example, this also includes one being a "0%" percentage and the other being a "100%" percentage or a percentage less than "100%".

(Explanation of characteristic parts related to setting values)
The following describes the characteristics of the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is mounted on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a board case that is configured to be openable by a first member and a second member, although not shown in the figure. In addition, the main board 11 is provided with a lock switch for switching the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a setting value change state in which the setting value can be changed, a setting change switch that functions as a setting switch for changing the setting values such as the probability of winning a jackpot (ball payout rate) described later in the setting value change state, and an opening sensor that detects the opening of the gaming machine frame, although none of these are shown in the figure. Note that the setting value change state in this embodiment is also a state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the staff of the gaming facility or the like (setting value confirmation state).

These operation sections, such as the lock switch and setting changeover switch, which can be operated by game center staff, etc., are provided in the setting changeover main body and are housed in the board case together with the main board 11. The lock switch and setting changeover switch are exposed to the rear side through an opening formed in the rear of the board case so that they can be operated without opening the board case.

The circuit board case housing the lock switch and the setting changeover switch is provided on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, it is extremely difficult or impossible to operate the lock switch and the setting changeover switch when the gaming machine frame is closed, and they can be operated by opening the gaming machine frame with a specified door key. In addition, since the lock switch requires operation of a setting key held by an attendant at the gaming facility, it can only be operated by an administrator who holds the setting key. The lock switch is also a switch that can be switched between ON and OFF using the setting key. In this embodiment, an example is shown in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but they may be combined into one key.

A display monitor capable of displaying set values and base values is disposed on the board case. The display monitor is connected to the main board 11 and disposed on the top of the board case. In other words, the display monitor is disposed in front when the main board 11 in the board case is viewed. Since the main board 11 cannot be viewed when the gaming machine frame is not open, the front when viewing the main board 11 is the front when viewing the back side of the gaming board 2 with the gaming machine frame open, which is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In this way, the display monitor is disposed in front when viewing the back side of the gaming board 2 with the gaming machine frame open. However, the front when viewing the main board 11 may be the same as the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The display monitor has a first display section, a second display section, a third display section, and a fourth display section. Each of the first to fourth display sections of the display monitor is made up of seven segments forming the figure "8," and a dot located at the bottom right of the seven segments. Each of the first to fourth display sections of the display monitor is capable of lighting or blinking in various colors, such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white. It is also possible to change these colors in an extremely short cycle to display different colors or what is known as a rainbow.

A game information display unit may be provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1, for example, at the lower left position of the game area. The game information display unit has a round indicator, right hit lamp, probability change lamp, and time-saving lamp all arranged together. The round indicator can display the number of rounds of the jackpot game and the type of jackpot during a jackpot game. The right hit lamp is lit in a game state in which the game ball is shot toward the right game area, such as a low probability high base state or a jackpot game state as a time-saving state. The probability change lamp is lit when in a probability change state. The time-saving lamp is lit when in a time-saving state. The round indicator is composed of five segments (LEDs).

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured so that the probability of winning a jackpot (ball payout rate) changes according to the setting value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the probability of winning a jackpot (ball payout rate) is changed by using a display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the setting value. The setting value consists of six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest ball payout rate, and the ball payout rate decreasing as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In other words, when the setting value is set to 6, it is most advantageous for the player, and the advantageous degree decreases stepwise as the value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In addition, the setting value, which is the largest value, 6, is the most disadvantageous value for the gaming facility, and the setting value, which is the smaller value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, is the more advantageous value for the gaming facility. If the payout rate changes depending on the setting value, for example, the probability of a jackpot may change depending on the setting value, or the probability of a jackpot may be constant but the number of rounds in a jackpot game state may change depending on the setting value. In this way, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured to be able to set one of a number of setting values that differ in the degree of advantage for the player. The setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by sending a setting value designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

(Explanation of Characteristic Parts 91AK and 92AK)
Fig. 8-1 shows an example of the configuration of various circuits mounted on the performance control board 12 with respect to the characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. In the example of the configuration shown in Fig. 8-1, various circuits such as a performance control microprocessor 91AK100, an input circuit 91AK121, a memory controller 91AK122, a performance data memory 91AK123, a ROM 91AK124, a RAM 91AK125, and a watchdog timer 91AK126 are mounted on the performance control board 12. The performance control microprocessor 91AK100 includes a CPU 91AK131, a VDP 91AK132, an audio processing circuit 91AK133, a lamp control circuit 91AK134, a motor control circuit 135, and an internal memory 91AK136. The VDP 91AK132 includes a command decoder 91AK141, a demultiplexer 91AK142, a video decoder 91AK143, a moving image renderer 91AK144, a character image renderer 91AK145, a text image renderer 91AK146, a VRAM 91AK147, and a display drive circuit 91AK148. The audio processing circuit 91AK133 includes an audio decoder 91AK151.

The performance control microprocessor 91AK100 may be an integrated processor in which circuits capable of controlling the execution of performances using some or all of a plurality of performance devices, such as the image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs, and performance movable members such as movable body 32, are integrated on one chip by performing data processing and signal processing based on the performance control command received from the main board 11. The performance control microprocessor 91AK100 includes a CPU 91AK131, a VDP 91AK132, and an internal memory 91AK136, while some or all of the sound processing circuit 91AK133, the lamp control circuit 91AK134, and the motor control circuit 91AK135 may be provided outside the performance control microprocessor 91AK100.

The input circuit 91AK121 may include a buffer circuit or the like. The buffer circuit of the input circuit 91AK121 is used to receive the performance control command transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The memory controller 91AK122 executes various processes on the stored data of the performance data memory 91AK123 in response to a request signal supplied from the performance control microprocessor 91AK100. The performance data memory 91AK123 prestores performance data that can be used to execute a performance using the performance device, such as various image data showing a display image on the image display device 5. The image data stored in the performance data memory 91AK123 may include moving image data and still image data. As the still image data, character image data that is sprite image data that is multiple types of image element data corresponding to multiple types of performance images, such as multiple types of decorative patterns variably displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, may be prepared. The performance image corresponding to the decorative pattern may be included in the character image. In addition, any character image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, specifically, image data of a performance image showing a person, figure, symbol, etc., and a background image may be stored in the performance data memory 91AK123 in advance. As still image data, for example, text image data that enables characters to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 may be prepared. In addition to image data, the performance data memory 91AK123 may store a part or all of the voice data used for voice output by the speakers 8L and 8R. The performance data memory 91AK123 may store a part or all of the lamp drive data used for lighting the light-emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED. The performance data memory 91AK123 may store a part or all of the motor drive data used for rotating the drive motor that operates the movable member such as the movable body 32. The performance data memory 91AK123 may be a non-volatile semiconductor memory that can be electrically erased, written, or rewritten, such as a NAND type flash memory. However, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a normal operating state in which the progress of the effects is controlled, the effect data memory 91AK123 is used as a read-only storage device.

The ROM 91AK124 stores computer programs and fixed data for performance control. The RAM 91AK125 provides a work area for the CPU 91AK131 of the performance control microprocessor 91AK100. The watchdog timer 91AK126 has a counter circuit that counts up or down based on the settings of an internal register, and generates a timeout signal that signals the elapse of time when the measured time exceeds the start time (timeout time) and a timeout occurs. The timeout signal is input to the CPU 91AK131 of the performance control microprocessor 91AK100. When the timeout signal is generated, the CPU 91AK131 goes into a reset state, restarting the performance control microprocessor 91AK100.

In addition to the program for controlling the performance, the ROM 91AK124 also stores various table data used to control the performance operation. For example, the ROM 91AK124 stores table data constituting a plurality of judgment tables and decision tables prepared for the CPU 91AK131 of the performance control microprocessor 91AK100 to perform various judgments, decisions, and settings, and pattern data constituting various performance control patterns. The performance control patterns are composed of process data including performance control execution data (display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, motor control data, operation detection control data, etc.) and end codes associated with the performance control process timer judgment value, for example. A part or all of the performance control patterns and the performance control execution data may be configured as a display list. The display list is data of a group of commands that describes a series of transfer commands to be executed by the VDP 91AK132 in accordance with the order of image processing, etc. The display list may include a mixture of commands for display control, commands for audio control, commands for lamp control, and commands for motor control. By using such a display list to control the progress of the performance, it is possible to control the electrical components used for the performance in a coordinated manner. The RAM 91AK125 stores programs and various data used to control the electrical components used for the performance. The CPU 91AK131 is only required to be able to read out the programs and data stored in the RAM 91AK125 in a read time that is shorter than the read time for the programs and data stored in the ROM 91AK124.

The CPU 91AK131 executes control processing according to a computer program for controlling the performance. At this time, the CPU 91AK131 executes performance control processing for controlling the progress of the performance by the electrical components for performance according to the program read from the ROM 91AK124. The performance control processing may include, for example, a fixed data read processing in which the CPU 91AK131 reads fixed data from the ROM 91AK124, a variable data write processing in which the CPU 91AK131 writes various variable data to the RAM 91AK125 and temporarily stores it, a variable data read processing in which the CPU 91AK131 reads various variable data temporarily stored in the RAM 91AK125, a receiving processing in which the CPU 91AK131 accepts input of various signals from the outside, a transmitting processing in which the CPU 91AK131 outputs various signals to the outside, or some or all of these processes.

The VDP91AK132 determines the control content of the image display in the image display device 5 based on the display control command from the CPU91AK131, the register settings, etc. For example, the VDP91AK132 performs control to execute variable display of decorative patterns and various performance displays by determining the switching timing of the performance image to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. The VDP91AK132 is an image processor having image data processing functions such as a high-speed drawing function, a moving image data separation function, and a video decoding function. The VDP91AK132 may be a microprocessor for image processing, such as a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit), a GCL (Graphics Controller LSI), or more commonly, a DSP (Digital Signal Processor).

The command decoder 91AK141 decodes the command portion (command code) included in the display control command from the CPU 91AK131 and instructs image processing, etc. according to the decoded result. For example, a group of display control commands included in the decoded result are supplied to the internal circuit of the VDP 91AK132. The command decoder 91AK141 may generate a control signal according to the decoded result and supply it to the internal circuit of the VDP 91AK132. A group of audio control commands included in the decoded result may be supplied to the audio processing circuit 91AK133. A group of lamp control commands included in the decoded result may be supplied to the lamp control circuit 91AK134. A group of motor control commands included in the decoded result may be supplied to the motor control circuit 91AK135.

The demultiplexer 91AK142 receives video data read from the performance data memory 91AK123 and the like, separates it into video data and audio data, and outputs it. The video data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 is input to the video decoder 91AK143. The audio data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 is input to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The video decoder 91AK143 expands and decodes the compressed and encoded video data, and outputs it. The video data output from the video decoder 91AK143 is supplied to the video renderer 91AK144. The video decoder 91AK143 may read compressed and encoded character image data and text image data from the performance data memory 91AK123 or the like, decompress and decode the data, and then supply the data to the character image renderer 91AK145 and the text image renderer 91AK146.

The video image renderer 91AK144 writes and stores the video data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143 in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The video image renderer 91AK144 may execute image processing capable of adjusting the hue, saturation, brightness, or a part or all of these of the image shown in the video data, and temporarily stores the adjusted video data in the VRAM 91AK147. The character image renderer 91AK145 receives character image data read from the performance data memory 91AK123 or the character image data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143, and writes and stores the data in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The character image renderer 91AK145 may convert the character image data in vector format to bitmap format and temporarily store it in the VRAM 91AK147. The character image renderer 91AK145 may perform image conversion processing and the like to display the character image specified by the character image designation information in a display mode including the display style and display layout set by the character display setting information. The text image renderer 91AK146 receives text image data read from the performance data memory 91AK123 and the like and text image data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143, and writes and stores the data in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The text image renderer 91AK146 may convert the text image data in vector format into bitmap format and temporarily store it in the VRAM 91AK147. The text image renderer 91AK146 may perform image conversion processing and the like to display the text image specified by the text image designation information in a display mode including the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information.

The VRAM 91AK147 temporarily stores image data and provides a work area for image data processing by the VDP 91AK132. The VRAM 91AK147 may provide areas such as a palette area in which palette data is arranged, a character buffer in which character image data is stored, a text buffer in which text image data is stored, and a CG buffer. The CG buffer is used to temporarily store palette data in which the display colors of characters and text are defined when the drawing process is performed by the VDP 91AK132, and to temporarily store display data of the performance image created by the drawing process. The display drive circuit 91AK148 is a circuit for outputting signals that display various images on the screen of the image display device 5. The display drive circuit 91AK148 may output a predetermined clock signal (dot clock signal) and a scanning signal (drive control signal) to the image display device 5 together with a color signal (gradation control signal) corresponding to the display data created by the VDP 91AK132.

A frame buffer may be provided inside the VRAM 91AK147 or in a memory module separate from the VRAM 91AK147, such as the built-in memory 91AK136. The frame buffer provides a virtual display area in which display data of the effect image created by the drawing process by the VDP 91AK132 is expanded and stored. The display data stored in the frame buffer may be image data (pixel data, raster data) in a bitmap format created by the VDP 91AK132 based on vector format image data (vector data, vector data) such as points, lines, and polygons. The frame buffer may include, for example, an actual display area that stores display data of various images displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, and a virtual display area that stores display data of various images not displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Alternatively, display data for performing a screen display of the same size as the display screen of the image display device 5 may be created in the virtual display area of the frame buffer, and the display data of the virtual display area may be supplied to the display drive circuit 91AK148 and output to the image display device 5.

For example, an image display area and an image drawing area are assigned to the memory area of the frame buffer. The image display area stores display data for displaying a performance image on the screen of the image display device 5. The image drawing area stores display data for each performance image created by the drawing process. The image display area and the image drawing area may be switched to each other each time a V blank occurs. A V blank occurs in a period for updating the image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Each time a V blank begins, a V blank interrupt signal may be output from the VDP91AK132 to the CPU91AK131, and various interrupt signals may be output from the VDP91AK132 to the CPU91AK131. By switching between the image display area and the image drawing area each time a V blank occurs, a drawing process for creating display data for each performance image is performed in the memory area assigned as the image drawing area in a certain V blank period (first drawing display period), and in the next V blank period (second drawing display period), this memory area is switched to the image display area. Therefore, the display data created in the drawing process during the first drawing display period is output to the image display device 5 during the second drawing display period, and the display data created in the drawing process is stored in the memory area assigned to the image drawing area during the second drawing display period.

The audio processing circuit 91AK133 generates an audio signal that enables audio output using the speakers 8L and 8R based on instructions and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and the VDP 91AK132. The audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133 is supplied with audio data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 of the VDP 91AK132. The audio decoder 91AK151 expands and decodes the compressed and encoded audio data to generate an audio signal. The audio processing circuit 91AK133 may also include an audio data memory that can store audio data that is not included in the video data in advance. The audio data memory may be provided outside the audio processing circuit 91AK133 by being included in, for example, the performance data memory 91AK123 or the ROM 91AK124. The audio processing circuit 91AK133 may generate an audio signal by, for example, expanding and decoding audio data read from the audio data memory based on instructions and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and VDP 91AK132.

The lamp control circuit 91AK134 controls the lighting mode (light emission mode) of the light-emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, such as turning on, turning off, and blinking. The lamp control circuit 91AK134 generates lamp control data based on the instructions and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and the VDP 91AK132, and outputs the data to the lamp control board 14 and the lamp driver board. The motor control circuit 91AK135 controls the operating state of the drive motor that drives the performance movable members such as the movable body 32 to be operable, such as rotation, stop, rotation speed, and rotation angle (phase). The motor control circuit 91AK135 generates motor control data based on the instructions and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and the VDP 132, and outputs the data to the motor driver board. The built-in memory 91AK136 is a memory circuit built into the performance control microprocessor 91AK100, and can store various data used to control the progress of the performance.

Figure 8-2 shows an example of the configuration of the memory area for performance control according to the stored contents. In this embodiment, multiple memory areas are provided, including memory areas 91AKM01, 91AKM02, 91AKM11 to 91AKM14. Each memory area may be provided, for example, in performance data memory 91AK123, ROM 91AKM124, built-in memory 91AK136, or in any or all of these. The multiple memory areas include memory area 91AKM11, which stores data related to moving images, and memory area 91AKM13, which stores data related to text images.

The memory area 91AKM01 stores performance control programs and performance control management data, and functions as a management area for performance control programs, etc. For example, table data, which is data constituting various tables prepared so that the CPU 91AK131 of the performance control microprocessor 91AK100 can make various judgments, decisions, and settings, and pattern data constituting performance control patterns, may be stored in the memory area 91AKM01 as management data.

The memory area 91AKM02 stores display control programs and display control management data, and functions as an area for managing programs for display control, etc. For example, image processing programs prepared for the VDP 91AK132 of the performance control microprocessor 91AK100 to perform various image processing, and display process tables that define procedures for displaying performance images, etc. may be stored in the memory area 91AKM02. The image processing program may include a program for converting image data in vector format into image data in bitmap format. The image processing program may include a program for generating a text image in bitmap format based on text written using character codes and font data.

The memory area 91AKM11 stores video data and video related data including related data. The video data may be a multiplexed encoded stream in which image compression information including reference images and predicted images is generated by a compression encoding process such as motion compensation predictive encoding using multiple frames of original images, and the image compression information is multiplexed with audio data. The video related data stored in the memory area 91AKM11 may include table data and data files constituting a video display process table. The video display process table is used for a display control process that can change the display content and display mode of the video displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 according to the progress of the performance in the pachinko game machine 1 in accordance with the elapsed time. The display content of the video is the content of the video that is reproduced and displayed in response to the video data. The display mode of the video is the mode or form when the video is reproduced and displayed, including the display style and display layout of the video. The table data and data files constituting the video display process table may be stored in the memory area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

The memory area 91AKM12 stores character image related data including character image data and related data. The character image data may be still image data in which any character image showing multiple types of decorative patterns, people, figures, symbols, etc. is described in vector format or bitmap format. The character image related data stored in the memory area 91AKM12 may include table data and data files constituting a character display process table. The character display process table is used for a display control process that can change the display content and display mode of the character image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 according to the progress of the performance in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the elapsed time. The display content of the character image is the content of the character image displayed in response to the character image data. The display mode of the character image is the mode or form when the character image is displayed, including the display style and display layout of the character image. The table data and data files constituting the character display process table may be stored in the memory area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

The memory area 91AKM13 stores text image data and text image related data including related data. The text image related data may include outline font data. The outline font data is data that can be converted into the character shape of each character in the bitmap format image data by specifying a combination of multiple vertex coordinates that connect the contour for each character used to display the text image. The text image related data may include vector font data or stroke font data instead of or in addition to the outline font data. The vector font data and stroke font data are data that can be converted into the character shape of each character in the bitmap format image data by specifying parameters of straight lines and curves for each character used to display the text image. The outline font and vector font are included in scalable fonts whose quality is not easily deteriorated even when the font is enlarged or reduced. The text image data indicates a text image that constitutes a character string by combining multiple character images, and may be any text image that indicates a recognizable unit of a word that is set arbitrarily, such as a sentence, a paragraph, a sentence, a phrase, a word, or a combination of some or all of these. The text image data may also indicate a text image made of only a single character image. The text image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 using the text image data may show telop characters, subtitles, or other information-transmitting characters or decorative characters. The text image data is included in the performance data for displaying the text image, and therefore may be stored in the performance data memory 91AK123. In contrast, font data such as outline font data is used when the VDP 91AK132 executes the image processing program, and therefore may be stored in either the ROM 91AK124 or the built-in memory 91AK136. In this way, the memory area 91AKM13 may be provided in the performance data memory 91AK123 and the ROM 91AK124 or the built-in memory 91AK136. Similarly, the other memory areas may be provided in some or all of multiple memory devices, such as the performance data memory 91AK123, the ROM 91AKM124, and the built-in memory 91AK136.

The text image related data stored in memory area 91AKM13 may include table data and data files constituting a text display process table. The text display process table is used in a display control process that can change the display content and display mode of the text image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 according to the elapsed time as the performance in the pachinko gaming machine 1 progresses. The display content of the text image is the content of the text image displayed in response to the text image data. The display mode of the text image is the mode or form when the character image is displayed, including the display style and display layout of the text image. The table data and data files constituting the text display process table may be stored in memory area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

The memory area 91AKM14 stores audio-related data including audio data and related data. The audio data stored in the memory area 91AKM14 is different from the audio that is played back and output in synchronization with the image in the performance by the moving image display, and may be any audio that can be played back and output as the performance in the pachinko gaming machine 1 progresses. The audio-related data stored in the memory area 91AKM14 may include table data and data files that constitute an audio output process table. The audio output process table is used for audio control processing that can change the audio, such as sound effects and music, output from the speakers 8L and 8R according to the elapsed time as the performance in the pachinko gaming machine 1 progresses. The table data and data files that constitute the audio output process table may be stored in the memory area 91AKM01 as performance control management data.

In the VDP 91AK132 of the performance control microprocessor 91AK100, the video data read from the memory area 91AKM11 is input to the demultiplexer 91AK142, which separates the video data and audio data. The video data is input to the video decoder 91AK143, and the audio data is input to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The video decoder 91AK143 expands and decodes the compressed and encoded video data and supplies it to the video renderer 91AK144. The video renderer 91AK144 converts the video data according to the display mode, including the display style and display layout of the video, and writes and stores the converted data in a specified area of the VRAM 91AK147. In this way, the display of the video is controlled using the video data, which is the stored data in the memory area 91AKM11.

In the VDP 91AK132 of the performance control microprocessor 91AK100, text image data read from the memory area 91AKM13 is input to the text image renderer 91AK146. If the text image data is compression-encoded, it may be decompressed and decoded by the video decoder 91AK143 before being input to the text image renderer 91AK146. The text image renderer 91AK146 performs conversion processing of the text image data according to the display mode, including the display style and display layout of the text image, for example, and writes and stores the converted data in a specified area of the VRAM 91AK147. In this way, the display of the text image is controlled using the text image data, which is the stored data in the memory area 91AKM13.

Figure 8-3 shows an example of determining moving image data and a text display process table according to the reach performance content. In the reach performance of super reaches such as SP reach A and SP reach B, it is possible to execute a performance by displaying moving images using moving image data and a performance by displaying text images using text image data. The period during which the performance by displaying moving images and the period during which the performance by displaying text images are executed may be partly or entirely the same period, or may include different periods. The text display process table is a table in which process data is set that is used to control the display when, for example, a text image that combines multiple character images is displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 8-3, depending on the reach performance content, one of the video data 91AKD01, 91AKD02, 91AKD11, 91AKD12 is determined, and one of the text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, 91AKT11, 91AKT12 is determined. Of these, the video data is determined in one-to-one correspondence with the reach performance content. For example, if the reach performance content is "SP reach A (jackpot)", then the video data 91AKD01 is determined. If the reach performance content is "SP reach B (jackpot)", then the video data 91AKD02 is determined. If the reach performance content is "SP reach A (miss)", then the video data 91AKD11 is determined. If the reach performance content is "SP reach B (miss)", then the video data 91AKD12 is determined. In contrast, the text display process table may be commonly determined even for different reach performance contents, or may not be determined. For example, when the reach performance contents are "SP reach A (jackpot)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 30/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 70/100. When the reach performance contents are "SP reach B (jackpot)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT11 is 20/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT12 is 80/100. When the reach performance contents are "SP reach A (miss)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 80/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 20/100. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (miss)," the determination ratio in the text display process table 91AKT11 is 70/100, and the determination ratio in the text display process table 91AKT12 is 30/100.

The text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 can be determined when the reach performance content is "SP Reach A (jackpot)" or "SP Reach A (miss)" and cannot be determined when the reach performance content is "SP Reach B (jackpot)" or "SP Reach B (miss)". The text display process tables 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 can be determined when the reach performance content is "SP Reach B (jackpot)" or "SP Reach B (miss)" and cannot be determined when the reach performance content is "SP Reach A (jackpot)" or "SP Reach A (miss)". In this way, the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 are used to control the display of text images when the reach performance of SP Reach A is executed. The text display process tables 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 are used to control the display of text images when the reach performance of SP Reach B is executed.

When the reach performance content is "SP Reach A (jackpot)", a performance is executed by displaying a moving image using video data 91AKD01, and when the reach performance content is "SP Reach A (miss)", a performance is executed by displaying a moving image using video data 91AKD11. A text image using either text display process table 91AKT01 or 91AKT02 can be added to the moving image displayed using video data 91AKD01 and the moving image displayed using video data 91AKD11. When the reach performance content is "SP Reach B (jackpot)", a performance is executed by displaying a moving image using video data 91AKD02, and when the reach performance content is "SP Reach B (miss)", a performance is executed by displaying a moving image using video data 91AKD12. A text image using either text display process table 91AKT11 or 91AKT12 can be added to a video displayed using video data 91AKD02 and a video displayed using video data 91AKD12. Therefore, a text image using a common text display process table can be added to a plurality of videos displayed using different video data.

Figure 8-4 shows an example of the configuration of a text display process table. Of these, Figure 8-4 (A1) shows an example of the configuration of a text display process table 91AKT01 that can be used in response to the reach performance of SP Reach A, and Figure 8-4 (A2) shows an example of the configuration of a text display process table 91AKT02 that can be used in response to the reach performance of SP Reach A. Figure 8-4 (B) shows an example of the configuration of a text display process table 91AKT11 that can be used in response to the reach performance of SP Reach B.

In each text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with a plurality of text display periods. The text display process table may include a single text display period in which text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with each other. The text display period specifies the start time at which the display of the text image to be displayed starts and the end time at which the display ends for each text image to be displayed. The start time and end time in the text display period may be specified using the elapsed time from when the display of the moving image in the reach performance starts, or may be specified using the elapsed time from when the variable display starts. However, if the display content of the text image is highly related to the display content of the moving image, it is desirable to specify the start time and end time in the text display period using the elapsed time from when the display of the moving image starts. The elapsed time from when the variable display starts includes, for example, the elapsed time before the variable display becomes a reach state, so that even in a common reach performance, the timing at which the display of the moving image starts may differ depending on the variable display performance before the reach state. Even in such a case, if the start time and end time of the text display period are specified using the elapsed time from the start of the display of the moving image, the timing at which a specific image in the moving image is displayed and the timing at which a specific text image is displayed can be easily synchronized, and the linkage between the display of the moving image and the display of the text image can be improved. The text image designation information specifies text image data used to display the text image in a specifiable manner. For example, the text image designation information may be information that specifies the storage address, read address, data size, etc. of the text image data in the storage area 91AKM13. Alternatively, the text image designation information may be information that specifies the contents of the text image to be displayed using any character code, such as ASCII code, UNICODE (UTF-16 or UTF-8, etc.), or JIS code (Shift_JIS code, etc.). The text display setting information is information that specifies the display mode of the text image in a configurable manner using display style information, display layout information, other metadata, etc. of the text image to be displayed. The text display process table may be written using a predetermined markup language, such as TTML (Timed Text Markup Language). Additionally, the text display process table may use any table data so long as it can set text image designation information and text display setting information in association with each other during the text display period.

Figure 8-5 shows an example of display control of a text image using a text display process table. Of these, Figure 8-5 (A1) shows an example of display control in the case of text display process table 91AKT01, and Figure 8-5 (A2) shows an example of display control in the case of text display process table 91AKT02. Figure 8-5 (B) shows an example of display control in the case of text display process table 91AKT11. In these display control examples, when the reach performance of SP Reach A is executed, the display of a moving image begins at timing T00, and when the reach performance of SP Reach B is executed, the display of a moving image begins at timing T10.

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A1), as shown in FIG. 8-5 (A1), the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. Also, during the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed, and during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA03 is displayed. Note that both timings T02 to T04 are included in the period from timing T01 to timing T05. After timing T05 has passed, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA04 is displayed during the text display period from timing T06 to timing T08, and the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA05 is displayed during the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09. Note that timing T08 occurs later than timing T07.

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A2), as shown in FIG. 8-5 (A2), the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. Also, during the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed, and during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed. After timing T05 has passed, during the text display period from timing T06 to timing T08, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA14 is displayed, and during the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA05 is displayed.

In this way, the text image designated by the text image designation information can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in accordance with the multiple text display periods set by the text display process table. The first text display period included in the multiple text display periods may include a period that is partially or entirely common with the second text display period that is different from the first text display period. For example, in the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05 is set to include the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03 and the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. In this case, the first text display period has a portion common to the second text display period and another portion common to the third text display period. In this way, the first text display period includes a portion common to the second text display period and a portion common to the third text display period. In contrast, the entire second text display period is common to the first text display period, and the entire third text display period is common to the first text display period. In this way, the entire second text display period is included in the first text display period, and the entire third text display period is included in the first text display period. Also, the text display period from timing T06 to timing T08 and the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09 include periods that are partially common to each other. In this way, the first text display period may include a part of the second text display period, and the second text display period may include a part of the first text display period. Alternatively, the entire first text display period may be included in the second text display period, and the entire second text display period may be included in the first text display period.

By setting the text display process table, different text images specified by the text image designation information can be displayed according to multiple text display periods. This makes it possible to change the first component related to the display content of the text image, among the multiple components in the display of the text image, according to the elapsed time during the display period of the text image added to the moving image. For example, by setting the text display process table 91AKT01 or the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed during the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. As the second text display period included in this first text display period, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed during the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03. After the second text display period ends at timing T03, a text image specified by text image designation information 91AKA03 or text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed during a text display period from timing T04 to timing T05 as a third text display period included in the first text display period. With this setting, during the period from timing T01 to timing T02 and the period from timing T03 to timing T04 of the first text display period, only the text image specified by text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed. On the other hand, during the period from timing T02 to timing T03 of the first text display period, which is common to the second text display period, the display of the text image is changed so that the display of the second text image specified by text image designation information 91AKA02 is added to the display of the first text image specified by text image designation information 91AKA01. On the other hand, during the period from timing T04 to timing T05 of the first text display period, which is common to the third text display period, the display of the text image is changed so that the display of the third text image specified by text image designation information 91AKA03 or the display of the fourth text image specified by text image designation information 91AKA13 is added to the display of the first text image specified by text image designation information 91AKA01. In this case, it is possible to change the display of the text image added to the display of the first text image so that either the third text image or the fourth text image is displayed, depending on the result of the determination of the text display process table.

In the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, a text image specified by the common text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, and a text image specified by the common text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed during the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03. In contrast, in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, in the case of the text display process table 91AKT01, a text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA03 is displayed, and in the case of the text display process table 91AKT02, a text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed. The text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02 can be determined in correspondence with the common moving image data 91AKD01, 91AKD11. Therefore, even when videos using common video data are displayed, the text images to be displayed can be made different in at least some of the multiple text display periods, thereby changing the components in the display of the text images. When videos using common video data are displayed, the text images to be displayed can be made different in all of the multiple text display periods depending on the determination result of the text display process table. When videos using common video data are displayed, the start time, end time, and period length can be made different for some or all of the multiple text display periods depending on the determination result of the text display process table. In this way, some or all of the display period in which a text image added to one video is displayed can be made changeable, and some or all of the text images added to one video can be made changeable.

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT11 shown in FIG. 8-4(B), as shown in FIG. 8-5(B), in the text display period from timing T11 to timing T15, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA21 is displayed. Also, in the text display period from timing T11 to timing T12, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA22 is displayed, and in the text display period from timing T13 to timing T14, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA23 is displayed. Note that both timings T12 to T14 are included in the period from timing T11 to timing T15. After timing T15 has passed, in the text display period from timing T16 to timing T17, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA24 is displayed, and in the text display period from timing T18 to timing T19, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA25 is displayed.

Figure 8-6 shows a specific example of text display setting information. The text display setting information includes data corresponding to multiple fields, such as origin, fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, color, backgroundColor, fontStyle, textAlign, and textDecoration. The origin field can set the origin coordinates when displaying a text image. The fontFamily field can set the font family, which is the font type, for the font of the characters included in the text image. The fontSize field can set the font size, which is the size at which the text image is displayed. The fontWeight field can set the thickness of the characters included in the text image. The color field can set the display color of the characters included in the text image. The backgroundColor field can set the display color of the background in the text image. The fontStyle field can set the style of the characters in the text image, such as standard, italic, or oblique. The textAlign field can set the alignment of the characters included in the text image, such as right-justified, centered, or left-justified. The textDecoration field can set the decoration display added to the text image, such as underline, overline, strikethrough, and other effect images. In this way, the text display setting information makes it possible to set the display mode of the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image.

Figure 8-6 (A) shows an example of the configuration of text display setting information 91AKB01. Figure 8-6 (B) shows an example of the configuration of text display setting information 91AKB02. Figure 8-6 (C1) shows an example of the configuration of text display setting information 91AKB03. Figure 8-6 (C2) shows an example of the configuration of text display setting information 91AKB13. Text display setting information 91AKB01 is included in text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, and 91AKT11. Text display setting information 91AKB02 is included in text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, and 91AKT11. Text display setting information 91AKB03 is included in text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT11, but is not included in text display process table 91AKT02. Text display setting information 91AKB13 is included in text display process table 91AKT02, but is not included in text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT11.

In the multiple text display periods set by the text display process table, the text image specified by the text image designation information can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information. This makes it possible to change the second component related to the display mode of the text image among the multiple components in the display of the text image in the display period of the text image added to the moving image according to the elapsed time. For example, by setting in the text display process table 91AKT01 or the text display process table 91AKT02, in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. In the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03 as the second text display period included in this first text display period, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB02. After the second text display period ends at timing T03, there is a third text display period included in the first text display period, during which the text image specified by text image designation information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display style and display layout set by text display setting information 91AKB03, and the text image specified by text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display style and display layout set by text display setting information 91AKB13. Due to such settings, during the period from timing T01 to timing T02 and the period from timing T03 to timing T04 of the first text display period, only the text image specified by text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed in the display style and display layout set by text display setting information 91AKB01. On the other hand, during the first text display period, in the period from timing T02 to timing T03, which is common to the second text display period, the display of the text image is changed so that the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is added to the display of the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA01 and is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB02. On the other hand, during the first text display period, in the period from timing T04 to timing T05, which is common to the third text display period, the display of the text image is changed so that the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is added to the display of the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA03 and is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB03, and the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display style and display layout displayed by the text display setting information 91AKB13.

During the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA02 may be displayed in a display style or layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB02, different from the display style or layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. During the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA03 may be displayed in a display style or layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB03, different from the display style or layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. Alternatively, during the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA13 may be displayed in a display style or layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB13, different from the display style or layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. In this way, during the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, which is a period common to the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image specified by text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed in the first display mode, and the text image specified by text image designation information 91AKA02 can be changed to and displayed in a second display mode different from the first display mode. During the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, which is a period common to the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed in the first display mode, and the text image specified by text image designation information 91AKA03 may be changed to and displayed in a third display mode different from the first and second display modes. Alternatively, during the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, which is common to the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by text image designation information 91AKA01 may be displayed in the first display mode, and the text image specified by text image designation information 91AKA13 may be changed to a fourth display mode different from the first to third display modes and displayed. Therefore, during the display period of the text image added to the moving image, some text images can be displayed in a different display mode from the other text images. Also, after displaying the text image in the second display mode together with the text image in the first display mode, the display mode of the text image can be changed and displayed, such that the text image in the second display mode may be changed to a text image in the third display mode and displayed, or the text image in the second display mode may be changed to a text image in the fourth display mode and displayed.

In the text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A1) and the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A2), during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. Also, during the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB02. This allows a common text image to be displayed in a common display mode. On the other hand, in the text display process table 91AKT01, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB03 corresponding to the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. In the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB13 in response to the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. This allows different text images to be displayed in different display modes. On the other hand, in the text display process table 91AKT11, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA21 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 in response to the text display period from timing T11 to timing T15. Also, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA22 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB02 in response to the text display period from timing T11 to timing T12. In this case, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA21 and the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 can be displayed in a common display mode. Also, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA22 can be displayed in a common display mode with the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02. In this way, even if different text images are added to different moving images, they may be displayed in a common display mode according to the setting data of the common text display setting information. Alternatively, in the text display process table 91AKT01, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA05 is displayed in a display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB05 in correspondence with the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09. In the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA05 is displayed in a display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB15 in correspondence with the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09. In this way, even if the text images are common, they may be displayed in different display modes according to the text display setting information.

In the text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with multiple text display periods. In addition, in multiple text display process tables, at least some of the text image designation information and text display setting information set in association with multiple text display periods can be set as common information, and some or all of the information can be set as different information. These settings allow the first and second components related to the text image, such as the display content and display mode of the text image, to be individually changed and displayed.

In the text display setting information 91AKB01 shown in FIG. 8-6 (A), the color field is set so that the display color of the text image changes stepwise from #FF0040 to #4000FF. In the text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A1) and the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A2), a text image is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. In the text display process table 91AKT11 shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), a text image is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 during the text display period from timing T11 to timing T15. In these cases, when the text image of the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 is displayed as a text image corresponding to the display content that is the common first component during the corresponding text display period, the display mode that is the second component related to the text image, such as the display color of the text image, can be changed according to the elapsed time. Note that, for example, the display color of the text image set by the color field may be changeable according to the reach performance content, etc., even when the same text image is specified by the text image designation information. In this case, for example, it may be determined whether or not to change the display color of the text image at different rates depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display is controlled to an advantageous state, such as whether or not it is a "jackpot", or it may be determined to be one of a plurality of display colors. Also, for example, the display color of the text image set by the color field may be changeable according to the execution result of the performance control program by the CPU 91AK131, even when the same text image is specified by the text image designation information. In this case, the VDP 91AK132 may change the display color of the text image set by the color field to a different display color based on a display control command from the CPU 91AK131, a register setting, or the like. In this way, the display mode such as the display style of the text image can be changed by simply changing a part of the data related to the text image included in the text display process table, so that it is possible to display a variety of text images while preventing an increase in data capacity and an increase in processing load. When changing the display color of the text image, other display styles may also be changed accordingly. For example, when the display color of the text image is white, the display of the text image tends to be easy for the player to see, and when the display color of the text image is red, the display of the text image tends to be difficult for the player to recognize. Therefore, when the display color of the text image is changed to red, the size of the text image set by the fontSize field may be changed so that the font size is larger than when the display color of the text image is white. As a specific example, a text image displayed with a font size of 10.5px when the display color is white may be changed to a font size of 11px when the display color is changed to red and displayed. This makes it possible to display text images that are easy for players to see while minimizing any discomfort felt by players when viewing the text images.

Figure 8-7 shows an example of the execution of a presentation in which a text image is displayed using a text display process table. In this example, text images are displayed according to multiple text display periods in conjunction with the video display when the SP Reach A reach presentation is executed. In the SP Reach A reach presentation, a video display using video data 91AKD01 is performed when the display result of the variable display is a "jackpot", and a video display using video data 91AKD11 is performed when the display result of the variable display is a "miss". The video display using video data 91AKD01 and the video display using video data 91AKD11 display a presentation that is a battle presentation in which a common ally character and enemy character battle each other, and it is sufficient that the content of the presentation display is common until the timing when the battle result is announced, for example. Furthermore, if the display result of the variable display is a "jackpot," the determination rate of text display process table 91AKT02 becomes higher, and if the display result of the variable display is a "miss," the determination rate of text display process table 91AKT01 becomes higher. Therefore, in the reach effect of SP Reach A, even during the moving image display period, which is the content of the common effect display, the probability of a jackpot can be made to differ depending on the display content of the text image according to the text display process table.

The performance execution example 91AKD11 shown in Figure 8-7 (A) is a performance content common to the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02, and corresponding to the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. In this case, the components in the display of the text image are controlled so that the text image indicating the reach name "SP Reach A" specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 has the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01, for example, the origin coordinates are (300,30), the font family is a typeface classified as Gothic, called AA_gothic, the font size is 48px, the character thickness is a bold line width corresponding to bold, the display color of the text image changes stepwise from #FF0040 to #4000FF, the background display color is #CCF0F0, the character style is italic or oblique corresponding to italic, the character arrangement is centered, and no character decoration is set. In the performance control microprocessor 91AK100, the text image renderer 91AK146 of the VDP 91AK132 may execute image conversion processing and the like to display the text image in the display mode including the display style and display layout specified by the text display specification information.

In addition, in the performance execution example 91AKD11 shown in FIG. 8-7(A), the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB02 in response to the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03. In this case, the components in the display of the text image are controlled so that the text image showing the line "If this character wins..." specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02 has the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB02, for example, the origin coordinates are (250,600), the font family is a typeface classified as Mincho, called BB_mincho, the font size is 36px, the character thickness is the normal line width corresponding to normal, the display color of the text image is #FFFFFF, the background display color is #220C0C, the character style is normal corresponding to normal, the character alignment is left justified, and the character decoration is unset.

The performance execution example 91AKD21 shown in Figure 8-7 (B1) includes performance content different from that of text display process table 91AKT02 when text display process table 91AKT01 is used, and the text image specified by text image designation information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display mode set by text display setting information 91AKB03 corresponding to the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. In this case, the components of the text image are controlled so that the text image indicating the phrase "Chance!!" specified by the text image specification information 91AKA03 has the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB03, for example, the origin coordinates are (250,600), the font family is a typeface classified as a Gothic font called CC_gothic, the font size is 60px, the character thickness is a normal line width corresponding to normal, the display color of the text image is #000000, the background display color is #FFFFFF, the character style is a normal typeface corresponding to normal, the character arrangement is centered, and the character decoration is unset. This text image has the same origin coordinates and character decoration as the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02, but the font family, font size, character thickness, display color of the text image, background display color, character style, and character arrangement have been changed. In this way, when displaying a text image specified by the text image specification information, it may be possible to change some of the data corresponding to the multiple fields included in the text display setting information and display it.

The performance execution example 91AKD22 shown in Figure 8-7 (B2) includes performance content different from that of text display process table 91AKT01 when text display process table 91AKT02 is used, and the text image specified by text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display mode set by text display setting information 91AKB13 corresponding to the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. In this case, the text image indicating the phrase "Super hot" specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 has the following display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB13: origin coordinates (250,600), font family DD_mincho, which is classified as a Mincho font, font size 72px, character thickness corresponding to bold, text image display color gold corresponding to "gold", background display color #000000, character style normal corresponding to normal, character arrangement centered, and character decoration gold display effect setting by effect_gold. This text image has only the origin coordinates in common with the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02, and the font family, font size, character thickness, text image display color, background display color, character style, character arrangement, and character decoration have been changed. In this way, when displaying a text image specified by the text image designation information, it may be possible to individually set data to be changed and data not to be changed among the data corresponding to the multiple fields included in the text display setting information. When comparing this text image with the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA01, all settings, including the origin coordinates, have been changed. In this way, when displaying a text image specified by the text image designation information, it may be possible to change and display all of the data corresponding to the multiple fields included in the text display setting information. When displaying a text image specified by the text image designation information, when one piece of data corresponding to the multiple fields included in the text display setting information is changed and displayed, other data previously associated with the one piece of data may also be changed and displayed. For example, when changing the display color of a text image to gold corresponding to "gold", it is sufficient to change the character decoration to the effect display setting for gold display by effect_gold and display it.

The display color and background display color of the text image can be set in 256 steps so that the brightness (gradation) of each of the display colors R (red), G (green), and B (blue) is one of the levels from "0" to "255". In the text display setting information, the field data constituting the color field and backgroundColor field may have a common data format with the field data constituting the color field and backgroundColor field in the character display setting information used to display the character image, for example. In addition, the origin coordinate when displaying the text image can be set by a combination of the horizontal x coordinate and the vertical y coordinate on the screen of the image display device 5. In the text display setting information, the field data constituting the origin field may have a common data format with the field data constituting the origin field in the character display setting information, for example. In this way, some or all of the field data included in the text display setting information may have a common data format with the field data included in the setting information used to display a performance image different from the text image, such as the character display setting information. Such text display setting information may be used to change second components related to a text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, using information common to a performance image that is different from the text image. This reduces the processing burden of changing second components related to a text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image.

The font family that can be set when displaying a text image is not set when displaying a character image. In the text display setting information, the field data constituting the fontFamily field may be specific field data that is not included in the character display setting information. Also, instead of the font size that can be set when displaying a text image, the character size may be set when displaying a character image. In the text display setting information, the field data constituting the fontSize field may have a specific field format, although it corresponds to the field data constituting the characterSize field in the character display setting information. In this way, some or all of the field data included in the text display setting information may have a specific data format that is different from the field data included in the setting information used to display a performance image different from a text image, such as the character display setting information. With such text display setting information, the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, may be changed using specific information that is not used in a performance image different from the text image. This makes it possible to flexibly change the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, to display a variety of text images.

When the display color of the text image is set to, for example, gold corresponding to "gold", the character decoration is set to a gold display effect setting by effect_gold. When "gold" is set in the color field in the text display setting information, effect_gold is set in the textDecoration field, so that a glossy text image is displayed and an effect image for gold display is added around the text image. In the performance execution example 91AKD22 shown in FIG. 8-7 (B2), when a specific text image showing the phrase "super hot" is specified by the text image specification information 91A13, a display style for gold display is set by the text display setting information 91AKB13, so that the specific text image showing the phrase "super hot" is displayed with gloss and an effect image for gold display is displayed around the specific text image. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the text image display and increase the interest of the performance by the text image display.

In the pachinko game machine 1, when a performance is executed by displaying a moving image using moving image data, adding a performance by displaying a text image using text image data makes it easier for the player to recognize the content of the performance, and also makes it easier to provide information different from the content of the performance. In this case, in a data configuration in which the text image data is compressed and multiplexed as video data contained in the moving image data, problems such as blurring of the outline and deterioration of display quality may occur in the text image display using the text image data that is decompressed and decoded and reproduced. In addition, if different moving image data is prepared according to the display content of the text image display added to the moving image display, the data capacity of the moving image data is likely to increase, and the processing load of the image data is also likely to increase. If a special compression encoding process or decompression decoding process is executed to prevent deterioration of the display quality in the text image display, the processing load of the image data may further increase.

In feature units 91AK and 92AK, when an effect is executed by displaying moving images using moving image data read from memory area 91AKM11, by adding an effect by displaying text images using text image data read from memory area 91AKM13, it becomes possible to easily execute a variety of text image displays with high quality, making it easier for the player to recognize the content of the effect, etc. In addition, because an effect is added by displaying text images using text image data stored separately from the moving image data, it becomes possible to appropriately control the display to prevent as much as possible an increase in the data capacity of the moving image data and an increase in the processing burden of the image data.

The text image display added to the video display using the video data is controlled using the text display process table. Similarly, the video display is controlled using the video display process table, the character image display is controlled using the character display process table, and the audio output is controlled using the audio output process data. In the text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with each other for a plurality of text display periods. The text image designation information specifies the display content of the text image according to the text image data as a first component related to the text image. The text display setting information sets the display mode of the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, as a second component related to the text image. In the VDP 91AK132 of the performance control microprocessor 91AK100, for example, the text image renderer 91AK146 can perform image conversion processing and the like to display the text image specified by the text image designation information in a display mode including the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information. This makes it possible to change the display content of the text image serving as the first component and the display mode of the text image serving as the second component in accordance with the elapsed time during the display period of a text image added to one video. By making the first and second components of a text image added to one video changeable, it becomes possible to easily and highly accurately display a variety of text images, and to appropriately control the display so as to prevent increases in data volume and processing load.

If the reach performance content is "SP Reach A (jackpot)", when a performance is performed by displaying a moving image using video data 91AKD01, a text image using either of the text display process tables 91AKT01 or 91AKT02 can be added and displayed. If the reach performance content is "SP Reach A (miss)", when a performance is performed by displaying a moving image using video data 91AKD11, a text image using either of the text display process tables 91AKT01 or 91AKT02 can be added and displayed. Also, if the reach performance content is "SP Reach B (jackpot)", when a performance is performed by displaying a moving image using video data 91AKD02, a text image using either of the text display process tables 91AKT11 or 91AKT12 can be added and displayed. If the reach performance content is "SP reach B (miss)," when a performance is executed by displaying a moving image using moving image data 91AKD12, a text image using either of text display process tables 91AKT11, 91AKT12 can be added and displayed. In this way, a text image using data related to a common text image, such as a common text display process table, can be added and displayed to a plurality of different moving images. By making it possible to add and display text images using common data to a plurality of moving images, a variety of text image displays can be executed easily and with high quality, and appropriate display control can be performed to prevent increases in data capacity and processing burden.

In the text display process table 91AKT02, a text image showing the phrase "Super hot" may be displayed in a changeable display style at multiple times by using text image designation information 91AKA13 and text display setting information 91AKB13 set in association with the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. The text image showing the phrase "Super hot" may be a specific text image corresponding to a specific first component group, such as a text image whose display content suggests that the display result of the variable display has a high probability of being a "jackpot". In this way, when a specific text image corresponding to a specific first component group is displayed, a second component such as the display mode related to the specific text image may be changeable at multiple times.

Figure 8-8 shows a display control example in which the display style of a text image showing the phrase "Super hot" can be changed at multiple times. In this display control example, during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the display color is black and no character decoration is set during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T041, the display color is gold and no character decoration is set during the text display period from timing T041 to timing T042, and the display color is gold and character decoration is set to an effect display setting for gold display during the text display period from timing T042 to timing T05. Note that as the display style of the text image common to the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the font family is set to DD_mincho, a typeface classified as Mincho, by the fontFamily field, and the font size is set to 72px by the fontSize field.

Figure 8-8 (A) shows a case where a text image of the phrase "Super hot" is displayed during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T041. As the display style of the text image during this text display period, the display color of the text image is set to black corresponding to #000000 by the color field, and the text decoration is set to no setting corresponding to none by the textDecoration field. As a result, the display mode, including the display style, of the text image showing the phrase "Super hot" is controlled so that the display color is black and the text decoration is set to no setting.

Figure 8-8 (B) shows a case where a text image of the phrase "Super hot" is displayed during the text display period from timing T041 to timing T042. As the display style of the text image during this text display period, the display color of the text image is set to gold corresponding to "gold" by the color field, and the text decoration is set to none corresponding to none by the textDecoration field. This controls the display mode, including the display style, so that the text image showing the phrase "Super hot" has a gold display color and no text decoration. If the display color of the text image is set to gold, it is possible to display a glossy text image, for example, by displaying the text image in a gradation. However, if the text image is only displayed with a glossy texture, it may be difficult for the player to recognize the gold display.

Figure 8-8 (C) shows a case where a text image of the phrase "Super hot" is displayed during the text display period from timing T042 to timing T05. As the display style of the text image during this text display period, the display color of the text image is set to gold corresponding to "gold" by the color field, and the character decoration is set to an effect display setting for gold display corresponding to effect_gold by the textDecoration field. This controls the display mode, including the display style, so that the text image showing the phrase "Super hot" has a display color of gold and character decoration with an effect display setting for gold display. In addition to setting the display color of the text image to gold, if the character decoration of the text image is set to an effect display setting for gold display, in addition to the gradation display of the text image, an effect image can be added around the text image by, for example, the display color of the outline border or shadow in the text image, the border display by bevel or emboss, a layer style that adds a glow, or a combination of some or all of these. This not only gives the text image a glossy appearance, but also adds an effect image around the text image, making it easier for players to recognize the gold display and enhancing the player's impression of the text image display.

In text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02, a portion of a text image may be displayed in a display style different from the other portions by using text image designation information 91AKA02 and text display setting information 91AKB02 set in association with the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03. Text image designation information 91AKA02 designates a text image of the line "If this character wins...". Text display setting information 91AKB02 may be set so that a portion of the text image "character" from the text information showing the line "If this character wins..." has a text image display color, background display color, and character style different from the other portions.

Figure 8-9 shows an example of a display in which a portion of a text image has a different display style from the other portions. In this example, a portion of the text image "CHARACTER" is displayed with a white display color, a black background display color, and an italic character style, while the other portions of the text image are displayed with a black display color, a white background display color, and a normal character style. Corresponding to a portion of the text image "CHARACTER", text display setting information 91AKB02 sets the display color of the text image to white corresponding to #FFFFFF using the color field, the background display color to black corresponding to #000000 using the backgroundColor field, and the character style to italic using the fontStyle field. Corresponding to the other portions of the text image, text display setting information 91AKB02 sets the display color of the text image to black corresponding to #000000 using the color field, the background display color to white corresponding to #FFFFFF, and the character style to normal using the fontStyle field. This allows a portion of the text image to be displayed in a different display style from the other portions, enhancing the player's impression of the displayed text image.

In displaying a text image that constitutes a character string combining a plurality of character images, a portion that is displayed in a different display style from the other portions may be changeable according to the progress of the performance by the video image display. For example, when the performance of a piece of music or the audio playback of lines proceeds with the display of a video image, a portion of the text image corresponding to the progress status may be displayed in a different display style from the other portions, such as a specific color display or highlight display. The display style may be changeable so that a portion of the text image is displayed in a fade-in or fade-out display according to the progress of the performance of the piece of music or the audio playback of lines. The portion of the text image that is displayed in a different display style from the other portions may be changeable according to the elapsed time in the execution of any performance, not limited to the situation in which the performance of a piece of music or the audio playback of lines proceeds with the display of a video image. In this way, the portion of the text image that is displayed in a different display style from the other portions is changed according to the progress of the performance, thereby enhancing the player's impression of the display of the text image.

This invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not have to have all of the technical features shown in the above embodiment, but may have a part of the configuration shown in the above embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art.

As a specific example, during the display period of a text image added to one video, the display control may execute one of the following two control operations: a display control that changes the display content of the text image serving as the first component and the display mode of the text image serving as the second component according to elapsed time, and a display control that adds a text image using data related to a common text image to a plurality of videos and enables display; and a display control that executes one of the following control operations without executing the other. The first and second components related to the text image may be, for example, any components related to the display content and display mode of the text image that can be changed. Instead of a part or all of the display content and display mode of the text image, or in addition to a part or all of the display content and display mode of the text image, any components related to the display of the text image may be changeable. For example, any components that can be set related to the display of the text image, such as the time interval or movement width for updating the display position when the text image is moved and displayed, the magnification rate or reduction rate when the text image is enlarged or reduced and displayed, and the time interval or change amount for updating the magnification rate or reduction rate when these magnification rates or reduction rates are changed according to elapsed time, may be changeable.

When displaying a text image corresponding to a common display content, the display mode of the text image is changed not limited to changing the display color of the text image set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 shown in FIG. 8-6(A), but may be changed to any display mode such as an arbitrary display style or display layout. For example, a text image in a display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 may be changed to any display mode such as origin coordinates, font family, font size, character thickness, background display color, character style, character arrangement, decorative display, or a combination of some or all of these, instead of or in addition to the display color of the text image, during the corresponding text display period. A text image in a display mode set by text display setting information different from the text display setting information 91AKB01 may be changed to a display mode different from that of the text image in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01.

The text image data is not limited to being stored in memory area 91AKM13 as data separate from the video data, and at least some of the text image data may be included in the video data. For example, text image data for displaying highly designed characters, such as cursive or cursive writing, may be multiplexed or compression-encoded as part of the video data, and a text image of a specific form may be displayed by decompressing and decoding video data separated from the video data. In this case, data relating to the text image of a specific form is included in the video data and stored in memory area 91AKM11. In this way, data relating to the text image may include specific text image related data included in the video data and stored in memory area 91AKM11, and normal text image related data stored in memory area 91AKM13.

The text display setting information included in the text display process table may be configured with field data corresponding to parts of origin, fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, color, backgroundColor, fontStyle, textAlign, and textDecoration as data corresponding to multiple fields, or may be configured to include field data different from these. For example, when the storage address, read address, data size, etc. of the text image data in the storage area 91AKM13 are specified by the text image designation information, the text image data stored in the storage area 91AKM13 can be read without using font data, and the corresponding text image can be displayed. In this case, the text display setting information does not need field data related to font settings, so it may be configured without including field data related to font settings, such as fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, and fontStyle. On the other hand, in this case, in order to set the display size of the text image, the text display setting information may be configured to include separate field data related to text display settings, such as textSize.

The scalable font data, such as outline font data and vector font data, stored in the memory area 91AKM13 may be prepared as only data corresponding to text images used in the display performance of the pachinko gaming machine 1, or may be prepared as data corresponding to text images not limited to text images used in the display performance of the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as general-purpose Japanese font data. When only font data corresponding to text images used in the display performance is stored in the memory area 91AKM13, an increase in data capacity can be prevented when the number of text images used in the display performance is small. When general-purpose font data corresponding to text images not limited to text images used in the display performance is stored in the memory area 91AKM13, font data can be easily reused, so that the design burden of the performance that displays text images can be reduced, and when a large number of text images are used in the display performance, an increase in data capacity can be prevented.

As the second component related to the text image, the specific text image, whose display mode including the display style and display layout of the text image can be changed at multiple timings, is not limited to the text image showing the phrase "super hot", but may be any text image previously set as a specific text image corresponding to a specific first component group. For example, among multiple types of text images, a text image previously prepared for displaying lyrics of a song or a text image previously prepared for displaying subtitles of a moving image may be set as the specific text image. In this way, the second component such as the display mode may be changeable at multiple timings for a specific text image corresponding to an audio performance or display performance in which the performance content changes according to the elapsed time, such as the playback output of a song or the playback display of a moving image. Alternatively, a text image in which a specific display mode is set, such as a text image for rainbow display in which the display color of the text image is rainbow-colored, or a text image for motif display in which the pattern or character decoration of the text image is a cherry blossom pattern, may be set as the specific text image. Alternatively, the specific text image may be a text image whose display content suggests that the probability of the display result of the variable display being a "jackpot" is high, and may be a text image whose display content suggests that the probability of the display result being controlled to an arbitrary advantageous state is high. The advantageous state is not limited to a jackpot game state, and may include a special game state such as a time-saving state or a probability-changing state. In addition, it may include some or all of the following that provide a more advantageous gaming situation for the player: the upper limit number of rounds that can be played in the jackpot gaming state is a first round number (e.g., "15") that is greater than the second round number (e.g., "7"); the upper limit number of variable displays that can be played in the time-saving state is a first number (e.g., "100") that is greater than the second number (e.g., "50"); the probability of a jackpot in the probability-changing state is a first probability (e.g., 1/20) that is greater than the second probability (e.g., 1/50); and the number of consecutive wins, which is the number of times that the game is repeatedly controlled to the jackpot gaming state without being controlled to the normal state, is a first consecutive win number (e.g., "10") that is greater than the second consecutive win number (e.g., "5").

A glossy text image is not limited to a case where a gold color corresponding to "gold" is set as the display color of the text image, but may include a case where, for example, silver, copper, other metallic colors, or any display color different from a metallic color is set. When a specific text image set in advance is displayed without being limited to the display color of the text image, the specific text image may be displayed in a glossy display mode. When any glossy text image is displayed, settings can be made using the textDecoration field in the text display setting information so that an effect image can be added around the text image and displayed.

When displaying a text image in a rainbow, multiple display colors may be changed in sequence within a predetermined range, such as the character coordinates or display time in the display of the text image. For example, if the display color of the text image is set to rainbow colors corresponding to "rainbow" by the color field in the text display setting information, rainbow display may be possible by transitioning different display colors for each character coordinate of the text image. For example, at character coordinate 1, multiple display colors may be changed in sequence according to the elapsed time, such as changing the display color from red to orange to yellow, then green to light blue, then blue, and then blue-purple to red-purple. At this time, taking into consideration that red is a color that makes a strong impression on the human eye and that the change in blue becomes dark, the brightness corresponding to each display color in the rainbow display may be adjusted, and the display color at each character coordinate may be changed in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, light blue, blue-purple, and red-purple. After red-purple, the display color may be changed back to red. This allows the player to smoothly and clearly recognize the change in display color. In this way, when a special element is set as a character image component, such as when the display color of a text image is set to a rainbow color corresponding to "rainbow" by the color field in the text display setting information, a text image in which multiple display colors are changed sequentially may be displayed within the range of the intra-character coordinates and display time of the text image specified by the text image designation information corresponding to the text display period included in the text display process table. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the text image display and increase the interest of the presentation by the text image display. Note that the display of the text image may be displayed in a rainbow pattern as a whole by sequentially changing different display colors according to the intra-character coordinates of the text image. Alternatively, the display of the text image may be changed to a rainbow pattern according to the elapsed time by sequentially changing a common display color for all intra-character coordinates. In this way, a text image in which multiple display colors are changed sequentially within a predetermined range of either the intra-character coordinates or the display time may be displayed.

The first and second components of the text image may be changeable to different components or to one of a plurality of components at different ratios depending on whether a specific action of the player is detected. The specific action of the player that makes the first and second components of the text image changeable may be, for example, a push or pull operation on the operation stick of the stick controller 31A that serves as the V controller, any other action of tilting the operation stick of the stick controller 31A, or an action of pressing the push button 31b. The first and second components of the text image may be changeable based on the detection result of any change or difference in the detection target, such as the execution state of the process or control in the detection target, or the change in the shape, pattern, or color of the detection target, without being limited to being able to detect the player's action. The detection device that can detect the action, change, or difference in the detection target may be any configuration that can detect the state of the detection target mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically, such as an infrared sensor, ultrasonic sensor, CCD sensor, or CMOS sensor. Alternatively, the state of the detection target may be detected by analyzing the results of photographing the detection target using a specific camera (video motion capture). As an example of detecting the state of the detection target using a camera, the screen display state of a mobile device may be detected, and the display content and display mode of a text image may be made changeable based on the detection result.

A part or all of the effects by displaying text images using text image data may be executed as setting suggestion effects that can suggest the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (jackpot)", the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 may be determined at different ratios according to the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In such a case, the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 may be set to 35/100 (=35%) if the setting value is 1, 30/100 (=30%) if the setting value is 2, 25/100 (=25%) if the setting value is 3, 20/100 (=20%) if the setting value is 4, 15/100 (=15%) if the setting value is 5, and 10/100 (=10%) if the setting value is 6. Correspondingly, the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 may be set to 65/100 (=65%) if the set value is 1, 70/100 (=70%) if the set value is 2, 75/100 (=75%) if the set value is 3, 80/100 (=80%) if the set value is 4, 85/100 (=85%) if the set value is 5, and 90/100 (=90%) if the set value is 6. According to such a determination ratio setting, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (jackpot)", the ratio at which the effect by the text image display according to either of the text display process patterns 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 is executed is made different according to the set value in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, when the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, an effect is likely to be executed by displaying a text image according to the text display process table 91AKT01, and as the setting value increases, the rate at which an effect is executed by displaying a text image according to the text display process table 91AKT02 increases. Therefore, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (jackpot)," if an effect is executed by displaying a text image according to the text display process table 91AKT02, the expectation that the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is advantageous to the player increases.

In addition, any setting suggestion effect may be executed at different rates depending on the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the setting value is a specific setting value, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than when the setting value is a setting value other than the specific setting value. In this case, a limit is set so that in the range where the setting value is other than the specific setting value, the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect is lower than in the range where the setting value is the specific setting value. It is also possible to set a setting suggestion effect that is executed at a predetermined rate when the setting value is a specific setting value and is not executed when the setting value is other than the specific setting value. In this way, in the range where the setting value is a specific setting value, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined rate. On the other hand, in the range where the setting value is other than the specific setting value, a limit is set so that the setting suggestion effect is not executed.

It may be possible to execute any setting suggestion effect at different rates depending on whether or not it is a special period. For example, during a special period, it may be possible to execute setting suggestion effects at a higher rate than during periods other than the special period. In this case, a limit is set so that in periods other than the special period, the execution rate of setting suggestion effects is lower than in periods other than the special period. It may be possible to set setting suggestion effects that are executed at a specified rate during special periods and are not executed during periods other than the special period. In this way, during periods that are special periods, it is possible to execute setting suggestion effects at a specified rate. On the other hand, during periods that are other than the special period, a limit is set so that setting suggestion effects are not executed.

It is not limited to whether it is a special period or not, and may be possible to execute any setting suggestion effect at different rates depending on whether any special condition is established. For example, when a special condition is established, it may be possible to execute a setting suggestion effect at a higher rate than when the special condition is not established. In this case, a limit is set as a limit that the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect is lower in the range where the special condition is not established than in the range where the special condition is established. It is also possible to set a setting suggestion effect that is executable at a predetermined rate when the special condition is established and is not executed when the special condition is not established. In this way, in the range where the special condition is established, it is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect at a predetermined rate. On the other hand, in the range where the special condition is not established, a limit is set as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed. The special condition may be any condition that can be established depending on the progress or history of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 or the result of the game judgment or decision, or it may be any condition that can be established depending on the progress or history of the performance in the pachinko game machine 1 or the judgment or decision of the performance. The optional effects are not limited to the setting suggestion effects, and may be executable at different rates depending on whether or not a preset condition is met, or the performance mode may be determined at different rates depending on whether or not such a condition is met, or the execution timing may be determined at different rates depending on whether or not such a condition is met. In addition, the optional effects may be limited so that a limit is set such that a specific effect is not executed within a range where a preset limiting condition is met, or a limit is set such that the execution rate is lower and the effect is less likely to be executed compared to a range where the limiting condition is not met.

(Means for solving the problem and effects of characteristic part 91AK)
The present invention relates to a gaming machine, such as a pachinko gaming machine 1, capable of executing a game, and includes a performance execution means, such as a performance control microprocessor 91AK100, capable of executing a specific performance that displays a moving image to which a text image is added, such as a reach performance of SP Reach A or SP Reach B, a first memory area, such as a memory area 91AKM11, for storing data related to the moving image, a second memory area, such as a memory area 91AKM13, for storing data related to the text image, and a moving image control means, such as a video decoder 91AK143 and a moving image renderer 91AK144, for controlling the display of the moving image using the stored data in the first memory area. The display device includes a display control means for controlling the display of a character image using the stored data in the second storage area, and a character image control means, such as a video decoder 91AK143 and a text image renderer 91AK146, for controlling the display of the character image using the stored data in the second storage area, the stored data in the second storage area including data on a plurality of character image components including a first component such as a text image designated by text image designation information and a second component such as a display style set by text display setting information, and the character image control means is capable of changing the first component and the second component during a display period of a character image added to one moving image, for example, as shown in Fig. 8-7. This allows a variety of character image displays to be easily and with high quality, and enables appropriate display control to prevent an increase in data capacity and processing load.

The character image control means may be capable of changing the second component related to the character image when displaying a character image corresponding to a common first component during a display period, for example as shown in FIG. 8-8. This enables appropriate display control so that a variety of character image displays can be performed.

The character image control means may be capable of changing the second component related to the character image, for example as shown in FIG. 8-6, by using information common to a specific image different from the character image, such as field data constituting a color field. This enables appropriate display control to reduce the processing load.

The character image control means can display a specific character image corresponding to a specific first component group, such as a text image showing "super hot," and may be able to change the second component related to the specific character image at multiple times, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-8. This allows for appropriate display control so that a variety of character image displays can be implemented.

The character image control means may be capable of individually changing and displaying the first and second components of the character image, for example as shown in FIG. 8-4. This allows for appropriate display control so that a variety of character image displays can be implemented.

The stored data in the second storage area may include outline data that can be used to display character images, such as outline font data. This allows a variety of character images to be displayed easily and with high quality, while enabling appropriate display control to prevent increases in data volume and processing burden.

When a specific element, such as the color field being "gold," is set as a text image component, it may be possible to display a glossy text image, as shown in FIG. 8-8, with an effect image added around the text image. This allows for appropriate display control to enhance the player's impression of the text image display and increase the interest of the presentation produced by the text image display.

When a special element, such as when the color field is set to "rainbow," is set as a character image component, it may be possible to display a character image in which multiple display colors are changed sequentially, for example, from red, orange, yellow, green, light blue, blue-purple, to red-purple, within a predetermined range, such as the range of intra-character coordinates or display time. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and increase the interest of the presentation produced by the character image display.

(Means for solving the problem and effects of characteristic part 92AK)
A gaming machine, such as a pachinko gaming machine 1, capable of executing a game, comprising: a performance execution means, such as a performance control microprocessor 91AK100, capable of executing a specific performance that displays a moving image to which a text image is added, such as a reach performance of SP Reach A or SP Reach B; a first memory area, such as a memory area 91AKM11, for storing data relating to the moving image; a second memory area, such as a memory area 91AKM13, for storing data relating to the text image; a video control means, such as a video decoder 91AK143 and a video renderer 91AK144, for controlling the display of the moving image using the stored data of the first memory area; and a video decoder 91AK143 for controlling the display of the text image using the stored data of the second memory area. and a character image control means such as a text image renderer 91AK146, the storage data in the second storage area includes data on a plurality of character image components including a first component such as a text image designated by text image designation information and a second component such as a display style set by text display setting information, and the character image control means can add character images using data on common character images, such as text images according to text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02, to a first moving image such as a moving image using moving image data 91AKD01 and a second moving image different from the first moving image such as a moving image using moving image data 91AKD11, for example. This allows a variety of character image displays to be easily and with high quality, and enables appropriate display control to prevent increases in data capacity and processing load.

The character image control means may be capable of changing the second component of the character image when displaying a character image corresponding to a common first component during the display period of the character image added to one moving image, for example as shown in FIG. 8-8. This enables appropriate display control so that a variety of character image displays can be performed.

The character image control means may be capable of changing the second component related to the character image, for example as shown in FIG. 8-6, by using information common to a specific image different from the character image, such as field data constituting a color field. This enables appropriate display control to reduce the processing load.

The character image control means can display a specific character image corresponding to a specific first component group, such as a text image showing "super hot," and may be able to change the second component related to the specific character image at multiple times, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-8. This allows for appropriate display control so that a variety of character image displays can be implemented.

The character image control means may be capable of individually changing and displaying the first and second components of the character image, for example as shown in FIG. 8-4. This allows for appropriate display control so that a variety of character image displays can be implemented.

The stored data in the second storage area may include outline data that can be used to display character images, such as outline font data. This allows a variety of character images to be displayed easily and with high quality, while enabling appropriate display control to prevent increases in data volume and processing burden.

When a specific element, such as the color field being "gold," is set as a text image component, it may be possible to display a glossy text image, as shown in FIG. 8-8, with an effect image added around the text image. This allows for appropriate display control to enhance the player's impression of the text image display and increase the interest of the presentation produced by the text image display.

When a special element, such as when the color field is set to "rainbow," is set as a character image component, it may be possible to display a character image in which multiple display colors are changed sequentially, for example, from red, orange, yellow, green, light blue, blue-purple, to red-purple, within a predetermined range, such as the range of intra-character coordinates or display time. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and increase the interest of the presentation produced by the character image display.

(Explanation regarding association of characteristic parts)
The configurations related to the characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK may be appropriately combined with a part or all of the configurations related to the characteristic part 60AK, etc. For example, an operation presentation to be executed after a predetermined period of time may be executed as a setting suggestion presentation that is an operation presentation of a suggestion presentation mode, and the first component and the second component may be changeable during a display period of a character image added to one moving image, or a character image using data related to a common character image may be added to the first moving image and a second moving image different from the first moving image and displayed.

(Explanation regarding characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK)
9-1 shows a configuration example 01AKP0 of the screen display in the image display device 5 with respect to the characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK. In the configuration example 01AKP0, an active display area 01AKA1, a first reserved display area 01AKB1, a second reserved display area 01AKB2, and a small symbol display area 01AKC1 are provided on the screen of the image display device 5.

In the active display area 01AKA1, an active display is performed by displaying a performance image corresponding to the variable display being executed. In the first pending display area 01AKB1, a pending display is performed by displaying a performance image corresponding to the variable display whose execution is pending, according to the first pending memory number. In the second pending display area 01AKB2, a pending display is performed by displaying a performance image corresponding to the variable display whose execution is pending, according to the second pending memory number. In this way, in the active display area 01AKA1, the first pending display area 01AKB1, and the second pending display area 01AKB2, active display and pending display that become specific displays based on information related to the variable display are possible. The pending display in the first pending display area 01AKB1 is also called the "first pending display", and the pending display in the second pending display area 01AKB2 is also called the "second pending display".

The first reserved display area 01AKB1 may display reserved items corresponding to reserved numbers "1", "2", "3", and "4" in order from the right end, and the display area may be configured so that the first reserved items are displayed right-justified. The second reserved display area 01AKB2 may display reserved items corresponding to reserved numbers "1", "2", "3", and "4" in order from the left end, and the display area may be configured so that the second reserved items are displayed left-justified. In the active display area 01AKA1, an active display corresponding to the first reserved item that has been erased (consumed) in the first reserved display area 01AKB1 in response to the start of the first special game is started, and an active display corresponding to the second reserved item that has been erased (consumed) in the second reserved display area 01AKB2 in response to the start of the second special game is started. The active display that can be displayed in the active display area 01AKA1 may have a common color or pattern with the first hold display and the second hold display, and may, for example, be a display image that is common to the first hold display and the second hold display and is displayed larger than each hold display. The display mode of the active display may change to a display mode different from that of the first hold display and the second hold display by executing an active display change performance. In addition, in the active display area 01AKA1, for example, a performance image showing a pedestal may be displayed below the active display, making it possible to distinguish the active display from the first hold display and the second hold display.

A small pattern display area 01AKC1 is arranged at a predetermined position on the screen of the image display device 5. The small pattern display area 01AKC1 is smaller than the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right", and is provided at a predetermined position, such as the right end of the screen of the image display device 5. In the small pattern display area 01AKC1, variable display of small patterns is executed in response to variable display of special patterns and decorative patterns. The performance image showing the small pattern is reduced in size compared to the identification information image which is a performance image showing a decorative pattern, and may be a reduced identification information image capable of variable display in a manner in which it is partially or entirely common to each of the identification information images showing the decorative patterns. For example, when the identification information image showing the decorative pattern includes a portion showing a number and a portion showing a character, the performance image showing the small pattern is an image showing a number corresponding to the pattern number similar to the portion showing the number included in the decorative pattern, and does not include a portion showing a character, so that it may be capable of displaying the small pattern in a simpler manner than the performance image showing the decorative pattern. By displaying small symbols in a simple manner in the small symbol display area 01AKC1, it is possible to prevent the player from misinterpreting the display contents and display results of the small symbols. In the small symbol display area 01AKC1 provided on the screen of the image display device 5, a variable display of small symbols that serve as reduced identification information is performed, and a confirmed small symbol that serves as the display result is derived. The performance image showing the small symbol may be displayed in a position that is always visible.

Figure 9-2 shows an example of the configuration of a drawing command for effects. In this embodiment, commands 01AKG01 to 01AKG06 are prepared in advance as multiple drawing commands for effects. Command 01AKG01 is a drawing command that commands color blending for blurring using bilinear sampling. Command 01AKG02 is a drawing command that commands color blending for inverting color information. Command 01AKG03 is a drawing command that commands color blending for blurring using a magnification change. Command 01AKG04 is a drawing command that commands color blending for monochrome conversion. Command 01AKG05 is a drawing command that commands color blending for blurring using rotation. Command 01AKG06 is a drawing command that commands a change in the offset amount of the image position.

The drawing command for effect may be prepared as one drawing command or as a display list. The display list is a group of commands that perform drawing control, and can be created by the CPU 91AK131 as a command string combining multiple commands for the VDP 91AK132. The VDP 91AK132 can execute drawing processing in the order described in the display list. The drawing command for effect may be composed of a combination of a group of commands that perform multiple types of inter-pixel calculation settings. For example, in a drawing command that commands color blending, parameters corresponding to the effect to be applied may be set to function as a drawing command for each effect. For example, the internal register of the VDP 91AK132 stores control data that specifies the calculation target included in the display list, numerical data that specifies the parameters, and other register values, and drawing according to the display list is started by storing register values corresponding to the execution command.

When performing color blending for blurring using bilinear sampling in response to command 01AKG01, a reduced image is generated, for example, by texture mapping using a bilinear interpolation method for the image data. When generating this reduced image, multiple reduced images with different sampling point groups may be generated. Using the multiple reduced images generated in this way, a composite reduced image is generated by performing a compositing process using color blending, such as alpha blending. The composite reduced image can then be enlarged to render the generated image by changing the color information contained in the image data, so that the image is blurred.

When executing a color blend that inverts color information in response to command 01AKG02, for example, a difference calculation process is performed with the maximum value (e.g., 255) for the RGB values, which are the color information of each pixel (one pixel) shown in the image data. For example, if the R value corresponding to "red" is "80", 255-80=175 is obtained, and the color information can be inverted. By performing a similar difference calculation process on the G value corresponding to "green" and the B value corresponding to "blue", an image can be drawn that has been generated by changing the color information contained in the image data so that the image has inverted color information.

When performing color blending for blurring by changing magnification in response to command 01AKG03, multiple enlarged or reduced images are generated by, for example, scaling the image data. At this time, multiple enlarged or reduced images with different magnifications, such as the image magnification or reduction ratio, are generated. For example, for an image with a display magnification of 100%, two types of enlarged images are generated, such as an image with a display magnification of 102% and an image with a display magnification of 104%. By performing a composition process using color blending, such as alpha blending, using the multiple enlarged or reduced images generated in this way and an image corresponding to the original image data (original image), it is possible to draw an image generated by changing the color information contained in the image data so that it becomes an image that has been subjected to blurring processing.

When executing color blending to convert to monochrome in response to command 01AKG04, for example, monochrome conversion calculation processing is performed for each pixel (1 pixel) on the RGB values, which are the color information of each pixel (1 pixel) shown in the image data. In monochrome conversion calculation processing, the color information can be changed so that the image becomes monochrome by substituting the RGB values into the calculation formula for color tone conversion. In this way, by executing monochrome conversion calculation processing, it is possible to draw an image generated by changing the color information contained in the image data so that the image has been converted to monochrome.

When performing color blending for blurring by rotation in response to command 01AKG05, multiple rotated images are generated by performing a rotation calculation process on the image data, for example. In this case, multiple rotated images with different image rotation angles are generated. For example, for an image with a rotation angle of 0°, two types of rotated images are generated, such as an image with a rotation angle of 2° and an image with a rotation angle of 4°. By performing a synthesis process using color blending, such as alpha blending, using the multiple rotated images generated in this way and an image corresponding to the original image data (original image), it is possible to draw the generated image by changing the color information contained in the image data so that it becomes an image that has been subjected to blurring processing.

When changing the offset amount of the image position in response to command 01AKG06, the position information of the image is changed, for example, by a coordinate value conversion process on the image data. The coordinate value conversion process changes the position information when drawing an image, such as UV coordinate values, according to the offset amount set as a parameter. The UV coordinate values are given as texture coordinate attribute values when mapping a texture to an object. By executing the coordinate value conversion process, it is possible to draw an image generated by changing the position information corresponding to the image data so that the image has a different texture arrangement.

In this way, the drawing command for effect may include a command that makes it possible to draw an image generated by changing color information contained in image data, such as commands 01AKG01 to 01AKG05. The drawing command for effect may also include a command that makes it possible to draw an image generated by changing position information corresponding to image data, such as command 01AKG06. In addition, the drawing command for effect may include a command that makes it possible to draw an image generated by changing any attribute information related to image data.

Unlike these effect drawing commands, the CPU 91AK131 can also generate normal display drawing commands. Normal display drawing commands perform processing to draw an image corresponding to image data without changing the color information contained in the image data, by not performing synthesis processing such as color blending.

Figure 9-3 shows an example of a screen display configuration including various performance images that can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. The multiple performance images displayed on the image display device 5 are drawn in multiple display layers. The multiple display layers are set with different display priorities in advance as display layers for performance images. In the configuration example shown in Figure 9-3, layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5 are provided as multiple display layers. Of these, layer 01AKL1 is the display layer with the highest display priority, and draws performance images showing small patterns in the small pattern display area 01AKC1 in a displayable manner. Layer 01AKL2 is the display layer with the second highest display priority after layer 01AKL1, and draws performance images corresponding to the pending display and active display in a displayable manner. Layer 01AKL2 may also draw a performance image showing a pedestal below the active display in a displayable manner. Layer 01AKL3 is the display layer with the second highest display priority after layer 01AKL2, and displays and draws effect images used in chance-up effects that increase the chance of a win during a reach. Layer 01AKL4 is the display layer with the second highest display priority after layer 01AKL3, and displays and draws effect images showing decorative patterns in the "left," "middle," and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Layer 01AKL5 is the display layer with the lowest display priority, and displays and draws effect images that become background images.

The display layers on which the multiple effect images are arranged are specified by, for example, display priority information included in the display list. In the display list, the effect image arranged on layer 01AKL5 may be specified as the first drawing target, and then the effect images arranged on each display layer may be specified as the drawing target in the order of layers 01AKL4, 01AKL3, 01AKL2, and 01AKL1. In addition, for example, a Z value that is a depth value used when drawing each effect image by superimposing it may be set in the image data of the effect image drawn on each layer 01AKL1 to 01AKL5. By setting the Z value using the Z value setting table, the Z value of the effect image drawn on each layer 01AKL1 to 01AKL5 may be different depending on the layer on which it is drawn. For example, a display layer assigned a smaller Z value may be arranged closer to the front (front side) in the Z axis direction than a display layer assigned a larger Z value, so that the display priority of the image is higher.

When writing image data read from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like to a frame buffer provided in the VRAM 91AK147 or the like, the VDP 91AK132 may perform a comparison calculation of the Z value to determine the display priority. At this time, for example, image data of an effect image with a small Z value is written to the frame buffer in preference to image data of an effect image with a large Z value. As a result, an effect image drawn on a display layer assigned a small Z value has a higher display priority than an effect image drawn on a display layer assigned a large Z value, and can be placed on the near side (front side) as viewed from the player. On the other hand, an effect image drawn on a display layer assigned a large Z value has a lower display priority than an effect image drawn on a display layer assigned a small Z value, and can be placed on the far side (rear side) as viewed from the player. The relationship between the Z value and the display priority may be reversed, and a display layer assigned a larger Z value may be positioned closer to the front in the Z axis direction than a display layer assigned a smaller Z value, so that the image has a higher display priority.

In this way, a rendering process of the performance image according to the display layer is executed, and a display image 01AKD1 containing multiple performance images is generated. The display image 01AKD1 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 after the images rendered on layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5 are composited so as to be superimposable as multiple display layers with different display priorities.

Of layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5, layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 are special layers, and layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 are specific layers. In layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are included in the specific layers, it is possible to draw and display performance images using a drawing process that is different from the performance images drawn in layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are included in the special layers.

Figure 9-4 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect drawing synthesis process executed by the VDP 91AK132. The effect drawing synthesis process is executed, for example, when a display list including an effect drawing command is transferred based on the result of decoding the instruction code by the instruction decoder 91AK141 of the VDP 91AK132. When the effect drawing synthesis process is started, the image data to be subjected to the effect processing is read (step 01AKS01). For example, the VDP 91AK132 reads the image data to be processed from the performance data memory 91AK123, etc., and temporarily stores it in the work area of the VRAM 91AK147, etc. The data transfer circuit of the VDP 91AK132 accesses the address of the image data specified by the drawing command, reads the image data to be processed from the performance data memory 91AK123 or the buffer area of the VRAM 91AK147, etc., and transfers it to the work area of the VRAM 91AK147, etc., for storage. The image data to be subjected to effect processing is specified by the drawing command as image data indicating an image to be drawn on one of the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which is a specific layer among the multiple display layers.

Then, effect color blending is performed according to the drawing command (step 01AKS02). For example, the VDP 91AK132 may perform color blending according to any of commands 01AKG01 to 01AKG05, for example, by performing pixel-to-pixel calculation processing specified in the drawing command using some or all of the moving image renderer 91AK144, character image renderer 91AK145, and text image renderer 91AK146. In the case of command 01AKG06, a coordinate value conversion process may be performed to change the offset amount of the image position in texture mapping.

After step 01AKS02, the images are composited and drawn in accordance with the low-priority display layer (step 01AKS03). At this time, the image on which the effect color blend was performed in step 01AKS02 is drawn in the frame buffer for screen display of the VRAM 91AK147. For example, the VDP 91AK132 may use some or all of the moving image renderer 91AK144, character image renderer 91AK145, and text image renderer 91AK146 to perform pixel-to-pixel calculation processing specified by the drawing command, and store the images drawn on layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 in the frame buffer for screen display while compositing them according to the display priority. In this way, an image drawn on any of layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which is a specific layer, can be drawn for screen display after changing the color information of the image data by performing the effect color blend.

After step 01AKS03, the images are composited and drawn in accordance with the high-priority display layer (step 01AKS04). For example, the VDP 91AK132 reads image data to be drawn from the performance data memory 91AK123, etc., and draws it in the frame buffer for screen display in the VRAM 91AK147. In this frame buffer, an image in a low-priority display layer has already been drawn in step 01AKS03. The data transfer circuit of the VDP 91AK132 accesses the address of the image data specified by the drawing command to read the image data to be drawn from the performance data memory 91AK123 or the buffer area of the VRAM 91AK147, etc., and transfers and stores it in the frame buffer for screen display in the VRAM 91AK147. At this time, the moving image renderer 91AK144, the character image renderer 91AK145, and the text image renderer 91AK146, in part or in whole, execute inter-pixel calculation processing specified by the drawing command, and the images drawn on the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 are stored in a frame buffer for screen display while being composited according to the display priority. The image data to be drawn in step 01AKS04 is specified by the drawing command as image data indicating an image to be drawn on one of the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which will be a special layer, among the multiple display layers. As a result, the image drawn on one of the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which will be a special layer, can be drawn for screen display without executing effect color blending and without changing the color information of the image data.

In this way, the VDP 91AK132 can execute drawing processes to display various images on the screen of the image display device 5, using image data stored in a specified area of the performance data memory 91AK123 or the VRAM 91AK147. Also, by executing an effect drawing synthesis process, on the one hand, it is possible to change the color information contained in the image data and draw an image drawn on any of layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, and on the other hand, it is possible to draw an image drawn on any of layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, in accordance with the image data.

When a display list including normal display drawing commands but not effect drawing commands is transferred, the VDP 91AK132 can execute normal drawing compositing processing, which is different from the effect drawing compositing processing. In the normal drawing compositing processing, the data transfer circuit of the VDP 91AK132 accesses the address of the image data specified by the drawing command to read the image data to be drawn from the performance data memory 91AK123 or the buffer area of the VRAM 91AK147, and transfers and stores the image data to the frame buffer for screen display in the VRAM 91AK147. At this time, the moving image renderer 91AK144, the character image renderer 91AK145, and the text image renderer 91AK146 execute pixel-to-pixel arithmetic processing specified by the drawing command, or some or all of them, to store the images drawn on the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 in the frame buffer for screen display while compositing them according to the display priority. In this case, images drawn on layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, and layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, can be drawn for screen display without performing effect color blending and without changing the color information of the image data.

Figure 9-5 shows an example of image processing using the effect drawing compositing process. In this case, in a display list including drawing commands for effects, of layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 included in a specific layer, image data 01AKD03 of a performance image to be placed on layer 01AKL3, image data 01AKD04 of a performance image to be placed on layer 01AKL4, and image data 01AKD05 of a performance image to be placed on layer 01AKL5 are specified as the image data to be subjected to effect processing. When the VDP 91AK132 reads out these image data in step 91AKS01 of the effect drawing compositing process, it stores and temporarily stores them in a sub-frame buffer 01AKF01 provided in a work area or the like of the VRAM 91AK147. As a result, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (A1), image data 01AKD03 of the performance image placed on layer 01AKL3, image data 01AKD04 of the performance image placed on layer 01AKL4, and image data 01AKD05 of the performance image placed on layer 01AKL5 are stored in sub-frame buffer 01AKF01.

Then, the VDP 91AK132 performs color blending for effects on the image data stored in the subframe buffer 01AKF01 in step 91AKS02 of the effect drawing synthesis process. For example, if color blending for monochrome conversion is specified by command 01AKG04 as the effect drawing command, the color information included in the image data is changed by executing monochrome conversion calculation processing. As a result, the color information of the image data 01AKD03 of the performance image placed on layer 01AKL3 is changed to become monochrome converted image data 01AKD13 as shown in FIG. 9-5 (A2). The color information of the image data 01AKD04 of the performance image placed on layer 01AKL4 is changed to become monochrome converted image data 01AKD14 as shown in FIG. 9-5 (A2). The color information of the image data 01AKD05 of the performance image placed on layer 01AKL5 is changed to become monochrome converted image data 01AKD15 as shown in FIG. 9-5 (A2).

After that, the VDP 91AK132 synthesizes an image corresponding to a low-priority display layer in step 91AKS03 of the effect drawing synthesis process. For example, the image data read from the sub-frame buffer 01AKF01 is written and stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02 in order from the display layer with the lowest display priority. At this time, the image data may be overwritten or hidden surface erased according to the display priority. Of the image data 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 stored in the sub-frame buffer 01AKF01 shown in FIG. 9-5 (A2), the image data 01AKD15 of the performance image arranged in the layer 01AKL5 is read first and written and stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02. The image data 01AKD14 of the performance image arranged in the layer 01AKL4 is read second and written and synthesized by superimposing it on the image data 01AKD15 stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02. The image data 01AKD13 of the performance image placed on layer 01AKL3 is read out third, and then superimposed and written onto the image data 01AKD14 and 01AKD15 stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02 for synthesis.

Then, VDP91AKD132 synthesizes the image corresponding to the high-priority display layer in step 91AKS04 of the effect drawing synthesis process. At this time, for example, by a drawing command included in the display list, the image data 01AKD02 of the performance image to be placed on layer 01AKL2 of the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 included in the special layer is specified as the image data to be drawn, and the image data 01AKD01 of the performance image to be placed on layer 01AKL1 is specified next. Each time VDP91AK132 reads out these image data, it writes them into the main frame buffer 01AKF02 and stores them. That is, among the image data 01AKD01 and 01AKD02 to be drawn, the image data 01AKD02 of the performance image to be placed on layer 01AKL2 is read out first, and is superimposed and written on the image data 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02 for synthesis. The image data 01AKD01 of the performance image placed on layer 01AKL1 is read out last, and then superimposed and written onto the image data 01AKD02, 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02, and composited.

In this way, the image data 01AKD03-01AKD05 temporarily stored in the sub-frame buffer 01AKF01 is converted to image data 01AKD13-01AKD15 whose color information has been changed by the effect color blend, and the converted image data 01AKD13-01AKD15 is written to the main frame buffer 01AKF02 in an order according to the display priority. After that, the image data 01AKD01 and 01AKD02 are written to the main frame buffer 01AKF02 in an order according to the display priority without changing the color information by not executing the effect color blend. Therefore, in the specific layers 01AKL3-01AKL5, various images for effects, such as background images, effect images showing decorative patterns, and effect images for chance up during a reach, can be displayed by drawing using a specific drawing process such as the effect color blend. In contrast, the special layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 are drawn using normal drawing processing that does not perform color blending for effects, making it possible to display predetermined images related to the progress of the game, such as presentation images showing pending and active displays, and presentation images showing small patterns.

Figure 9-6 shows an example of an image displayed by executing the effect drawing compositing process. When a display list including effect drawing commands is transferred, the VDP91AK132 can execute the effect drawing compositing process to display an image for presentation drawn by modifying the color information, etc., contained in the image data.

Figure 9-6 (A) shows the image display example 01AKM01 in the case of monochrome conversion. When a display list including command 01AKG04 is transferred as an effect drawing command, layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, can display images for presentation drawn by monochrome conversion calculation processing or the like in the effect color blend. Monochrome conversion calculation processing is processing for drawing with fewer colors than the color information contained in the image data. As a result, layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers of image display example 01AKM01, can display images for presentation drawn by monochrome conversion calculation processing or the like, which draws with fewer colors than the color information contained in the image data, as a specific drawing processing. Layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers of image display example 01AKM01, can display predetermined images related to the progress of the game by drawing with the normal drawing processing without changing the color information contained in the image data.

Figure 9-6 (B) shows the image display example 01AKM02 in the case of color information inversion. When a display list including command 01AKG02 is transferred as an effect drawing command, layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, can display images for presentation drawn by differential calculation processing or the like in the effect color blend. Differential calculation processing is a process for converting and drawing the value of color information contained in the image data so that it is inverted based on the difference with the maximum value. As a result, layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers of image display example 01AKM02, can display images for presentation drawn by differential calculation processing, which converts and draws the value of color information contained in the image data, as a specific drawing process. Layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers of image display example 01AKM02, can display predetermined images related to the progress of the game by drawing the value of color information contained in the image data without converting it using normal drawing processing.

In addition, when a display list including command 01AKG01 is transferred as an effect drawing command, layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, can display an image for presentation drawn by modifying the color information contained in the image data using a synthesis process that performs a blurring color blend using bilinear sampling as a specific drawing process. In this case, layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, can display a predetermined image related to the progress of the game by drawing without modifying the color information contained in the image data using normal drawing process.

When a display list including command 01AKG03 is transferred as an effect drawing command, layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, can display an image for presentation drawn by modifying the color information contained in the image data through a compositing process that performs a color blend for blurring by changing the magnification as a specific drawing process. In this case, layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, can display a predetermined image related to the progress of the game by drawing without modifying the color information contained in the image data through normal drawing process.

When a display list including command 01AKG05 is transferred as an effect drawing command, layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, can display an image for presentation drawn by modifying the color information contained in the image data using a compositing process that performs color blending for blurring due to rotation as a specific drawing process. In this case, layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, can display a predetermined image related to the progress of the game by drawing without modifying the color information contained in the image data using normal drawing process.

When a display list including command 01AKG06 is transferred as an effect drawing command, layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, can display an image for presentation drawn by changing the position information corresponding to the image data using a coordinate value conversion process that changes the offset amount of the image position as a specific drawing process. In this case, layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, can display a predetermined image related to the progress of the game by drawing without changing the position information corresponding to the image data using a normal drawing process.

By using these effect drawing commands, it is possible to display on a specific layer an image for presentation that is drawn by modifying the color information contained in the image data, or an image for presentation that is drawn by modifying the position information corresponding to the image data. As a result, even if an image for presentation is drawn using common image data, it is possible to change the color information or position information and draw it by making it possible to execute different image processing according to the effect drawing command, so that it is possible to prevent the amount of image data from increasing while executing a variety of display effects and increasing the interest in the game.

Figure 9-7 (A) shows an example of the setting of the jackpot reliability according to the reach performance contents. The jackpot reliability for each reach performance is the proportion of cases in which the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" and the game is controlled to a jackpot game state among cases in which the respective reach performance is executed. In this setting example, the jackpot reliability is set to differ according to the reach performance that becomes a super reach of multiple types, such as SP reach A1 to A3 or SP reach B. For example, in the variable display pattern determination table, it is sufficient to set the proportion of the variable display result becoming a "jackpot" according to multiple types of reach performance by allocating a determination value that is compared with a random number value for determining the variable display pattern.

SP Reach A1 to A3 are reach effects of the Super Reach with a lower jackpot reliability than SP Reach B, and are also called "weak SP reach." SP Reach B is a reach effect of the Super Reach with a higher jackpot reliability than SP Reach A1 to A3, and is also called "strong SP reach." For example, the jackpot reliability of SP Reach A1 is 20%, the jackpot reliability of SP Reach A2 is 25%, the jackpot reliability of SP Reach A3 is 30%, and the jackpot reliability of SP Reach B is 80%. Therefore, when the reach performance of SP Reach A1 is executed, the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" about once in five times. In contrast, when the reach performance of SP Reach B is executed, the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" about four times in five times. The reach performance contents may include a performance aspect that allows a part of the SP reach A1 to A3 to be recognized as being similar. For example, the SP reach A1 to A3 may have a common moving image played and displayed as a background image. Alternatively, the SP reach A1 to A3 may have a common character image displayed as an animation. The reach performance contents may include a performance aspect that allows a difference from the SP reach A1 to A3 to be recognized in the case of SP reach B. For example, the SP reach B may have a moving image different from the SP reach A1 to A3 played and displayed as a background image. Alternatively, the SP reach B may have a character image different from the SP reach A1 to A3 displayed as an animation. The reach performance contents may include a performance aspect that allows a difference from the other cases to be recognized in any of the SP reach A1 to A3. For example, the SP reach A1 to A3 may have a moving image different from each other played and displayed as a background image. Alternatively, the SP Reach A1 to A3 may be displayed as animations of different character images. Other presentation modes that allow the difference to be recognized may include any display on the screen of the image display device 5, any sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, any illumination using light-emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 or decorative LEDs, any movement using movable members for presentation, or any combination of some or all of these.

When a reach performance that results in a super reach, such as SP reach A1 to A3, is executed, this includes a case where a drawing performance is executed by displaying an image drawn in response to a drawing command for effect. As a drawing performance, any one of a plurality of types of display performances capable of displaying an image drawn by different drawing processes in response to a drawing command for effect may be selected and executed. As a drawing performance, a display performance may be executed in which an image drawn in response to a drawing command other than the drawing command for effect is not displayed, but an image drawn in response to a drawing command different from the drawing command for effect is displayed. When a reach performance that results in a super reach is executed, this may include a case where a performance is executed by displaying an image drawn in response to only a drawing command for normal display without executing a specific drawing performance.

Figure 9-7 (B) shows an example of the setting of drawing performance contents according to the drawing performance pattern. In this setting example, drawing performance patterns 02AKA01, 02AKA02, 02AKB01, 02AKB02, 02AKB11, and 02AKB12 are prepared in advance as multiple drawing performance patterns. Some or all of the drawing performance contents differ depending on these multiple drawing performance patterns. The drawing performance contents include the presence or absence and type of drawing performance by effect display, and the presence or absence of drawing performance by strobe display. Drawing performances that do not include effect display or strobe display are also called normal drawing performances. Drawing performances by effect display or strobe display are also called specific drawing performances.

The effect display is a performance display that changes and draws the color information contained in the image data when an effect drawing command is generated and transferred. Types of effect displays include a monochrome conversion effect and a color information inversion effect. The monochrome conversion effect uses command 01AKG04 from among the effect drawing commands to draw and display a performance image that has been subjected to monochrome conversion. The color information inversion effect uses command 02 from among the effect drawing commands to draw and display a performance image with inverted color information. In this way, the effect display only needs to be able to display a performance image drawn by changing the color information contained in the image data. Note that the effect display may also be able to display a performance image drawn by changing the position information corresponding to the image data, for example, using command 01AKG06 from among the effect drawing commands.

The strobe display is a performance display that alternates between an image drawn using image data and a single-color image (e.g., black or white) with settings different from the image data every predetermined number of frames. The strobe display may be executed for images drawn on layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, when a drawing command different from the effect drawing command is generated and transferred. In contrast, the strobe display may not be executed for images drawn on layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers. In this way, while the strobe display may be executed within the range of images drawn on specific layers, a limit may be set that the strobe display is not executed within the range of images drawn on special layers. A pause display may be performed together with the strobe display. The pause display is a performance display that gives the impression that the progress of the performance by the display of images has been paused by continuously displaying the same image over a predetermined number of consecutive frames. Note that the pause display may be performed when the strobe display is not executed.

Figure 9-8 shows an example of how a drawing presentation pattern is determined. For example, in the presentation control process in step S76, when the variable display start setting process is executed in step S171, it is sufficient to determine one of a number of drawing presentation patterns in a ratio according to the variable display result and reach presentation content as shown in Figure 9-8. When a variable display pattern corresponding to the reach presentation of a super reach is specified, the CPU91AK131 extracts a random number value for determining the drawing presentation pattern, and determines the drawing presentation pattern based on the random number value by referring to a drawing presentation pattern determination table according to the variable display result and reach presentation content.

In the determination example shown in Figure 9-8, when the variable display result is "miss", if the reach performance content is any of SP Reach A1 to A3, there is a 60% (=60/100) probability that it will be determined to be drawing performance pattern 02AKA01, a 10% (=10/100) probability that it will be determined to be drawing performance pattern 02AKA02, a 10% (=10/100) probability that it will be determined to be drawing performance pattern 02AKB01, a 5% (=5/100) probability that it will be determined to be drawing performance pattern 02AKB02, a 10% (=10/100) probability that it will be determined to be drawing performance pattern 02AKB11, and a 5% (=5/100) probability that it will be determined to be drawing performance pattern 02AKB12. In contrast, when the variable display result is "jackpot", if the reach performance content is any of SP reach A1 to A3, there is a 5% (=5/100) probability of it being determined to be drawing performance pattern 02AKA01, a 10% (=10/100) probability of it being determined to be drawing performance pattern 02AKA02, a 15% (=15/100) probability of it being determined to be drawing performance pattern 02AKB01, a 20% (=20/100) probability of it being determined to be drawing performance pattern 02AKB02, a 20% (=20/100) probability of it being determined to be drawing performance pattern 02AKB11, and a 30% (=30/100) probability of it being determined to be drawing performance pattern 02AKB12. Due to this determination ratio, the rate at which the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" and the game is controlled to a jackpot game state differs between drawing performance pattern 02AKA01 and drawing performance patterns other than drawing performance pattern 02AKA01.

The drawing performance pattern 02AKA01 is a pattern that does not execute a specific drawing performance, which is a drawing performance by effect display or strobe display. In contrast, the drawing performance patterns 02AKA02, 02AKB01, 02AKB02, 02AKB11, and 02AKB12 are patterns that execute a specific drawing performance by one or both of effect display and strobe display. And, when the reach performance content is any of the SP reach A1 to A3, if the variable display result is "jackpot", the probability that the drawing performance pattern other than the drawing performance pattern 02AKA01 is determined is higher than when the variable display result is "miss". Therefore, when the reach performance content is any of the SP reach A1 to A3, if a specific drawing performance, which is a drawing performance by effect display or strobe display, is executed, the probability that the variable display result becomes "jackpot" and the game state is controlled to be a jackpot is higher than when the specific drawing performance is not executed. In addition, the determination rate of drawing performance patterns other than drawing performance pattern 02AKA01 is set according to the variable display result so that the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state is higher than that of drawing performance pattern 02AKA01.

When the reach performance content is SP Reach B, only drawing performance pattern 02AKA01 can be determined, and a restriction is set so that no other pattern can be determined. When the reach performance content is SP Reach B, a reach performance of a super reach is executed, which is a "strong SP reach" that has a higher jackpot reliability than the SP reaches A1 to A3. In such a case, if a specific drawing performance is executed by effect display or strobe display, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the reach performance of the super reach, which has a high jackpot reliability, and there is a risk of reducing interest in the game. Therefore, a restriction is set as a limit that a specific drawing performance by effect display or strobe display is not executed within the range where the reach performance content is SP Reach B. This prevents the player's attention from being distracted from the reach performance of the super reach, which has a high jackpot reliability, and appropriately increases interest in the game.

When the reach performance content is any of the SP reaches A1 to A3, it can be determined to be any of the drawing performance patterns 02AKA01, 02AKA02, 02AKB01, 02AKB02, 02AKB11, 02AKB12 at different rates depending on the variable display result. When the reach performance content is any of the SP reaches A1 to A3, a reach performance of a super reach is executed, which is a "weak SP reach" with a lower jackpot reliability than in the case of SP reach B. In such a case, when a specific drawing performance is executed by effect display or strobe display, the variable display result becomes a "jackpot", and the probability that it is controlled to a jackpot game state increases. In this way, when the reach effect content is any of the SP reach A1 to A3, the specific drawing effect is executed, which increases the probability of control to a jackpot game state. Therefore, even in the case of a super reach reach effect, which has a low jackpot reliability, the execution of the specific drawing effect can heighten the player's expectations and appropriately increase the player's interest in the game.

Note that even when the reach performance content is SP reach B, it may be possible to determine a pattern other than drawing performance pattern 02AKA01 at a specified rate. However, when the reach performance content is SP reach B, it may be possible to determine a pattern other than drawing performance pattern 02AKA01 at a lower rate than when the reach performance content is SP reach A1 to A3. In this way, a restriction may be set as a limit such that in the range where the reach performance content is SP reach B, specific drawing performances using effect displays or strobe displays can be executed at a lower rate than in the range where the reach performance content is SP reach A1 to A3.

Figure 9-9 (A) shows the performance execution period in the variable display of a super reach. When the variable display of a super reach is executed, the period from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable display can be divided into a plurality of performance execution periods such as performance execution periods D0 to D4. The performance execution period D0 is the period from the start of the variable display to the start of the execution of the reach performance after the reach is established. The performance execution period D1 is the period from the start of the reach performance execution period in which the reach performance that becomes a super reach is executed to the start of the chance up performance execution period in which the chance up performance can be executed. The performance execution period D2 is the period from the start of the chance up performance execution period to the start of the result notification performance execution period in which the result notification performance can be executed after the chance up performance execution period ends. The result notification performance may be any performance that notifies the performance result corresponding to the display result of the variable display in the reach performance that becomes a super reach. The performance execution period D3 is the period from the start to the end of the result notification performance execution period. The performance execution period D4 is the period from the end of the result notification performance execution period to the end of the variable display.

Figure 9-9 (B) shows an example of performance control 02AKC01 during each performance execution period. Of the multiple performance execution periods D0 to D4, during performance execution period D2, which is from the start of the chance-up performance execution period to the start of the result notification performance execution period, if the drawing performance pattern is other than 02AKA01, the specific drawing performance SPE can be executed. If the drawing performance pattern is 02AKA01, the specific drawing performance SPE is not executed, so even during performance execution period D2, the specific drawing performance SPE is not executed and the normal drawing performance NOR can be executed.

Among the multiple performance execution periods D0 to D4, in the performance execution period D0 from the start of the variable display to the start of the reach performance of the super reach, regardless of whether the drawing performance pattern is 02AKA01 or other than 02AKA01, the specific drawing performance SPE is not executed and the normal drawing performance NOR can be executed. For example, in the performance execution period D0, when the variable display of the decorative pattern starts, it is sufficient that a light-emitting performance using the game effect lamp 9 or other decorative LEDs can be executed in response to the BGM and sound effect output. Also, in the performance execution period D0, when the decorative pattern is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, or when the decorative pattern constituting the pseudo consecutive chance eye is stopped and displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, a light-emitting performance using the game effect lamp 9 or other decorative LEDs can be executed in response to the BGM and sound effect output. In addition, during the entire performance execution period D0, the normal drawing performance NOR is executed, and it may be possible to execute a light-emitting performance using the game effect lamp 9 or other decorative LEDs in response to the background music and sound effect output during the execution of the variable display.

Among the performance execution periods D1 to D4 in which reach performances such as the super reach are executed during execution of the variable display, in the performance execution period D1 following the performance execution period D0, regardless of whether the drawing performance pattern is 02AKA01 or other than 02AKA01, the specific drawing performance SPE is not executed and the normal drawing performance NOR can be executed. In the performance execution period D2 following such performance execution period D1, the normal drawing performance NOR can be executed when the drawing performance pattern is 02AKA01, and the specific drawing performance SPE can be executed when the drawing performance pattern is other than 02AKA01. In the normal drawing performance NOR by the drawing performance pattern 02AKA01, an image drawn by the normal drawing process can be displayed. In the specific drawing performance SPE by other than the drawing performance pattern 02AKA01, for example, an image drawn by the specific drawing process can be displayed in 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers. Note that even if a specific drawing effect SPE is executed using a drawing effect pattern other than 02AKA01, it is sufficient if images drawn using normal drawing processing can be displayed on layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, for example.

In the performance execution period D3 and the performance execution period D4 after the performance execution period D2, regardless of whether the drawing performance pattern is 02AKA01 or other than the drawing performance pattern 02AKA01, the specific drawing performance SPE is not executed and the normal drawing performance NOR can be executed. In the performance execution period D3, as in the performance execution period D2, the normal drawing performance NOR can be executed when the drawing performance pattern is 02AKA01, and the specific drawing performance SPE can be executed when the drawing performance pattern is other than 02AKA01. If the specific drawing performance SPE is executable in the performance execution period D3, the execution of the specific drawing performance SPE may be returned to the execution of the normal drawing performance NOR in the performance execution period D4 for notifying the determination of the determined decorative pattern that is the variable display result. In addition, the specific drawing performance SPE may be executable in all of the multiple performance execution periods D1 to D4. Prior to the variable display in which the reach performance of the Super Reach is executed, the execution of the specific drawing performance SPE may be started based on the result of the determination at the time of the start winning that the reach performance of the Super Reach is to be executed. Even when the specific drawing performance SPE can be executed in a period other than the performance execution period D2, it is sufficient that, as in the case of executing the specific drawing performance SPE in the performance execution period D2, images drawn by the specific drawing process can be displayed on the specific layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, and images drawn by the normal drawing process can be displayed on the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers.

When a normal drawing performance NOR is executed during a period other than the performance execution period D0 among the multiple performance execution periods D0 to D4, a light-emitting performance can be executed using light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs. In contrast, when a specific drawing performance SPE is executed during the performance execution period D2, etc., the light-emitting performance is controlled not to be executed. For example, when a specific drawing performance SPE is executed, the light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs can be turned off to prevent the light-emitting performance from being executed. In this way, when a normal drawing performance NOR capable of displaying an image drawn by a normal drawing process is executed, a light-emitting performance using light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 can be executed. On the other hand, when a specific drawing performance SPE capable of displaying an image drawn by a specific drawing process is executed, a light-emitting performance using light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 is not executed. Therefore, within the range of the performance execution period in which the normal drawing performance NOR, which can display an image drawn by the normal drawing process, is executed, a light-emitting performance using the light-emitting members can be executed, while within the range of the performance execution period in which the specific drawing performance SPE, which can display an image drawn by the specific drawing process, is executed, a limit is set so that a light-emitting performance using the light-emitting members is not executed. When the specific drawing performance SPE using effect display or strobe display is executed, the light-emitting performance is not executed, and the game interest can be increased by an appropriate image display that allows the player to easily recognize the image drawn by the specific drawing process.

When the specific drawing performance SPE is executed during the performance execution period D2, etc., the restriction is not limited to the restriction of not executing the light-emitting performance by emitting the light-emitting members, and the performance mode of the light-emitting performance may be restricted, for example, by reducing the amount of performance of the light-emitting performance compared to when the normal drawing performance NOR is executed. When the specific drawing performance SPE is executed, the restriction may be set so as to reduce the amount of performance by lowering the amount of light emission (brightness) of the light-emitting members in the light-emitting performance compared to when the normal drawing performance NOR is executed. Alternatively, when the specific drawing performance SPE is executed, the restriction may be set so as to reduce the amount of performance by reducing the number of light-emitting members that can emit light in the light-emitting performance compared to when the normal drawing performance NOR is executed. Alternatively, when the specific drawing performance SPE is executed, the restriction may be set so as to reduce the amount of performance by reducing the light-emitting color used in the light-emitting performance (for example, monochromatic light emission) compared to when the normal drawing processing NOR is executed.

Figures 9-10 to 9-13 show examples of reach effects and drawing effects. Figure 9-10 shows an example of effect execution when drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is selected among the cases where a reach effect resulting in a super reach is executed. Figure 9-11 shows an example of effect execution in effect execution period D2 when drawing effect pattern 02AKA02 is selected. Figure 9-12 shows an example of effect execution in effect execution period D2 when drawing effect pattern 02AKB02 is selected. Figure 9-13 shows an example of effect execution in effect execution period D2 when drawing effect pattern 02AKB12 is selected.

Figure 9-10 (A) shows a performance execution example 02AKM01 in which the variable display of the decorative symbols is in a reach state and a reach is established. At this time, the common decorative symbols corresponding to the number "7" are displayed stopped (temporarily stopped) in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, respectively, resulting in the establishment of a reach, and a normal reach reach performance is executed. In the case of performance execution example 02AKM01, a normal drawing performance NOR accompanied by a light-emitting performance can be executed as appropriate in response to the performance execution period D0. For example, it is sufficient to be able to execute a light-emitting performance using light-emitting components such as the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs in response to the background music and sound effect output from the establishment of a reach until it develops into a super reach.

Figure 9-10 (B) shows a performance execution example 02AKM02 in which a normal reach reach performance transitions to a super reach reach performance in response to the start of performance execution period D1. Figures 9-10 (C) and 9-10 (D) show performance execution examples 02AKM03 and 02AKM04 when a super reach reach performance progresses in performance execution period D1. In the case of performance execution examples 02AKM02 to 02AKM04, in response to the performance execution period D1, a normal drawing performance NOR accompanied by a light-emitting performance can be executed regardless of the result of the drawing performance pattern determination, and a specific drawing performance SPE is not executed.

Figure 9-10 (E) shows a performance execution example 02AKM05 when a chance-up performance during reach is executed during performance execution period D2. Figure 9-10 (F) shows a performance execution example 02AKM06 when a reach performance is executed after a chance-up performance during performance execution period D2. In the case of performance execution examples 02AKM05 and 02AKM06, a normal drawing performance NOR accompanied by a light-emitting performance by drawing performance pattern 02AKA01 is executed in accordance with the performance execution period D2. At this time, because it is drawing performance pattern 02AKA01, a specific drawing performance SPE by effect display or strobe display is not executed.

Figure 9-10 (G) shows a performance execution example 02AKM07 when a result notification performance is executed during performance execution period D3. At this time, a reach performance in which the performance content varies depending on the variable display result is executed as the reach performance of the super reach, and the confirmed decorative pattern is temporarily displayed as a swaying display or the like in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In the case of performance execution example 02AKM07, since it is performance execution period D3, a normal drawing performance NOR accompanied by a light-emitting performance can be executed regardless of the result of the drawing performance pattern determination, and a specific drawing performance SPE is not executed.

Figure 9-10 (H) shows a performance execution example 02AKM08 in which a confirmation notification of the variable display result is executed during performance execution period D4. At this time, as the reach performance of the super reach ends, the confirmed decorative pattern is displayed in a completely stopped state. In the case of performance execution example 02AKM08, since it is performance execution period D4, it is possible to execute a normal drawing performance NOR accompanied by a light-emitting performance, regardless of the result of the determination of the drawing performance pattern, and a specific drawing performance SPE is not executed.

Figure 9-11 (A) shows a performance execution example 02AKM11 when a reach chance up performance is executed in response to the start of performance execution period D2. The performance display at this time may be the same as the performance display in performance execution example 02AKM05. However, a pause display may be started in response to drawing performance pattern 02AKA02. For example, images drawn in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, may be copied to a copy area provided in VRAM 91AK147 and stored so as to be reusable. Also, in response to the execution of a specific drawing performance SPE using a strobe display, control is performed so that a light emitting performance is not executed.

Figure 9-11 (B) shows performance execution example 02AKM12, which is a case where a strobe display is executed following performance execution example 02AKM11. In the case of performance execution example 02AKM12, an entirely black image is drawn and displayed as a single-color image on layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers. In this case, layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are the special layers, need only be able to display an image drawn using normal drawing processing.

Figure 9-11 (C) shows performance execution example 02AKM13, which follows performance execution example 02AKM12 and executes a performance display that pauses during a strobe display. In the case of performance execution example 02AKM13, it is sufficient to execute a pause display during a strobe display by repeating the pause display started in performance execution example 02AKM11. For example, in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, an image read from the copy area of VRAM 91AK147 can be drawn to repeatedly pause and display an image similar to performance execution example 02AKM11.

Figure 9-11 (D) shows performance execution example 02AKM14, which follows performance execution example 02AKM13 and repeatedly displays an image similar to performance execution example 02AKM12. Figure 9-11 (E) shows performance execution example 02AKM15, which follows performance execution example 02AKM14 and repeatedly displays an image similar to performance execution examples 02AKM11 and 02AKM13. Figure 9-11 (F) shows performance execution example 02AKM16, which follows performance execution example 02AKM15 and repeatedly displays an image similar to performance execution examples 02AKM12 and 02AKM14. Figure 9-11 (G) shows performance execution example 02AKM17, which follows performance execution example 02AKM16 and repeatedly displays an image similar to performance execution examples 02AKM11, 02AKM13 and 02AKM15. FIG. 9-11 (H) shows performance execution example 02AKM18, which, following performance execution example 02AKM17, repeatedly displays images similar to those of performance execution examples 02AKM12, 02AKM14, and 02AKM16. In this way, by repeatedly switching between an image drawn using image data and a single-color image with settings different from the image data, a pause display can be performed along with a strobe display. After the strobe display of performance execution example 02AKM18 ends, the display returns to normal drawing performance NOR and is controlled to execute a light-emitting performance.

This type of strobe display can be performed without dedicated image data, using an image with settings different from the image data, in response to a drawing command transferred from the CPU 91AK131 to the VDP 91AK132. As a result, even if the image for the effect is drawn using common image data, by making it possible to execute a specific drawing effect SPE with a strobe display in response to a drawing command, it is possible to give the player a different impression from the normal drawing effect NOR, and it is possible to prevent the amount of image data from increasing while executing a variety of display effects, thereby increasing interest in the game.

Figure 9-12 (A) shows a performance execution example 02AKM21 in which a specific drawing performance SPE is executed using a monochrome conversion effect according to the drawing performance pattern 02AKB02 when a reach chance up performance is executed in response to the start of the performance execution period D2. The performance display at this time differs from the performance display in performance execution example 02AKM05 in that in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, images drawn using monochrome conversion calculation processing, which is a specific drawing process, are displayed.

Figure 9-12 (B) shows performance execution example 02AKM22, in which a strobe display is executed following performance execution example 02AKM21. In the case of performance execution example 02AKM22, similar to performance execution example 02AKM12, etc., an entirely black image is drawn and displayed as a single-color image on layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers. In this case, layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are the special layers, only need to be able to display images drawn using normal drawing processing.

Figure 9-12 (C) shows performance execution example 02AKM23, in which a specific drawing performance SPE is executed using a monochrome conversion effect according to drawing performance pattern 02AKB02 during the execution of the reach chance up performance following performance execution example 02AKM22. In the case of performance execution example 02AKM23, it is sufficient to be able to continue the reach chance up performance that was started in performance execution example 02AKM21. Note that a pause display may be executed as a chance up performance during a strobe display. Alternatively, in the specific drawing performance SPE using the monochrome conversion effect, even if a strobe display is executed, the pause display of the chance up performance may not be executed by displaying an image drawn using image data read according to the elapsed time, as in the case of performance execution example 02AKM05.

Figure 9-12 (D) shows performance execution example 02AKM24, which displays the same image as performance execution example 02AKM22 repeatedly, following performance execution example 02AKM23. Figure 9-12 (E) shows performance execution example 02AKM25, which displays a reach performance after the chance up performance in performance execution period D2, following performance execution example 02AKM24. The performance display at this time differs from the performance display in performance execution example 02AKM06 in that layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, display images drawn by monochrome conversion calculation processing, which is a specific drawing process.

Figure 9-12 (F) shows performance execution example 02AKM26, which, following performance execution example 02AKM25, repeatedly displays the same images as performance execution examples 02AKM22 and 02AKM24. Figure 9-12 (G) shows performance execution example 02AKM27, in which a reach performance is executed after performance execution example 02AKM25 in performance execution period D2, following performance execution example 02AKM26. In the case of performance execution example 02AKM27, it is sufficient if the reach performance executed in performance execution example 02AKM25 can be executed continuously. Note that a pause display may be executed as a reach performance during a strobe display, or a pause display may not be executed as a specific drawing performance SPE using a color information conversion effect. FIG. 9-12 (H) shows performance execution example 02AKM28, which, following performance execution example 02AKM27, repeatedly displays images similar to performance execution examples 02AKM22, 02AKM24, and 02AKM26. In this way, by repeatedly switching between images drawn using monochrome conversion with a reduced number of colors in the color information through monochrome conversion calculation processing using image data, and single-color images with settings different from the image data, a specific drawing performance SPE can be executed using a monochrome conversion effect along with a strobe display.

The effect display that becomes the monochrome conversion effect can be executed without using dedicated image data, using an image that is drawn with fewer colors than the color information contained in the image data in response to the effect drawing command transferred from the CPU91AK131 to the VDP91AK132. As a result, even if the effect image is drawn using common image data, the impression given to the player can be made different from the normal drawing effect NOR by making it possible to execute a specific drawing effect SPE using the monochrome conversion effect in response to the effect drawing command, so that it is possible to prevent the data volume of the image data from increasing, and to execute a variety of display effects, thereby improving the interest in the game. In addition, by combining the effect display that becomes the monochrome conversion effect with the strobe display, the player can easily recognize the color change of the displayed image, and the impression of the display effect can be enhanced while preventing the data volume of the image data from increasing, thereby improving the interest in the game.

Figure 9-13 (A) shows a performance execution example 02AKM31 in which a specific drawing performance SPE is executed using a color information inversion effect according to drawing performance pattern 02AKB12 when a reach chance up performance is executed in response to the start of performance execution period D2. The performance display at this time differs from the performance display in performance execution example 02AKM05 in that in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, an image is displayed that is drawn by converting the color information values using a differential calculation process or the like, which is a specific drawing process.

Figure 9-13 (B) shows performance execution example 02AKM32, which executes a strobe display following performance execution example 02AKM31. In the case of performance execution example 02AKM32, similar to performance execution examples 02AKM12, 02AKM22, etc., an entirely black image is drawn and displayed as a single-color image on layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers. In this case, layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, need only be able to display images drawn using normal drawing processing.

Figure 9-13 (C) shows performance execution example 02AKM33, in which a specific drawing performance SPE is executed using a color information inversion effect according to drawing performance pattern 02AKB12 during the execution of the reach chance up performance following performance execution example 02AKM32. In the case of performance execution example 02AKM33, it is sufficient to be able to continue the reach chance up performance started in performance execution example 02AKM31. Note that a pause display may be executed as a chance up performance during a strobe display. Alternatively, in the specific drawing performance SPE using the color information inversion effect, even when a strobe display is executed, the pause display of the chance up performance may not be executed by displaying an image drawn using image data read according to the elapsed time, as in the case of performance execution example 02AKM05.

Figure 9-13 (D) shows performance execution example 02AKM34, which displays the same image as performance execution example 02AKM32 repeatedly, following performance execution example 02AKM33. Figure 9-13 (E) shows performance execution example 02AKM35, which displays a reach performance after a chance-up performance in performance execution period D2, following performance execution example 02AKM34. The performance display at this time differs from the performance display in performance execution example 02AKM06 in that in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, images are displayed that are drawn by converting the color information values using differential calculation processing, which is a specific drawing process.

Figure 9-13 (F) shows performance execution example 02AKM36, which, following performance execution example 02AKM35, repeatedly displays the same images as performance execution examples 02AKM32 and 02AKM034. Figure 9-13 (G) shows performance execution example 02AKM37, in which a reach performance is executed after performance execution example 02AKM35 in performance execution period D2, following performance execution example 02AKM36. In the case of performance execution example 02AKM37, it is sufficient if the reach performance executed in performance execution example 02AKM35 can be executed continuously. Note that it is also possible to execute a pause display as a reach performance during a strobe display, or to not execute a pause display as a specific drawing performance SPE using a color information conversion effect. FIG. 9-13 (H) shows performance execution example 02AKM38, which, following performance execution example 02AKM37, repeatedly displays images similar to performance execution examples 02AKM32, 02AKM34, and 02AKM36. In this way, by repeatedly switching between an image with inverted color information drawn by converting the color information values using differential calculation processing or the like using image data, and a single-color image with settings different from the image data, a specific drawing performance SPE can be executed using a color information inversion effect along with a strobe display.

The effect display that becomes the color information inversion effect can be executed without using dedicated image data, using an image that is drawn by converting the value of the color information contained in the image data in response to the effect drawing command transferred from the CPU91AK131 to the VDP91AK132. As a result, even if the effect image is drawn using common image data, by making it possible to execute a specific drawing effect SPE using the color information inversion effect in response to the effect drawing command, it is possible to give a different impression to the player from the normal drawing effect NOR, so that it is possible to execute a variety of display effects while preventing the data volume of the image data from increasing, thereby improving the interest in the game. In addition, by combining the effect display that becomes the color information inversion effect with the strobe display, the player can easily recognize the color change of the displayed image, and it is possible to enhance the impression of the display effect and improve the interest in the game while preventing the data volume of the image data from increasing.

By executing a specific drawing performance SPE using effect displays or strobe displays, it is possible to give the player a strange feeling of display performance not found in normal drawing performance NOR. When the reach performance content is any of SP Reach A1 to A3, a reach performance of a super reach is executed, which is a "weak SP reach" that has a lower reliability of a jackpot than SP Reach B, while a specific drawing performance SPE can be executed that gives the player a strange feeling of display performance not found in normal drawing performance NOR. And when a specific drawing performance SPE is executed, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state increases, so it is possible to heighten the player's expectations and appropriately improve interest in the game.

The invention relating to characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, pachinko gaming machine 1 does not have to have all of the technical features relating to characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK, and may have a part of the configuration shown in the above embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art.

The strobe display has been described as being performed by repeatedly switching between an image drawn using image data and a single-color image with settings different from the image data. In such a strobe display, some or all of the single-color image may be replaced with a specific image prepared in advance. For example, when a performance image that is a character image is inserted and displayed as a specific image, the drawing performance content and determination rate of the drawing performance pattern may be set so that the display result of the variable display becomes a "jackpot" and the player is more likely to be controlled to a jackpot gaming state than when a single-color image is repeatedly displayed.

In the above description, it has been assumed that the light-emitting performance using the light-emitting member is not executed when the specific drawing performance SPE is executed. Such a light-emitting performance using the light-emitting member may include a light-emitting display performance by illuminating the display part of the light-guiding plate. For example, a light-guiding plate as a transparent light-guiding member having optical transparency is provided on the front side (front side) of a part or all of the display screen of the image display device 5. In addition, a light-emitting member such as a light-guiding plate LED may be provided near the light-guiding plate, and light from the light-emitting member may be introduced through the end face of the light-guiding plate and reflected by a reflecting part formed in advance inside the light-guiding plate to execute a light-emitting display performance that displays a predetermined pattern or the like. Then, in the performance execution period in which the normal drawing performance NOR is executed in response to the drawing performance pattern, etc., it is sufficient that the light-emitting display performance can be executed based on the determination result of the light-emitting display performance pattern. In contrast, in the performance execution period in which the specific drawing performance SPE is executed in response to the drawing performance pattern, etc., it is sufficient to control so that the light-emitting display performance is not executed.

Furthermore, light emission effects using such light-emitting members may include button light emission effects produced by illuminating a button light-emitting section attached inside the push button 31B. In this case, during a performance execution period in which a normal drawing performance NOR is executed in response to a drawing performance pattern, etc., it is sufficient that a button light emission effect can be executed based on the result of determining the button light emission performance pattern, etc. In contrast, during a performance execution period in which a specific drawing performance SPE is executed in response to a drawing performance pattern, etc., it is sufficient to control so that the button light emission effect is not executed.

When multiple display layers are provided, the setting of whether each display layer is a special layer or a specific layer can be arbitrarily changed based on the specifications of the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the layer 01AKL2 that draws the performance image corresponding to the reserved display or active display so that it can be displayed may be included in the specific layer rather than the special layer. In a setting in which the layer 01AKL2 is included in the specific layer, when the specific drawing performance SPE is executed, the performance image corresponding to the reserved display or active display may be drawn and displayed by the specific drawing process, and color information, etc. may be changed. Then, when the specific drawing performance SPE is executed by the monochrome conversion effect, it is sufficient that the performance image corresponding to the reserved display or active display can be changed to a monochrome image with a small number of colors and displayed. While enabling such a monochrome display of the reserved display or active display, when a change performance that changes the display color of the specific display related to the variable display such as the reserved display or active display can be executed, when a change performance is executed during the execution of the specific drawing performance SPE, the execution of the specific drawing performance SPE may be terminated when the display color of the specific display is changed, and the execution of the normal drawing performance NOR may be started or resumed. The display color of the specific display may be different depending on the expectation level controlled in the jackpot game state. In the case where the change performance has a success pattern in which the display color of the specific display is changed and a failure pattern in which the display color of the specific display is not changed, the change performance of the success pattern may be executed during the execution of the specific drawing performance SPE, and when the display color of the specific display changes to a specific color, the execution of the specific drawing performance SPE may be terminated, and the execution of the normal drawing performance NOR may be started or resumed. The execution of the specific drawing performance SPE may be started at the timing when the reserved display is displayed, and after the variable display and active display corresponding to the reserved display are performed, the change performance of the success pattern may be executed, and when the display color of the active display changes to a specific color, the execution of the specific drawing performance SPE may be terminated, and the execution of the normal drawing performance NOR may be started or resumed.

The display layer included in the special layer may include a direction display layer that can display and draw a performance image showing the launch direction of the game ball. For example, the direction display layer may be capable of drawing and displaying a performance image that encourages the game ball to be launched toward the left game area or the right game area when a launch promotion performance is executed as an operation promotion performance that is a left-hand hit performance or a right-hand hit performance. In the pachinko game machine 1, a game can be played by launching a game ball as a game medium, and a first path and a second path are provided as paths along which the game ball can flow down. The first path may be a right-hand hit path that becomes the right game area in the game area, and the second path may be a left-hand hit area that becomes the left game area in the game area. Then, when it is a first state in which it is advantageous to let the game ball flow down the first path, it may be capable of drawing and displaying a first promotion image that encourages the game medium to be launched toward the first path on the direction display layer. In addition, when it is a second state in which it is advantageous to make the game ball flow down the second path, a second promotion image that encourages the launch of the game medium toward the second path may be drawn and displayed on the direction display layer based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. In this way, by including the direction display layer in the special layer, during the performance execution period in which the specific drawing performance SPE is executed, it is sufficient that the specific layer can display an image drawn by a specific drawing process, while the direction display layer can display an image drawn by a normal drawing process. Therefore, the performance image that encourages the game ball to be launched toward the left game area or the right game area may be drawn and displayed on the special layer by a normal drawing process as a predetermined image related to the game. By being able to draw and display the image that encourages the launch of the game medium by a normal drawing process rather than a specific drawing process, it is possible to execute various display performances while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image that encourages the launch of the game medium, thereby improving the interest in the game.

As an operation promotion effect, it may be possible to draw and display an effect image that indicates a changeable amount of effect output, such as some or all of the volume, screen brightness, and light emission amount. The display layers included in the special layer may include an operation display layer that draws and displays such effect images for such operation promotion effects.

The display layer included in the special layer may include a warning display layer that can display warning images that notify the occurrence of an abnormality in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the warning display layer may be capable of drawing and displaying a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred when it is determined that various errors have occurred based on the detection state of various sensors such as a magnetic sensor, a radio wave sensor, a vibration sensor, a door open sensor, a big prize door sensor, a full tank sensor, and a ball out sensor connected to the main board 11 in the pachinko game machine 1, the state of the payout board, the detection state of the game balls by the start port switch and the count switch, etc. The warning display layer may be set to the display layer with the highest display priority among the multiple display layers. In this way, by including the warning display layer in the special layer, during the performance execution period in which the specific drawing performance SPE is executed, the specific layer can display an image drawn by a specific drawing process, while the warning display layer can display an image drawn by a normal drawing process. Therefore, the warning image that notifies the occurrence of an abnormality may be capable of being drawn and displayed in the special layer by a normal drawing process as a predetermined image related to the game. By being able to draw and display a warning image notifying the occurrence of an abnormality using a normal drawing process rather than a specific drawing process, it is possible to appropriately ensure the visibility of the image notifying the occurrence of an abnormality while executing a variety of display effects, thereby increasing the interest in the game. When notifying the occurrence of an abnormality, even during the execution of a specific drawing effect SPE in which no light-emitting effect is executed, an abnormality light-emitting notification may be executed by illuminating a light-emitting member. In this way, notifications regarding the occurrence of an abnormality may be executed with a higher priority than other effects.

The display layer included in the special layer may include a suggestion display layer that draws a performance image in a setting suggestion performance. For example, the suggestion display layer may be capable of drawing and displaying a setting suggestion image determined at different rates depending on the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1. In the pachinko game machine 1, it is possible to set one of a plurality of setting values with different degrees of advantage for the player, and it is possible to execute a setting suggestion performance in which the execution or non-execution and performance mode are determined at different rates depending on the setting value as a suggestion regarding the setting of the setting value. For example, it may be possible to select one of a plurality of setting suggestion images at different rates depending on the setting value, and to draw and display the selected setting suggestion image on the suggestion display layer. In this way, by including the suggestion display layer in the special layer, it is possible to display an image drawn by a specific drawing process on the specific layer during the performance execution period in which the specific drawing performance SPE is executed, while it is possible to display an image drawn by a normal drawing process on the suggestion display layer. By being able to display an image suggesting a setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by drawing it in the special layer using a normal drawing process rather than a specific drawing process, it is possible to execute a variety of display effects while properly ensuring the visibility of an image suggesting a setting value with a different degree of advantage for a player, thereby improving the interest in the game. Alternatively, the suggestion display layer may be included in the specific layer rather than the special layer. In this way, by including the suggestion display layer in the specific layer, it is possible to display an image drawn by the normal drawing process in the special layer during the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, whereas it is sufficient that an image drawn by the specific drawing process can be displayed in the suggestion display layer. By being able to display an image suggesting a setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by drawing it in the specific layer using a specific drawing process, it is possible to diversify the display of images suggesting setting values with a different degree of advantage for a player, thereby improving the interest in the game.

At least some of the features of the pachinko game machine 1 can be applied not only to the pachinko game machine 1 but also to slot machines and the like. As an example of application to this slot machine, when the navigation notification that notifies the player of the stopping order that is advantageous to the player according to the internal lottery result can be controlled to an assist time (also called AT), which is a notification period during which the navigation notification can be executed, a performance image that identifiably notifies the stopping order may be displayed on the screen of the image display device as the navigation notification. In this case, the display layer included in the special layer may include a notification display layer that draws the performance image used for the navigation notification in a displayable manner. For example, in the notification display layer, when notifying the order in which the variable display by each of the left, middle, and right reels is stopped, it is sufficient that the notification display layer can draw and display a stop order image that indicates the order of the stop operation by the stop switch on the notification display layer. In this way, by including the notification display layer in the special layer, during the performance execution period in which the specific drawing performance SPE is executed, the specific layer can display an image drawn by the specific drawing process, while the notification display layer can display an image drawn by the normal drawing process. By being able to display an image that indicates the operation mode when stopping the variable display on a slot machine by drawing it on a special layer using normal drawing processing rather than specific drawing processing, it is possible to execute a variety of display effects while ensuring the appropriate visibility of the image that indicates the operation mode, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

(Means for solving the problems and effects of characteristic part 01AK)
This embodiment includes the inventions shown below. That is, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game such as a pachinko game machine, for example, as described in JP 2018-171129 A, a technology that enables a performance image to be tilted and deformed and displayed according to an instruction from a display list in a gaming machine such as a pachinko game machine, and a gaming machine technology that draws a processed image in which a plurality of deformed images generated using an inverted image are arranged, as described in JP 2012-29947 A, have also been proposed. In the gaming machine described in the above patent publication, the entire image is changed, which may reduce the visibility of an important image. Therefore, with the aim of providing a gaming machine that improves the interest in gaming while properly ensuring the visibility of the image,
The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 01AK is a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of executing a game, and includes a storage means for storing image data, such as a performance data memory 91AK123 or a VRAM 91AK147, and an image processing means, such as a VDP 91AK132, capable of executing drawing processing using the image data, and the image processing means is capable of executing a normal drawing process, such as a drawing process corresponding to a normal display drawing command, which draws in response to the image data, and a specific drawing process, such as a drawing process corresponding to an effect drawing command, which draws by changing at least color information included in the image data. It is possible to display images in a plurality of layers having different priorities, such as layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5, and the plurality of layers include specific layers, such as layers AKL03 to AKL05, and special layers having higher priorities than the specific layers, such as layers AKL01 and AKL02, and for example, in steps 01AKS01 to 01AKS03, it is possible to display images for performance by drawing in a specific drawing process in the specific layers, and for example, in step 01AKS04, it is possible to display predetermined images related to the progress of the game by drawing in a normal drawing process in the special layers. This prevents an increase in data capacity and makes it possible to execute performances by a variety of displays while appropriately ensuring the visibility of images, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The specific drawing process may involve drawing using fewer colors than the color information contained in the image data (e.g., monochrome conversion). This prevents an increase in data volume while making it possible to implement a variety of display effects, increasing interest in the game.

The specific drawing process may involve converting the values of color information contained in the image data and drawing it (e.g., inverting the color information). This prevents an increase in data volume while making it possible to implement a variety of display effects, thereby increasing interest in the game.

For example, as in presentation control example 02AKC01, among a plurality of periods including a first period (e.g., presentation execution period D1) in which a specific drawing process is not executed, such as presentation execution period D1, and a second period (e.g., presentation execution period D2) in which a specific drawing process is executed, such as presentation execution period D2, it is possible to cause the light-emitting means to emit light during the first period, and to prevent the light-emitting means from emitting light during the second period. This makes it possible to increase interest in the game while ensuring appropriate visibility of the image.

Alternatively, among a plurality of periods including a first period (e.g., performance execution period D1) in which a specific drawing process is not executed, such as performance execution period D1, and a second period (e.g., performance execution period D2) in which a specific drawing process is executed, such as performance execution period D2, the light-emitting means may be made to emit light in a normal mode during the first period, and the light emission of the light-emitting means may be restricted from the normal mode during the second period. This makes it possible to increase interest in the game while ensuring appropriate visibility of the image.

The device is equipped with a setting means (e.g., CPU 103 executing setting value change process S6A) that can be set to one of multiple setting values (e.g., values from 1 to 6) with different degrees of advantage for the player, and can execute a setting suggestion effect (e.g., effect execution example 60AKD8 to 60AKD12) that suggests the setting of the setting means by displaying a specific mode, and can execute an image drawn by a specific drawing process as the image displayed by the setting suggestion effect. This can increase interest in the game while ensuring appropriate visibility of the image.

The game includes a setting means (e.g., a CPU 103 executing a setting value change process S6A) that can be set to one of a number of setting values (e.g., values from 1 to 6) that have different degrees of advantage for the player, for example, a value from 1 to 6, and can execute a setting suggestion effect (e.g., an effect using effect execution example 60AKD8 to 60AKD12) that suggests settings for the setting means by displaying a specific mode, and can display an image drawn using a specific drawing process as the image displayed by the setting suggestion effect. This makes it possible to execute effects using a variety of displays while ensuring appropriate visibility of the image, thereby improving the interest in the game.

For example, it may be possible to execute a specific effect that pauses and displays an image, such as a specific drawing effect using drawing effect pattern 02AKA02 (for example, a specific drawing effect using drawing effect pattern 02AKA02). This makes it possible to execute effects using a variety of displays while preventing an increase in data volume, thereby increasing interest in the game.

For example, as in performance execution examples 02AKM21 to 02AKM28, a specific layer may be capable of alternating between images drawn using image data and monochrome images (see, for example, performance execution examples 02AKM21 to 02AKM28). This makes it possible to prevent an increase in data volume while enabling performances with a variety of displays, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

For example, variable display of identification information images, such as variable display of decorative patterns in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, variable display of decorative patterns in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R), and variable display of reduced identification information images in a reduced form than the identification information images, such as variable display of small patterns in the small pattern display area 01AKC1 (for example, variable display of small patterns in the small pattern display area 01AKC1), can be executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 9-5, the identification information images can be drawn and displayed by a specific drawing process, and the reduced identification information images can be drawn and displayed by a normal drawing process. This makes it possible to execute various display effects while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the images, thereby improving the interest in the game.

(Means for solving the problem and effects of characteristic part 02AK)
The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 02AK is a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of executing a game, and is equipped with a storage means for storing image data, such as a performance data memory 91AK123 or a VRAM 91AK147, and an image processing means, such as a VDP 91AK132, capable of executing drawing processing using the image data, and is capable of executing a specific performance, such as a reach performance of a super reach, during variable display, which suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, such as a jackpot game state, and the performance patterns of the specific performance include a first pattern, such as a drawing performance pattern 02AKA01, and a second pattern, such as a drawing performance pattern 02AKA02, which have different rates of being controlled to an advantageous state; and during at least a first period, such as a performance execution period D1, during the performance period in which the specific performance is executed, it is possible to display an image drawn by a normal drawing process, such as a drawing process in response to a drawing command during a normal drawing performance, regardless of whether the pattern is the first pattern or the second pattern. During the performance period in which the specific performance is executed, in a second period after the first period, such as performance execution period D2, if the first pattern is selected, an image drawn by a normal drawing process can be displayed, and if the second pattern is selected, an image drawn by a specific drawing process such as a drawing process according to a drawing command during the specific drawing performance can be displayed. This makes it possible to prevent an increase in data capacity, to appropriately heighten the player's expectations, and to improve the interest in the game, while enabling performances to be executed using a variety of displays.

The specific drawing process may involve drawing using fewer colors than the color information contained in the image data, such as monochrome conversion. This prevents data volume from increasing, while making it possible to implement a variety of display effects, improving the enjoyment of the game.

The specific drawing process may involve converting the values of color information contained in the image data, for example by inverting the color information. This prevents an increase in data volume while making it possible to implement a variety of display effects, thereby increasing interest in the game.

For example, as in presentation control example 02AKC01, a light-emitting presentation by a light-emitting means can be executed in response to the display of an image drawn by the normal drawing process in a specific presentation, and a light-emitting presentation may not be executed in response to the display of an image drawn by the specific drawing process in a specific presentation. This can increase interest in the game while ensuring appropriate visibility of the image.

Alternatively, in response to the display of an image drawn by the normal drawing process in a specific effect, the light emitting means may be capable of performing a light emitting effect in a normal manner, and in response to the display of an image drawn by the specific drawing process in a specific effect, the light emitting effect may be restricted more than in the normal manner. This makes it possible to increase interest in the game while ensuring appropriate visibility of the image.

A setting means such as a CPU 103 that executes a setting value change process S6A is provided, which can be set to one of a number of setting values, such as values from 1 to 6, each of which has a different degree of advantage for the player, and a setting suggestion effect such as the effect shown in the effect execution example 60AKD8 to 60AKD12 is executed, which suggests the setting of the setting means by displaying a specific mode, and the image drawn by the specific drawing process may not be displayed as the image displayed by the setting suggestion effect. This can increase the interest in the game while ensuring the appropriate visibility of the image.

The game is provided with a setting means, such as a CPU 103 that executes a setting value change process S6A, which can be set to one of a number of setting values, such as values from 1 to 6, each of which has a different degree of advantage for the player, and can execute a setting suggestion effect, such as an effect using effect execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12, which suggests settings for the setting means by displaying a specific mode, and can display an image drawn using a specific drawing process as the image displayed by the setting suggestion effect. This makes it possible to execute effects using a variety of displays while ensuring appropriate visibility of the image, thereby increasing interest in the game.

During the second period, it may be possible to execute an effect in which the image is temporarily stopped and displayed when the second pattern is met, such as a specific drawing effect based on drawing effect pattern 02AKA02. This prevents an increase in data volume while enabling effects based on a variety of displays to be executed, thereby increasing interest in the game.

During the second period, for example, as in performance execution examples 02AKM21 to 02AKM28, when the second pattern is selected, it may be possible to alternate between images drawn using image data and monochrome images. This makes it possible to prevent an increase in data volume while enabling performances using a variety of displays, thereby increasing interest in the game.

For example, it is possible to perform variable display of identification information images, such as variable display of decorative patterns in "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and variable display of reduced identification information images in a form reduced from the identification information image, such as variable display of small patterns in small pattern display area 01AKC1. For example, as shown in FIG. 9-5, the identification information image may be drawn and displayed using a specific drawing process, and the reduced identification information image may be drawn and displayed using a normal drawing process. This makes it possible to perform a variety of display effects while ensuring appropriate visibility of the image, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The configuration related to the feature parts 01AK and 02AK may be appropriately combined with some or all of the configurations related to the feature parts 91AK and 92AK, the configuration related to the feature part 60AK, etc. For example, in a configuration in which an operation presentation to be executed after a predetermined period of time can be executed as a setting suggestion presentation, which is an operation presentation in a suggestion presentation mode, in a configuration in which a first component and a second component can be changed during a display period of a character image added to one moving image, or in a configuration in which a character image using data related to a common character image can be added to a first moving image and a second moving image different from the first moving image and displayed, a specific layer may be drawn by a specific drawing process to display an image for presentation, and a special layer having a higher priority than the specific layer may be drawn by a normal drawing process to display a predetermined image related to the progress of the game, or in a second period after the first period, an image drawn by a normal drawing process in the case of a first pattern may be displayed, and an image drawn by a specific drawing process in the case of a second pattern having a different ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state from the first pattern may be displayed.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 75SG)
Next, the pachinko game machine 75SG001 of the characteristic part 75SG in this embodiment will be described based on Figs. 10-1 to 10-26. Fig. 10-1 is a front view showing the pachinko game machine as the characteristic part 75SG. Fig. 10-2 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine as the characteristic part 75SG. Fig. 10-3 is a front view showing the game board of the pachinko game machine as the characteristic part 75SG. Fig. 10-4 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A in Fig. 10-3. In the following description, the direction in which the player is positioned is the front of the pachinko game machine 75SG001, and the opposite direction is the rear. In addition, the description will be based on the directions of up, down, left and right as seen from the player positioned in front of the pachinko game machine 75SG001. In addition, the same reference numerals will be used to designate parts similar to those in the above embodiment, and detailed description will be omitted.

As shown in Figures 10-1 to 10-4, the pachinko game machine 75SG001 is composed of a game board 2 (also called a gauge board 2) that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame 3 (also called a base frame 3) that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area Y is formed on the game board 2, and game balls as game media are shot into this game area Y from a predetermined ball shooting device. In addition, a glass door frame 50 having a glass window 50a is provided on the game machine frame 3 so as to be rotatable around the left side, and the game area Y can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 50, and when the glass door frame 50 is closed, the game area Y can be seen through the glass window 50a.

The game board 2 is made of a synthetic resin material having translucency such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, or methacrylic resin, and is generally rectangular in shape when viewed from the front. It is made up of a board plate 200 on which obstacle nails (not shown), guide rails 211, and external rail decorations 212 are provided on the front surface of the game board, and a spacer member 201 attached integrally to the rear side of the board plate 200. The game board 2 may also be made of a non-translucent material such as plywood, and is generally rectangular in shape when viewed from the front. It is made up of a board plate on which obstacle nails (not shown) and guide rails 211 are provided on the front surface of the game board.

Openings 2c are formed in the board plate 200 and spacer member 201 of the game board 2, and the display area of the image display device 5, which is located away from the rear side of the game board 2, can be viewed from the player's side (front side) through the openings 2c. In addition, the area of the display area of the image display device 5 that overlaps with the board plate 200 can be viewed through the board plate 200.

A center decorative frame 51 is attached to the opening 2c of the board panel 200, and the area surrounded by this center decorative frame 51, the guide rail 211, and the outer rail decoration 212 is the area where the game balls flow down in the game area Y. A light guide plate device 500, which will be described later, is provided at a position corresponding to the opening 2c surrounded by this center decorative frame 51.

A first presentation unit 300 is provided at the lower position on the back side of the board 200, i.e., below the image display device 5. A second presentation unit 400 is provided to the right of the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51, i.e., at a position corresponding to the right side of the display area of the image display device 5. A third presentation unit 600 is provided at the top of the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51, i.e., at a position corresponding to the top of the display area of the image display device 5. A fourth presentation unit 800 is provided at the upper left position on the back side of the board 200, i.e., at the upper left position of the image display device 5. In addition, a variable winning ball unit 700 is provided at the lower right position of the board 200, where game balls flowing down the game area Y can win a prize.

The first presentation unit 300 and the fourth presentation unit 800 are provided on the rear side of the board panel 200, and are therefore visible from the player side (the front side of the pachinko game machine 75SG001) through the board panel 200. On the other hand, at least the front faces of the second presentation unit 400 and the third presentation unit 600 are located forward of the game board surface, which is the front face of the board panel 200, and are arranged within the opening 2c, and are therefore visible from the player side through the light guide plate 501 of the light guide plate device 500.

(Light guide plate device 500)
Next, the light guide plate device 500 will be described with reference to Figs. 10-5 and 10-6. Fig. 10-5 is a front view showing the light guide plate device. Fig. 10-6 shows (A) FIG. 1 is an enlarged front view showing the main part of the light guide plate device, (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line B-B of (A), and (C) is an enlarged view showing the main part of (B). To assist, emitting areas 506 are shown as dots, and non-emitting areas 507, lacking dots, are shown in white.

As shown in Figures 10-5 and 10-6, the light guide plate device 500 mainly comprises a light guide plate 501 that is arranged to close off the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51 except for the right and lower areas, an LED board 503 on which multiple light guide plate LEDs 502 are mounted to direct light to the right end surface 501a of the light guide plate 501, and a focusing lens 504 for focusing light from the light guide plate LEDs 502 toward the right end surface 501a of the light guide plate 501. The light guide plate device 500 is supported by a base member (not shown) that is fixed to the back of the game board 2 and the center decorative frame 51.

The light guide plate 501 is a plate member made of a transparent synthetic resin such as acrylic or polycarbonate, having a predetermined front-to-rear width dimension (plate thickness = approximately 5 mm), and is positioned forward of the third performance unit 600 and close to the glass window 50a, as shown in Figure 10-4.

The light guide plate 501 also has a light emitting region 506 as a first region that forms a predetermined light guide pattern that reflects light from the light guide plate LED 502 incident inside from the right end face 501a forward and emits it from the front surface, that is, a light emitting region that emits light by light incident inside from the right end face 501a of the light guide plate 501 (see the dotted region in Figures 10-5 and 10-6 (A)), and a non-light emitting region 507 as a second region that does not form a predetermined light guide pattern that reflects light from the light guide plate LED 502 incident inside from the right end face 501a forward and emits it from the front surface, that is, a non-light emitting region that does not emit light by light incident inside the light guide plate 501 (see the white region in Figures 10-5 and 10-6 (A)).

The light-emitting area 506 is formed so that a figure with a radial periphery appears at approximately the center of the light guide plate 501, and when light enters the light guide plate 501, the light-emitting area 506 reflects the light and emits it forward, causing a predetermined image to be illuminated and displayed on the light guide plate 501.

As shown in Figures 10-6 (B) and (C), the light-emitting region 506 is formed on the back side with a fine unevenness (rough surface) so as to guide the incident light from the light guide plate LED 502, which is incident inside from the right end face 501a, and emit it from the front. Specifically, the light-emitting region 506 is formed with an unevenness (rough surface) that forms a roughly semicircular shape with a constant pitch in cross section when viewed from the side in the direction of light travel. In Figure 10-6 (C), the unevenness (rough surface) is shown enlarged to facilitate understanding, but the actual light-emitting region 506 has fine unevenness that is difficult to see with the naked eye.

When light is incident on the light guide plate 501 from the right end surface 501a, a predetermined image (still image) is displayed on the light guide plate 501 by a dot pattern consisting of multiple recesses 510 formed in the light emitting area 506 (see the halftone dot area in FIG. 10-5). In other words, the light emitting area 506 as a first area forming a predetermined light guide pattern that reflects light from the light guide plate LED 502 incident on the inside from the right end surface 501a forward and emits it from the front surface is an area in which a dot pattern consisting of multiple recesses 510 is formed, and the non-light emitting area 507 as a second area that does not form a predetermined light guide pattern that reflects light from the light guide plate LED 502 incident on the inside from the right end surface 501a forward and emits it from the front surface is an area in which a dot pattern consisting of multiple recesses 510 is not formed. In addition, in the characteristic portion 75SG, a specific image (figure) is exemplified as the display information that can be displayed by the light guide plate 501, but other display information including pictures, letters, symbols, designs, patterns, and other decorations may also be displayed.

When no light is incident on the right end surface 501a of the light guide plate 501, the entire light guide plate 501, including the light emitting area 506, is colorless and transparent, and the image displayed on the rear image display device 5, as well as the second performance unit 400 and the third performance unit 600, can be seen (see-through) from the front of the light guide plate 501. When light is incident on the right end surface 501a, the light emitting area 506 emits light, but the areas other than the light emitting area 506 remain colorless and transparent.

In the characteristic portion 75SG, the light-emitting region 506 is formed in an uneven state having a roughly semicircular shape, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the light-emitting region 506 may be formed by a molding method in which unevenness is formed on the back surface (rear surface) of the light guide plate 501 using a stamper or injection. The reflective portion may also be formed by a silk printing method in which reflective dots are printed on an acrylic plate with white ink, an adhesive dot method in which an acrylic plate and a reflective plate are attached with a dot-shaped adhesive, a groove processing method, etc.

In characteristic portion 75SG, the shape of each of the projections and recesses of light-emitting region 506 on the back surface (rear surface) of light guide plate 501 is approximately semicircular in cross section, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the cross-sectional shape of each of the projections and recesses of light-emitting region 506 can be modified in various ways, such as approximately triangular, as long as it forms a reflective surface that can reflect light toward the front surface (front surface).

The condenser lens 504 is formed in the shape of a long plate extending in the vertical direction from a light-transmitting material such as acrylic or polycarbonate. On the surface of the condenser lens 504 facing the light guide plate 501, multiple semicircular convex portions 504A that bulge toward the light guide plate 501 side in a front view are formed continuously in the vertical direction. The condenser lens 504 is composed of a single member in which multiple convex portions 504A are integrally formed. Each convex portion 504A is formed corresponding to each of the light guide plate LEDs 502.

Note that the convex portions 504A do not necessarily correspond one-to-one to the light guide plate LEDs 502, and for example, one convex portion 504A may correspond to two or more light guide plate LEDs 502. In addition, the condenser lens 504 is not necessarily configured as a single member having multiple convex portions 504A integrally formed therewith, and multiple condenser lenses formed separately to correspond to the light guide plate LEDs 502 may be used.

As shown in FIG. 10-6(C), the front-to-rear width of the condensing lens 504 on the light guide plate 501 side is smaller than the front-to-rear width of the condensing lens 504 on the light guide plate LED 502 side. In addition, the front-to-rear width of the condensing lens 504 on the light guide plate 501 side is approximately the same as the front-to-rear width of the light receiving surface of the light guide plate 501, so that the light emitted from the condensing lens 504 is incident on the light guide plate 501 without being diffused in the front-to-rear direction (without light leakage).

The front surface of the focusing lens 504 is a flat inclined surface that gradually slopes backward from the light guide plate LED 502 side toward the light guide plate 501 side, and the rear surface of the focusing lens 504 is a flat inclined surface that gradually slopes forward from the light guide plate LED 502 side toward the light guide plate 501 side. In other words, the focusing lens 504 is formed in a tapered shape in which the plate thickness gradually becomes thinner from the light guide plate LED 502 side toward the light guide plate 501 side.

In addition, a small gap is provided between the focusing lens 504 and the light guide plate 501. For example, the size of this gap is such that the focusing lens 504 and the light guide plate 501 do not come into contact with each other even if vibrations occur during transportation or use of the pachinko game machine 75SG001. This makes it possible to prevent the focusing lens 504 and the light guide plate 501 from being scratched by vibrations that occur during transportation or use of the pachinko game machine 75SG001.

Next, the light guide state of the light emitted from the light guide plate LEDs 502 will be described. The light emitted from each light guide plate LED 502 is incident on the condenser lens 504. Here, the incident surface of the condenser lens 504 is curved to form a lens surface, so even if the light emitted from the light guide plate LEDs 502 is highly directional, the light incident on the condenser lens 504 is diffused radially in the left and right directions within the condenser lens 504. Then, when the light incident on the condenser lens 504 passes through the inner curved lens surface, it is refracted to the right and emitted.

As a result, even if the light emitted from the light guide plate LEDs 502 has high directivity, the light emitted from the light guide plate LEDs 502 can be diffused radially to some extent by the condenser lens 504, making it possible to expand the light-emitting area in the light guide plate 501. In addition, since the light emitted from the condenser lens 504 is guided in the horizontal direction (since the light is prevented from spreading radially), only the parts corresponding to each light guide plate LED 502 can be made to emit light. In addition, the light incident on the condenser lens 504 from the light guide plate LEDs 502 is condensed toward approximately the center position in the front-to-back direction while repeatedly undergoing total reflection in the front-to-back direction, and is finally emitted from the end face of the condenser lens 504 on the light guide plate 501 side (the part with the smallest front-to-back width).

With this configuration, the light from the light guide plate LED 502 can be collected and guided to the light guide plate 501 without diffusing it in the front-to-back direction. In particular, even if the front-to-back width of the light-emitting surface of the light guide plate LED 502 is greater than the front-to-back width of the light-guiding plate LED 502 side of the collecting lens 504, the light from the light guide plate LED 502 can be guided to the light guide plate 501 without diffusing it in the front-to-back direction, so that the light from the light guide plate LED 502 can be prevented from diffusing to the surroundings.

When light from the focusing lens 504 is guided into the light guide plate 501 and reaches the light emitting area 506, the light is reflected by the light emitting area 506 towards the front side (the player's side). As a result, as seen by the player, the light emitting area 506 of the light guide plate 501 emits light due to the reflected light, and a figure is displayed on the front side of the light guide plate 501 by the area represented by the dots in Figure 10-5 being surface-illuminated.

As shown in FIG. 10-4, when viewed from the player's perspective (in the front-to-back direction), the image display device 5 is located at the back and the light guide plate device 500 is located at the front. When viewed from the player's perspective, the image display device 5 has a horizontally long rectangular shape. For example, a liquid crystal display device equipped with a liquid crystal panel is used as the image display device 5. Note that the image display device 5 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and an EL display device such as an organic EL display device or an inorganic EL display device may also be used.

(First performance unit 300)
Next, the first performance unit 300 will be described based on Fig. 10-7 to Fig. 10-12. Fig. 10-7 (A) is a front view showing the first performance unit, and (B) is a rear view. Fig. 10-8 is an exploded perspective view showing the configuration of the first performance unit as seen from the diagonal front. Fig. 10-9 (A) is a CC cross-sectional view of Fig. 10-7 (A), (B) is a D-D cross-sectional view of Fig. 10-7 (A), and (C) is an E-E cross-sectional view of Fig. 10-7 (A). Fig. 10-10 (A) is a front view showing the base member, (B) is a front view showing the LED board, and (C) is a front view showing the cover member. Fig. 10-11 (A) is a front view showing the first performance unit with the cover member removed, and (B) is a front view showing the first performance unit with the cover member attached. Fig. 10-12 is an enlarged view showing the main part of Fig. 10-11 (B).

As shown in Figures 10-7 to 10-9, the first performance unit 300 is mainly composed of a base member 301, a cover member 302 that is arranged to cover the front side of the base member 301 and is attached to the base member 301 with multiple screws N1, and an LED board 303 that is attached to the front side of the base member 301 with multiple screws N2, and is arranged so that it can be seen through the glass window 50a and the panel panel 200 from the front of the pachinko game machine 75SG001, that is, from the player side facing the pachinko game machine 75SG001.

The base member 301 is made of a non-translucent synthetic resin material and has a horizontally elongated shape when viewed from the front, and its surfaces (front, rear and peripheral surfaces) are black. The front surface of the base member 301 has a flat portion 311 that is a flat surface, a recess 312 that is a horizontally elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front and is formed at the bottom of the flat portion 311, and rear wall portions 313A to 313D that are located slightly rearward of the flat portion 311.

The upper part of the flat portion 311 has a plurality of trapezoidal convex portions 314A-314E formed in the longitudinal direction, which constitute part of the decorative pattern 331 described below, and the rear wall portions 313A-313D can be seen between the respective convex portions 314A-314E. The rear wall portions 313A-313D are formed so as to slope upward and rearward (see FIG. 10-9 (B)). A predetermined decorative pattern 341 is engraved on the front surface of the rear wall portions 313A-313D.

As shown in FIG. 10-9, the recess 312 has a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, has a depth sufficient to accommodate the LED board 303, and is formed so that it is surrounded by the flat portion 311 when viewed from the front. When the LED board 303 is attached, the front surface of the LED board 303 and the flat portion 311 are substantially flush with each other, and only the first performance LED 304 described below is located forward of the flat portion 311. The recess 312 also has a number of vertically long heat dissipation holes 315 and an opening 316 for routing a cable (not shown) connected to the LED board 303 to the back side.

As shown in Figures 10-8 to 10-9, the front surface of the LED board 303 is equipped with a plurality of first performance LEDs 304 capable of emitting light forward, as well as a plurality of other electronic components (not shown) and a plurality of printed wiring 320 (see the enlarged view of Figure 10-10 (B)). On the other hand, the rear surface of the LED board 303 is equipped with a board-side connector CN for connecting a cable (not shown) to the LED board 303 and electronic components (not shown). In addition, the surface of the LED board 303 (the insulating portion on the front and rear surfaces excluding the printed wiring 320) is black.

The cover member 302 is made of a translucent (transparent) synthetic resin material and has a horizontally elongated shape when viewed from the front, and has a first translucent portion 321 that corresponds to part of the flat portion 311 and recessed portion 312 of the base member 301, and second translucent portions 322A, 322B that mainly correspond to the first performance LED 304. In addition, multiple trapezoidal convex portions 324A-324E are formed in the longitudinal direction at positions corresponding to the convex portions 314A-314E of the base member 301.

As shown in FIG. 10-9, the second light-transmitting sections 322A and 322B have a front surface that protrudes forward from the front surface of the first light-transmitting section 321, and a recess 322D is formed on the back surface, making it possible to accommodate the first performance LED 304. In addition, a light diffusion section 322C consisting of fine unevenness is formed on the back surface of the second light-transmitting sections 322A and 322B, making it possible to diffuse light from the first performance LED 304 at the rear and emit it forward. The unevenness may be formed, for example, by sandblasting or diamond cutting, and the formation method and shape can be changed in various ways.

As shown in FIG. 10-10(C), the first translucent portion 321 is provided with a plurality of decorative patterns 331 each having a hexagonal shape when viewed from the front. In detail, each decorative pattern 331 has a decorative portion 331A consisting of a plurality of horizontal lines extending in the left-right direction, decorative portions 331B and 331C consisting of inclined lines extending diagonally to the left and right, a decorative portion 331D having a horizontally elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a decorative portion 331E having a triangular shape when viewed from the front. By sharing the decorative portions 331A to 331C with adjacent decorative patterns 331, the plurality of decorative patterns 331 are provided continuously.

In addition, each of these decorative parts 331A-331E is made to look milky white or translucent when viewed by the player by, for example, sandblasting the rear (or front) of the cover member 302 to form fine irregularities, or by attaching a translucent sticker or the like.

As shown in FIG. 10-11(A), the LED board 303, which is an electronic component having the first performance LED 304, is placed on the front side of the base member 301, and the front side is covered by the cover member 302. However, because the cover member 302 is made of a synthetic resin material with translucency, it is possible for the player to see the front of the base member 301 and the LED board 303 through the cover member 302.

Here, by arranging the base member 301, which is also black, around (around) the black LED board 303, the LED board 303 blends in with the surrounding base member 301, making it difficult to see the boundary BD between the LED board 303 and the cover member 302. In other words, it becomes difficult to see that the LED board 303 is provided on part of the front surface of the base member 301, so the LED board 303, which is an electronic component, becomes less noticeable.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-11(B), when the cover member 302 is attached to the front side of the base member 301 with the LED board 303 placed in the recess 312 of the base member 301, the cover member 302 is positioned high so as to cover the front sides of the base member 301 and the LED board 303. While the front sides of the base member 301 and the LED board 303 can be easily seen from the player side through the first light-transmitting portion 321, it is difficult for the player to see the first performance LED 304 through the second light-transmitting portions 322A and 322B. In addition, the milky or semi-transparent decorative portions 331A to 331E on the cover member 302 are arranged on the front sides of the base member 301 and the LED board 303, so that the milky or semi-transparent decorative pattern 331 can be seen on the front side of the black background.

As shown in FIG. 10-12, when the cover member 302 is placed on the front side of the base member 301, a specific decorative pattern 331 (for example, decorative patterns 331J to 331M in FIG. 10-12) among the multiple decorative patterns 331 is formed (provided) so as to straddle the LED board 303 and the cover member 302 when viewed from the player's side. In more detail, the decorative parts 331B and 331C consisting of inclined lines are arranged so as to intersect with the boundary part BD between the LED board 303 and the cover member 302 facing in the left-right direction, and one decorative pattern 331 is provided across two members (the LED board 303 and the cover member 302). As the one decorative pattern 331 appears to be provided on one member, it becomes difficult to recognize that the LED board 303 and the cover member 302 on the back side are separate members.

In addition, part of the boundary BD between the LED board 303 and the cover member 302 is difficult for the player to see due to the decorative parts 331B, 331C that overlap the front side, making the LED board 303 less noticeable. Note that because the decorative parts 331B, 331C are linear, even if they are positioned to overlap the front side of the boundary BD, the area that overlaps with the boundary BD is small. However, because the decorative pattern 331 is formed over almost the entire front area of the LED board 303 and the cover member 302, it becomes difficult to recognize that the LED board 303 and the cover member 302 are separate members.

The decorative portion 331A of each decorative pattern 331 is arranged approximately parallel to the boundary portion BD, making it difficult to distinguish because of its similar appearance to the boundary portion BD. Also, since it is arranged closer to the front side of the boundary portion BD and is milky white, which is brighter than black, it stands out, making the LED board 303 less noticeable. Furthermore, by arranging the decorative portion 331A so that it overlaps the boundary portion BD, it may be possible to make part of the boundary portion BD difficult to see from the player's side by the decorative portion 331A.

In addition, these decorative parts 331A to 331C are formed in a linear shape in the same way as the printed wiring 320 provided on the LED board 303, and are arranged approximately parallel to a part of the printed wiring 320, so that the wiring pattern and form of the printed wiring 320 are similar (or the same), making it difficult to distinguish them, and therefore the LED board 303 becomes less noticeable.

Furthermore, although the decorative parts 331D and 331E differ in appearance from the printed wiring 320 and the boundary part BD, they are thicker and have a larger area than the printed wiring 320 and the boundary part BD, and therefore stand out more than the printed wiring 320 and the boundary part BD. In addition, a portion of the decorative parts 331D and 331E is arranged overlapping the front side of the printed wiring 320, making the printed wiring 320 less visible, and therefore the LED board 303 is less noticeable.

In addition, a decorative pattern 341 consisting of linear convex portions that are flattened vertically and hexagonally shaped is provided on the front surface of each rear wall portion 313A-313D of the base member 301 so as to be visible to the player. This decorative pattern 341 is similar in appearance (or common) to the wiring pattern of the printed wiring 320, so that a decorative pattern 341 similar in appearance to the wiring pattern of the printed wiring 320 can be formed even in areas of the base member 301 that are not covered by the cover member 302, making the LED board 303 less noticeable.

The base member 301 also has rear wall portions 313A-313D as predetermined areas that can be seen from the player's side without seeing through the cover member 302, and the rear wall portions 313A-313D are provided with decorative pattern 341 as a predetermined decorative pattern that is the same or similar in appearance to decorative pattern 331 provided on the cover member 302. This makes it difficult to tell that the base member 301 and the cover member 302 are different members, making the LED board 303 less noticeable.

In addition, the LED board 303 is disposed in a recess 312 formed in the lower part of the base member 301, and is therefore located lower than the upper region of the recess 312 in the base member 301, i.e., away from the image display device 5. This makes it less noticeable as it is located away from the image display device 5 which is the focus of the player's attention.

In this way, a specific decorative pattern 331 (for example, decorative patterns 331J to 331M in FIG. 10-12) among the multiple decorative patterns 331 is arranged to straddle the LED board 303 and the cover member 302 when viewed from the player's side, making the LED board 303, which is an electronic component, less noticeable. Therefore, even electronic components such as the LED board 303 that should not be shown to the player from the standpoint of appearance and design can be arranged on the front side where they can be viewed from the player's side, thereby increasing design freedom.

(Variable winning ball unit 700)
Next, the variable winning ball unit 700 will be briefly described with reference to Fig. 10-13. Fig. 10-13 (A) is a front view showing the variable winning ball unit, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line F-F of (A).

As shown in Figure 10-13, the variable winning ball unit 700 has a base member 701 that is attached to the front side of the play surface plate 200, and a cover member 702 that is provided on the front side of the base member 701, and is configured as a unit in which the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 are integrally provided.

The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided at the top right of the variable winning ball unit 700, and the variable winning ball device 6B is provided at the bottom left. Between the base plate 701A of the base member 701 and the cover plate 702A of the cover member 702, there is a game ball path 705A through which the game ball (game ball P) can enter the large winning opening of the special variable winning ball device 7, and a game ball path 705B through which the game ball (game ball P) can enter the second starting winning opening of the variable winning ball device 6B. In addition, below the special variable winning ball device 7, there is an LED board 703 on which multiple performance LEDs 704 capable of emitting light forward are provided.

The base member 701 and the cover member 702 are made of a translucent synthetic resin material. Therefore, the game balls passing through the game ball paths 705A and 705B can be seen from the player's side through the cover plate 702A.

(First performance unit 300 and variable winning ball unit 700)
Next, the first performance unit 300 and the variable winning ball unit 700 will be explained based on Fig. 10-14 to Fig. 10-16. Fig. 10-14 (A) and (B) are cross-sectional views showing the main parts of the first performance unit, and (C) and (D) are cross-sectional views showing the main parts of the variable winning ball unit. Fig. 10-15 is a diagram for comparing the first performance unit and the variable winning ball unit. Fig. 10-16 is a diagram for explaining similar colors.

First, as shown in Figure 10-3, the first presentation unit 300 and the variable winning ball unit 700 are arranged side by side on the left and right below the image display device 5, and are arranged so that the right end of the first presentation unit 300 overlaps or is close to the left end of the variable winning ball unit 700 when viewed from the player's side. Also, as shown in Figures 10-4 and 10-13 (B), the front of the variable winning ball unit 700 is positioned on the front side of the board 200, while the first presentation unit 300 is positioned on the rear side of the board 200.

As shown in Figures 10-14 (A) and (B), the front-to-rear dimension L1A, which is the thickness dimension of the cover member 302 in the first light-transmitting portion 321 of the first performance unit 300, is longer than the front-to-rear dimension L1B, which is the thickness dimension of the cover member 302 in the second light-transmitting portions 322A and 322B (L1A > L1B).

In the first light-transmitting portion 321 of the cover member 302, the transmittance of light transmitted in the T direction among the light that enters from the front in a direction (T direction) perpendicular to the front surface of the first light-transmitting portion 321 is XA%. In addition, in the second light-transmitting portions 322A and 322B of the cover member 302, the transmittance of light transmitted in the T direction among the light that enters from the front in a direction (T direction) perpendicular to the front surface of the second light-transmitting portions 322A and 322B is XB%. In other words, not all (100%) of the light that enters the first light-transmitting portion 321 or the second light-transmitting portions 322A and 322B from the front is transmitted in the T direction, and some of the light is reflected at the front surface or emitted in a direction different from the T direction at the rear (to spread around). In particular, the second light-transmitting sections 322A and 322B have a light diffusion section 322C formed on the back surface, which is made of uneven surfaces, and therefore transmit light more easily in directions other than the T direction than the first light-transmitting section 321, and therefore the light transmittance in the T direction is lower than the transmittance of the first light-transmitting section 321 (low light transmittance; XA%>XB%).

As shown in Fig. 10-14 (C) and (D), the transmittance of light that enters the cover plate 702A from the front in a direction perpendicular to the front surface (T direction) and is transmitted in the T direction is Y%. Here, the front-to-rear dimension L2 of the cover plate 702A is shorter than the front-to-rear dimensions L1A, L1B of the first light transmitting portion 321 and the second light transmitting portions 322A, 322B of the cover member 302 (L2<L1A, L2<L1B), so that the light that enters from the front surface is guided in the T direction inside and is less likely to diffuse to the surroundings before being emitted from the back surface. Also, since the cover plate 702A is a flat plate without a light diffusion portion like the second light transmitting portions 322A, 322B, the transmittance of light in the T direction of the cover plate 702A is higher than the transmittance of light in the T direction of the cover member 302 (Y%>XA%, Y%>XB%).

In other words, the translucency of the cover member 302 is lower than that of the cover plate 702A, so that visibility is lower when a specific part on the back side of the cover member 302 (e.g., the first performance LED 304 or the LED board 303) is viewed through the cover member 302 from the player's side than when a specific part on the back side of the cover plate 702A is viewed through the cover plate 702A from the player's side, making the LED board 303 including the first performance LED 304, which is an electronic component, less noticeable.

As shown in FIG. 10-15, the first performance unit 300 has an LED board 303 including the first performance LED 304, which is an electronic component, and a base member 301 arranged around it that are the same color (black), making the LED board 303 less noticeable. In addition, the front-to-rear dimensions L1A, L1B of the cover member 302 of the first performance unit 300 are longer than the front-to-rear dimension L2 of the cover plate 702A of the variable winning ball unit 700 (L1A, L1B>L2), and the light transmittance (XA%, XA%) in the T direction of the cover member 302 of the first performance unit 300 is lower than the light transmittance (Y%) in the T direction of the cover member 702 of the variable winning ball unit 700 (Y%>XA%, Y%>XB%), making the LED board 303 less noticeable.

Therefore, when the first presentation unit 300 and the variable winning ball unit 700, which is located in a different position (to the right) from the first presentation unit 300, are viewed from the player's side, the visibility of the LED board 303 viewed through the cover member 302 is lower than the visibility of the game ball P viewed through the cover member 702, so the LED board 303, which is located on the back side of the cover member 302, which is a translucent member, appears less visible compared to the variable winning ball unit 700 located near the first presentation unit 300. Also, because the cover member 302 is located on the back side of the cover plate 702A, and the base member 301 and the LED board 303 are black, which is a dark color, the LED board 303 becomes less noticeable.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 75SG of this embodiment, the LED board 303, which is an electronic component, and the base member 301, which is a specific member arranged around it, are the same color (black), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the electronic component and the specific member do not have to be the same color, and may be, for example, the same or similar colors.

Color has three attributes: hue (color tone), value (brightness), and saturation (vividness). "Similar colors" include: 1. combinations of colors that have the same tone (hue group with the same value (brightness) and saturation (vividness)) and are adjacent in terms of hue (adjacent colors), 2. combinations of the same hue but different tones, and 3. combinations of colors that differ only in value or saturation.

Here, an example of "1. Combination of adjacent colors (adjacent colors) with the same tone (hue group with the same lightness (brightness) and saturation (vividness))" above will be explained based on Figure 10-16. When the three primary colors of colorants, cyan (C), magenta (M), and yellow (Y), are arranged at angular intervals of 120 degrees on a hue wheel of a given number (24 colors in this case), each of the three colors will be dissimilar to one another. Colors with a hue difference within an angle range of 30 to 60 degrees on this hue wheel are "similar colors," and combinations are not limited to adjacent colors that are adjacent to each other on the hue wheel.

For example, if cyan (C) is the reference color, colors that fall within a range of 30 degrees toward the magenta (M) side and 30 degrees toward the yellow (Y) side (total of 60 degrees) are similar to cyan (C), if magenta (M) is the reference color, colors that fall within a range of 30 degrees toward the cyan (C) side and 30 degrees toward the yellow (Y) side (total of 60 degrees) are similar to magenta (M), and if yellow (Y) is the reference color, colors that fall within a range of 30 degrees toward the cyan (C) side and 30 degrees toward the magenta (M) side (total of 60 degrees) are similar to yellow (Y). Therefore, even if the number of colors on the hue wheel is less than 24 or more than 24, combinations of colors that have a hue difference within the range of 30 to 60 degrees on the hue wheel can be considered "similar colors."

Furthermore, it is preferable that similar colors include combinations of colors that are included in warm colors, such as red and yellow, which are chromatic colors that give a warm feeling, and cool colors, such as blue and purple, which are chromatic colors that give a cold feeling, as well as combinations of colors that are included in neutral colors, which are chromatic colors that are intermediate between warm and cool colors, such as green and purple.

(Second performance unit 400)
Next, the second performance unit 400 will be described based on Fig. 10-17 to Fig. 10-19. Fig. 10-17 (A) is a front view showing the second performance unit, and (B) is a front view showing the second performance unit with the cover member removed. Fig. 10-18 (A) is a G-G cross-sectional view of Fig. 10-17 (A), and (B) is an H-H cross-sectional view of Fig. 10-17 (A). Fig. 10-19 (A) is a diagram explaining the boundary between the base member and the LED board, and (B) is a diagram showing the configuration of the second performance unit.

As shown in Figures 10-17 and 10-18, the second performance unit 400 is mainly composed of a base member 401, a cover member 402 arranged to cover the front side of the base member 401, an LED board 403 attached to the front side of the base member 401, and an inner lens 405 arranged on the front side of the LED board 403, and as shown in Figure 10-3, it is installed on the right side of the light guide plate 501 so that it can be seen through the glass window 50a and the light guide plate 501 from the front of the pachinko game machine 75SG001, that is, from the player side facing the pachinko game machine 75SG001.

The base member 401 is made of a non-translucent synthetic resin material and is roughly crescent-shaped when viewed from the front, with its surfaces (front, rear and periphery) being white.

The LED board 403 has a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front end of a boss protruding from the front of the base member 401. A plurality of second performance LEDs 404A, 404B and other electronic components (not shown) are mounted on the front of the LED board 403. A plurality of second performance LEDs 404C capable of emitting light upward and a plurality of second performance LEDs 404D capable of emitting light downward and other electronic components (not shown) are mounted on the back of the LED board 403. The second performance LEDs 404A to 404D are angled LEDs capable of emitting light parallel or approximately parallel to the mounting surface of the LED board 403. The surface of the LED board 403 (insulating parts excluding the printed wiring on the front and back) is white.

The inner lens 405 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material and is formed to be approximately the same shape as the LED board 403. It is disposed between a plurality of second performance LEDs 404A arranged along the upper edge of the front surface of the LED board 403 and a plurality of second performance LEDs 404B arranged along the lower edge of the front surface of the LED board 403, so that light from the second performance LEDs 404A is incident on the front end surface and light from the second performance LEDs 404B is incident on the rear end surface.

As shown in FIG. 10-18(A), the light incident from the second performance LEDs 404A, 404B is reflected forward by a reflecting portion 406 on the back surface of the inner lens 405, and is emitted forward approximately evenly from the entire front surface of the inner lens 405. The front surface of the inner lens 405 is flat, so it emits light from the surface like a light guide plate.

The reflective portion 406 is formed with an uneven state (rough surface) that forms a generally triangular wave shape with a constant pitch when viewed in cross section in the direction of light guided inside the inner lens 405. Specifically, it is configured by a molding method in which unevenness is formed on the back surface of the inner lens 405 by using a stamper or injection, but the reflective portion may also be configured by, for example, a silk printing method in which reflective dots are printed on an acrylic plate with white ink, an adhesive dot method in which an acrylic plate and a reflective plate are attached with a dot-shaped adhesive, a groove processing method, etc.

The cover member 402 is made of a translucent (transparent) synthetic resin material and has a box shape with an open back, and is formed so as to be able to cover the front side of the base member 401 and the LED board 403. At a position on the front surface of the cover member 402 corresponding to the LED board 403, a protrusion 410 having a shape that is slightly enlarged from the LED board 403 in a front view is provided protruding forward.

On the front surface of the convex portion 410, a decorative portion 420 consisting of the letter "V" (logotype) is provided to be light-transmitting, for example, by printing with a translucent colored paint or by attaching a translucent sheet on which letters are printed. In addition, a light diffusion portion 402A consisting of an uneven portion is formed on the back surface of the convex portion 410, and is capable of diffusing light from the inner lens 405 and emitting it forward.

In the upper region of the convex portion 410 on the back surface of the cover member 402, a plurality of convex ridge portions 421A protruding toward the back surface are provided extending in the vertical direction at positions corresponding to the second performance LEDs 404C. In addition, in the lower region of the convex portion 410 on the back surface of the cover member 402, a plurality of convex ridge portions 421B protruding toward the back surface are provided extending in the vertical direction at positions corresponding to the second performance LEDs 404D. Note that a light diffusion portion made of uneven portions may also be formed in the portion of the back surface of the cover member 402 where the convex ridge portions 421A, 421B are not formed. In addition, the cover member 402 is formed so as to be inclined toward the rear from the convex portion 410 upward and downward.

The multiple convex ridges 421A, 421B have a continuous uneven portion formed on the rear end surface, and a step portion 421C is formed at a midpoint in the longitudinal direction, and are extended from the convex portion 410 so as to slope upward and downward toward the rear. This allows the light emitted upward and downward from the second performance LEDs 404C, 404D to enter through these uneven portions and step portion 421C, and the entered light is diffused by the uneven portions and emitted forward.

In this way, when the second performance LEDs 404A, 404B emit light, the light from the second performance LEDs 404A, 404B is emitted forward by the inner lens 405 and enters the area corresponding to the convex portion 410 of the cover member 402, causing the entire front area of the convex portion 410, including the decorative portion 420, to emit light.

As shown in FIG. 10-19(A), the LED board 403, which is an electronic component having the second performance LEDs 404A-404D, is disposed on the front side of the base member 401, and the front side is covered by the cover member 402. However, since the cover member 402 is formed from a synthetic resin material having translucency, even if a light diffusion section is formed on the cover member 402 in a part other than the convex rib sections 421A, 421B from the player's side, it is possible to see the front of the base member 401 and the LED board 403 through the parts other than the convex rib sections 421A, 421B.

As shown in FIG. 10-19(B), the white base member 401 is disposed around (near) the white LED board 403, so that the LED board 403 blends in with the surrounding base member 401, making it difficult to see the boundary BD between the LED board 403 and the cover member 402. In other words, it is difficult to see that the LED board 403 is provided on part of the front surface of the base member 401, so that the LED board 403, which is an electronic component, is less noticeable.

As shown in FIG. 10-19(A), the decorative portion 420 provided on the front side of the convex portion 410 is provided at a position that corresponds to a part of the upper and lower sides of the boundary portion BD between the LED board 403, which is an electronic component, and the base member 401 when viewed from the player's side. In other words, a part of the decorative portion 420 is arranged so that it overlaps with a part of the boundary portion BD on the front side of the boundary portion BD, and the decorative portion 420 makes a part of the boundary portion BD less visible, making the LED board 403 less noticeable. Therefore, even electronic components such as the LED board 403 that should not be shown to the player from the standpoint of appearance and design can be provided on the front side where they can be seen by the player, thereby increasing the degree of design freedom.

In addition, the decorative portion 420 is arranged so that the area covering (overlapping) the front side of the boundary portion BD is larger than that of the decorative pattern 331 described above, making the boundary portion BD less visible and thus making the LED board 403 less noticeable.

In this embodiment, the decorative portion 420 is illustrated as partially overlapping (partially overlapping) positions that correspond to parts of the upper and lower edges of the boundary portion BD when viewed from the player's side, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative portion 420 may be arranged at positions that correspond to all parts of the boundary portion BD. In addition, it is preferable that the decorative portion 420 is arranged so as to overlap at least about 1/3 of the boundary portion BD.

In addition, the decorative portion 420 displays the letter "V" as a logotype, so that players focus on the logotype and are less likely to be aware of the boundary BD between the LED board 403 and the base member 401, making the LED board 403 less noticeable.

In this embodiment, the letter "V" indicating a jackpot is used as the logotype, but the present invention is not limited to this, and letters indicating variable display results such as "jackpot", "BONUS", and "RUSH", letters suggesting a jackpot such as "hot", "super hot", and "!!", and letters such as the model name of the gaming machine, the title, and the names of characters that appear may also be used. Furthermore, in addition to letters, decorations such as characters, symbols, designs, pictures, and patterns may also be displayed as decorative parts.

In addition, the LED board 403 has a second performance LED 404A as a light-emitting means capable of illuminating the decorative part 420, so that the decorative part 420 stands out due to the light emitted, making it difficult for the player to be aware of the boundary BD between the LED board 403 and the base member 401, and therefore the LED board 403 becomes less noticeable.

In addition, the second performance LED 404A is provided with a decorative part 420 that can emit surface light through the inner lens 405. This makes the decorative part 420 stand out due to the surface emission, making it difficult for the player to be aware of the boundary BD between the LED board 403 and the base member 401, and therefore making the LED board 403 less noticeable.

In addition, in this embodiment, the decorative part 420 is a single decorative part consisting of the letter "V", but the present invention is not limited to this. When multiple decorative parts 420 are provided in the region of the convex part 410 of the cover member 402, and multiple predetermined decorative parts (e.g., patterns, etc.) having a different form from the decorative part 420 are provided in the region other than the convex part 410 of the cover member 402, it is preferable that the number of the multiple decorative parts is greater than the number of the predetermined decorative parts. In this way, the boundary BD between the LED board 403 and the base member 401 is made less visible by the multiple decorative parts, and the number of the multiple decorative parts is greater than the number of the multiple predetermined decorative parts provided in other regions, making the LED board 403 less noticeable.

In this case, the multiple decorative parts and the multiple specified decorative parts only need to have different aspects. For example, the specified decorative parts may be enlarged or reduced aspects of the decorative parts, or may differ in any one of the outer shape, form, color, size, etc.

The cover member 402 also has a convex portion 410 which is a boundary corresponding area corresponding to the boundary BD between the LED board 403 and the base member 401, and an area other than the convex portion 410 which does not correspond to the boundary BD between the LED board 403 and the base member 401, and the light transmittance of the convex portion 410 may be lower than the light transmittance of the area other than the convex portion 410. By doing this, it becomes difficult for a player to see the boundary BD between the LED board 403 and the base member 401 through the convex portion 410, so that the LED board 403 becomes less noticeable.

(Third production unit 600 and fourth production unit 800)
Next, the third performance unit 600 and the fourth performance unit 800 will be described based on Fig. 10-20 to Fig. 10-26. Fig. 10-20 (A) is a front view showing the third performance unit and the fourth performance unit. Fig. 10-21 (A) is an I-I cross-sectional view of Fig. 10-20, and (B) is a J-J cross-sectional view of Fig. 10-20. Fig. 10-22 is a K-K cross-sectional view of Fig. 10-20. Fig. 10-23 is an explanatory diagram showing the visibility of the third performance unit and the fourth performance unit. Fig. 10-24 is a diagram showing the configuration of the third performance unit and the fourth performance unit. Fig. 10-25 is a diagram showing the performance mode when the third performance unit and the fourth performance unit emit light. Fig. 10-26 (A) is a schematic front view showing the state where the third performance unit is located at the origin position, and (B) is a schematic front view showing the state where the third performance unit is located at the performance position.

(Third performance unit 600)
As shown in Fig. 10-20, Fig. 10-21(A) and Fig. 10-26, the third performance unit 600 includes a base member 601, a cover member 602 arranged to cover the front side of the base member 601, an LED board 603 attached to the front side of the base member 601, and an inner lens 605 arranged on the front side of the LED board 603. The third performance unit 600 includes a light-emitting performance unit 630, and a light-emitting performance unit 630 that is movable between the origin position shown in Fig. 10-26(A) and the performance position shown in Fig. 10-26(B). The pachinko game machine 75SG001 has a performance motor 631 (see Figure 10-2) which is a drive source that enables vertical movement between the pachinko game machine 75SG001 and the light-emitting performance unit 630, and a power transmission member 632 for transmitting the power of the performance motor 631 to the light-emitting performance unit 630. As shown in Figure 10-20, the performance motor 631 is provided at the top of the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51 so as to be visible through the glass window 50a and the light guide plate 501 from the front of the pachinko game machine 75SG001, that is, from the player side facing the pachinko game machine 75SG001.

The base member 601 is made of a non-translucent synthetic resin material and is generally trapezoidal in front view, with its surfaces (front, rear and periphery) being white.

The LED board 603 has a generally trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front end of a vertical wall that protrudes from the front periphery of the base member 601. A plurality of third performance LEDs 604A, 604B and other electronic components (not shown) are mounted on the front of the LED board 603. The third performance LEDs 604A, 604B are capable of emitting light forward. The surface of the LED board 603 (insulating parts excluding the printed wiring on the front and back) is white. The cable C that connects the LED board 603 and the performance control board 12 is wired along the power transmission member 632 (see Figure 10-26).

The inner lens 605 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material, is formed to have approximately the same shape as the LED board 603, and is positioned so as to cover the front side of the multiple third performance LEDs 604A, 604B that are arranged in front of the LED board 603.

As shown in FIG. 10-21(A), the front and back surfaces of the inner lens 605 are provided with a light diffusion section 605A made of uneven surfaces that diffuses and emits light from the third performance LEDs 604A and 604B arranged on the back surface toward the front, thereby allowing surface emission.

The cover member 602 is made of a translucent (transparent) synthetic resin material and has a box shape with an open back, and is formed so as to be able to cover the front side of the base member 601 and the LED board 603.

A decorative portion 620 consisting of the letters "XXX" (logotype) is provided on the front surface of the cover member 602 in a light-transmitting manner by printing with a translucent colored paint or by attaching a translucent sheet on which the letters are printed. In addition, a light diffusion portion 602A consisting of uneven portions is formed on the rear surface of the cover member 602, and the light from the inner lens 605 can be diffused and emitted forward.

In this embodiment, the logotype is exemplified as the letters "XXX" indicating a jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this, and letters such as the model name of the gaming machine, the title, and the names of the characters that appear, letters indicating variable display results such as "jackpot," "BONUS," and "RUSH," and letters suggesting a jackpot such as "hot," "super hot," and "!!" may also be used. Furthermore, in addition to letters, decorations such as characters, symbols, designs, pictures, and patterns may also be displayed as decorative parts.

In this way, when the third performance LEDs 604A, 604B of the third performance unit 600 emit light, the light emitted forward from the third performance LEDs 604A, 604B passes through the inner lens 605 and is further diffused and emitted forward through the cover member 602, causing the entire front area of the cover member 602, including the decorative portion 620, to emit light.

Also, as shown in FIG. 10-20, the multiple third performance LEDs 604A are arranged along the periphery of the letters "XXX" that make up the decorative part 620, and the multiple third performance LEDs 604B are arranged in a position that does not correspond to the decorative part 620. By arranging the multiple third performance LEDs 604A along the periphery of the letters "XXX" that make up the decorative part 620 in this way, when the third performance LEDs 604A emit light, the periphery of the letters "XXX" glows in a dot pattern, making it easier to recognize the shape of the decorative part 620.

The power transmission member 632, which constitutes part of the power transmission member that transmits power to the light-emitting performance unit 630, is an arm member with one end rotatably supported around a pivot axis facing in the front-to-rear direction and the light-emitting performance unit 630 attached to the other end, but the power transmission member can be modified in various ways, and may be a rack gear and pinion gear, etc., as long as it is capable of transmitting power so as to move the light-emitting performance unit 630 in the up-down direction.

(Fourth production unit 800)
As shown in Figures 10-20 and 10-21 (B), the fourth performance unit 800 is mainly composed of a base member 801, a cover member 802 arranged to cover the front side of the base member 801, an LED board 803 attached to the front side of the base member 801, and an inner lens 805 arranged on the front side of the LED board 803, and is arranged in the upper left corner of the area surrounded by the guide rail 211 so as to be visible through the glass window 50a and the face plate 200 from the front of the pachinko game machine 75SG001, that is, from the player side facing the pachinko game machine 75SG001, as shown in Figure 10-20.

The base member 801 is made of a non-translucent synthetic resin material and is formed in a box shape with an open front, and part of the periphery is formed in an arc shape so as to follow the guide rail 211. In addition, the surface (front, rear and periphery) is white.

The LED board 803 is formed so that its shape in front view is smaller than the base member 801, and is attached to the front end of a boss (not shown) erected on the front surface of the base member 801. A plurality of fourth performance LEDs 804 and other electronic components (not shown) are mounted on the front surface of the LED board 803. The fourth performance LEDs 804 are angled LEDs capable of emitting light parallel or nearly parallel to the mounting surface of the LED board 803, and are arranged in multiple numbers along the periphery of the front surface of the LED board 803. In addition, the surface of the LED board 803 (insulating parts excluding the printed wiring on the front and back surfaces) is white.

The inner lens 805 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material and is placed on the front surface of the LED board 803 in an area surrounded by the multiple fourth performance LEDs 804.

As shown in FIG. 10-21 (B), the light incident from the fourth performance LED 804 is reflected forward by a reflecting section 806 on the back surface of the inner lens 805, and is emitted forward approximately evenly from the entire front surface of the inner lens 805. The front surface of the inner lens 805 is flat, so it emits light from a surface like a light guide plate.

The cover member 802 is formed from a synthetic resin material having translucency (transparent), and is formed so as to be able to cover the front side of the base member 801 and the LED board 803. In detail, the cover member 802 does not cover the front end of the standing wall 801A that is provided on the front peripheral edge of the base member 801, which is a portion that is aligned with the guide rail 211, but covers the front end of the standing wall 801B other than the portion that is aligned with the guide rail 211. In addition, a light diffusion section 802A made of uneven parts is formed on the back surface of the cover member 802, which is able to diffuse the light from the inner lens 805 and emit it forward.

In this way, when the fourth performance LED 804 emits light, the fourth performance unit 800 emits light forward through the inner lens 805, and the light passes through the cover member 802 and is diffused and emitted forward, causing the entire front surface of the cover member 802 to emit light.

Next, the third performance unit 600 and the fourth performance unit 800 will be described. As shown in FIG. 10-24, the surfaces of the base members 601, 801 and the LED boards 603, 803 of the third performance unit 600 and the fourth performance unit 800 are the same color, white, and the front sides of these base members 601, 801 and LED boards 603, 803 are covered with translucent cover members 602, 802, making them light-emitting performance bodies whose front surfaces emit light when the third performance LEDs 604A, 604B and the fourth performance LED 804 are turned on.

As shown in Fig. 10-20 and Fig. 10-21(A), the LED board 603 as an electronic component having the third performance LEDs 604A, 604B is disposed on the front side of the base member 601, and the front side is covered by the cover member 602. However, since the cover member 602 is formed of a synthetic resin material having translucency, even if the cover member 602 has a light diffusion section 602A formed thereon, it is possible for the player to see the rear side through the cover member 602. However, since the inner lens 605 having light diffusion sections 605A formed on the front and rear surfaces is provided on the rear side so as to cover the LED board 603 from the front side, it is extremely difficult to see the front side of the LED board 603, although it is possible to see the front side of the LED board 603.

As shown in FIG. 10-21(A), by arranging the upright walls of the base member 601, which is also white, around the white LED board 603, the LED board 603 blends in with the surrounding base member 601, making it difficult to see the boundary BD between the LED board 603 and the cover member 602. In other words, it becomes difficult to see that the LED board 603 is provided on the base member 601, and therefore the LED board 603, which is an electronic component, becomes less noticeable.

On the other hand, as shown in Figures 10-20 and 10-21 (B), the LED board 803 as an electronic component having the fourth performance LED 804 is disposed on the front side of the base member 801, and the front side is covered by the cover member 802. However, because the cover member 802 is made of a synthetic resin material having translucency, even if the cover member 802 has a light diffusion portion 802A formed thereon, it is possible for the player to see the front of the base member 801 and the LED board 803 through the cover member 802.

As shown in FIG. 10-21(B), a white base member 801 is placed around (near) a white LED board 803, so that the LED board 803 blends in with the surrounding base member 801, making it difficult to see the boundary BD between the LED board 803 and the cover member 802. In other words, it is difficult to see that the LED board 803 is provided on part of the front surface of the base member 801, so that the LED board 803, which is an electronic component, is less noticeable.

However, the fourth performance LED 804 is an angled LED that receives light from the side end surface of the inner lens 805, and is arranged along the periphery of the LED board 803, so that the front side of the front periphery of the LED board 803 including the fourth performance LED 804 is not covered by the inner lens 805, and the inner lens 805 has a smaller area in which the reflective portion and light diffusion portion are formed than the inner lens 605, so that the visibility when the LED board 803 including the fourth performance LED 804 is viewed through the inner lens 805 from the player's side is higher than the visibility when the LED board 603 including the third performance LEDs 604A and 604B is viewed through the inner lens 605 from the player's side. In other words, the LED board 803 is more noticeable than the LED board 603.

As shown in FIG. 10-24, the light-emitting performance section 630 of the third performance unit 600 is larger than the LED board 803 of the fourth performance unit 800 when viewed from the player's side (see FIG. 10-20), and the front-to-back position of the front side is further forward (toward the player) than the front side of the fourth performance unit 800 (see FIG. 10-22 and FIG. 10-23). Furthermore, the light-emitting mode of the fourth performance LED 804 of the fourth performance unit 800 is surface light-emitting, while the light-emitting mode of the third performance LEDs 604A, 604B of the third performance unit 600 is point light (see FIG. 10-25). Note that in FIG. 10-25, for the convenience of explaining the light-emitting modes, the background of the third performance unit 600 and the fourth performance unit 800 is shown in black.

In this way, the light-emitting performance section 630 of the third performance unit 600 is larger than the LED board 803 of the fourth performance unit 800 when viewed from the player's side, is located closer to the player, and emits a stronger light, so that it is a performance means with higher visibility when viewed from the player's side than the fourth performance unit 800. In other words, the third performance unit 600, which is a performance means with higher visibility when viewed from the player's side than the fourth performance unit 800, is provided in the vicinity of the fourth performance unit 800, and since the third performance unit 600 stands out more than the fourth performance unit 800 and attracts more attention from players, the LED board 803, which is an electronic component of the fourth performance unit 800, becomes less noticeable.

In this embodiment, the light-emitting performance section 630 of the third performance unit 600 is larger than the LED board 803 of the fourth performance unit 800 when viewed from the player's side, is located closer to the player, and emits stronger light, making it a more visible performance device than the LED board 803 and base member 801. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is sufficient that the light-emitting performance section 630 of the third performance unit 600 has higher visibility by being different from the LED board 803 of the fourth performance unit 800 in at least one of the following aspects: size when viewed from the player's side, position relative to the player, and light emission mode.

The visibility of the light-emitting performance section 630 may be easily increased by coloring the front surface of the light-emitting performance section 630 of the third performance unit 600 as a performance means in a color that is more visible than the surface color of the LED board 803, providing a decorative section in a highly visible color, or using a cover member 602 molded in a highly visible color. Furthermore, the visibility of the light-emitting performance section 630 may be easily increased by the light-emitting mode (e.g., lighting color, lighting mode, brightness, etc.) of the third performance LEDs 604A, 604B.

In addition, the presenter has exemplified a form in which the light-emitting performance section 630 of the third performance unit 600, which can emit light using a light-emitting means and can be operated by a performance motor 631, is used as the performance means, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the performance means may be light-emitting means (such as a lamp section) provided around the periphery of the fourth performance unit 800 in the gaming machine frame 3, or the performance means may not emit light using a light-emitting means, or it may be a performance section that is fixed in a predetermined position and is not operated by a specified drive source.

As shown in FIG. 10-23, a protrusion 3A (eaves) that protrudes further forward than the game board 2 and glass window 50a is formed on the upper front surface of the game machine frame 3. The protrusion 3A is formed above the game area Y so as not to obstruct the view of the game balls passing over the top of the game area Y, but because it protrudes forward so much, for example, when the pachinko game machine 75SG001 is installed on a game island in an amusement center, the area E1 below the protrusion 3A (the area shown by dots in the figure) becomes dark because the outside light from the amusement center is blocked by the protrusion 3A and casts a shadow.

Therefore, by providing the third performance unit 600 and the fourth performance unit 800 at a position corresponding to area E1 at the top of the play area Y, the LED boards 603, 803 are easily blended into the shadow of the protrusion 3A, making them less noticeable.

In addition, a protrusion 3A is provided above the LED boards 603, 803, which protrudes further toward the player than the LED boards 603, 803. Since the protrusion 3A is larger than the LED boards 603, 803 (see Figure 10-23), the LED boards 603, 803 are in the shadow of the protrusion 3A, making them less noticeable.

In addition, while the LED boards 603, 803 and base members 601, 801 are shown in white, the present invention is not limited to this and they may be dark in color (e.g., black). In this way, the LED boards 603, 803 and base members 601, 801 will blend in more easily with the shadow of the protrusion 3A, making them less noticeable.

In this embodiment, the protrusion 3A protruding toward the player above the LED boards 603 and 803 is used as a protrusion that protrudes toward the player above the electronic components and specific components. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the protrusion is not limited to a protrusion that protrudes from a part of the gaming machine frame 3, but may be, for example, composed of other gaming devices (e.g., winning ball devices, etc.) or presentation devices provided on the gaming board 2 or the gaming area Y. In addition, the protrusion 3A may not only be fixed to the front of the gaming machine frame 3, but may also be a protrusion that protrudes toward the player above the electronic components and specific components by moving from the origin position to the protruding position at a predetermined timing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-26, the light-emitting area 506 of the light guide plate 501 is formed to overlap front to back with most of the movement area E2 (area surrounded by a dashed line in FIG. 10-26) when the light-emitting performance section 630 and power transmission member 632 of the third performance unit 600 operating on the rear side of the light guide plate 501 move.

In more detail, the movement area E2 of the light-emitting performance unit 630 and the power transmission member 632 is the area in which the light-emitting performance unit 630 moves from the origin position to the performance position, and is an area that includes the origin position and the performance position. When light is incident on the right end surface 501a of the light guide plate 501, the light-emitting area 506 becomes luminous, and the image displayed on the image display device 5 at the rear, the light-emitting performance unit 630, and the power transmission member 632 become difficult or impossible to see through the light guide plate 501 from the player side. That is, the performance control CPU 120 executes a light-emitting performance in which the light guide plate LEDs 502 are turned on and the light-emitting area 506 is illuminated during at least the movement period in which the light-emitting performance unit 630 and the power transmission member 632 are moved from the origin position to the performance position and during the performance period in which they are located at the performance position. This makes it difficult or impossible for the player to see the light-emitting performance unit 630 and the power transmission member 632 through the light guide plate 501, and thus makes it possible to prevent the cable C (electronic component) and the like that is arranged along the power transmission member 632 from being noticeable during the movement period and performance period.

In addition, after the light-emitting performance unit 630 has moved to the performance position, when the light guide plate LED 502 is turned off and the light-emitting performance of the light-emitting area 506 ends, the power transmission member 632, cable C, etc. become visible, but by turning on the third performance LEDs 604A, 604B of the light-emitting performance unit 630 to make the light-emitting performance unit 630 stand out, the power transmission member 632 and cable C can be made less noticeable.

Furthermore, electronic components that are arranged to be operable in this manner (for example, the LED board 603 and cable C) may be visible to the player during the waiting period when they are waiting at the origin position or during the movement period, but it is preferable to make them difficult or impossible to see from the player at least during the performance period when they are located at the performance position. In this way, it is possible to prevent the electronic components from standing out during the performance period when the player is paying attention.

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001 of the characteristic part 75SG of this embodiment is,
Electronic components (e.g., LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803) that are visible to the player;
A specific member (e.g., base member 301, 401, 601, 801) provided around the electronic component and formed in a similar color to the electronic component;
a light-transmitting member (e.g., cover member 302, 402, 602, 802) that is a light-transmitting member and is provided so that a player can visually recognize the electronic components and the specific member through the member;
The present invention is characterized by the following:
By doing this, even if the electronic components are arranged so that they are visible to the player, the specific materials of similar colors make the electronic components less noticeable, thereby increasing the freedom of design.
The electronic components and the specific members may be changed to any color as long as they are similar in color, including the electronic components and the specific members having the same color (e.g., black and black, white and white, etc.) as in the above embodiment.

(Description of Variations and Applications of Feature 75SG)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001 described above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

For example, in the characteristic portion 75SG of the above embodiment, an example is given of a form in which LED boards 303, 403, 603, and 803 are provided with light-emitting diodes such as the first performance LED 304, the second performance LEDs 404A-404D, the third performance LED 604A and 604B, and the fourth performance LED 804 as electronic components, but the present invention is not limited to this and includes circuit boards that do not have light-emitting diodes (including the main board 11 that is not used for performance, the performance control board 12, relay boards, etc.), electronic components such as sensors, solenoids, motors, connectors, and cables (wiring), as well as boards and members that secure these.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 75SG of the above embodiment, the specific member is the base member 301, 401, 601, 801 for arranging the LED board 303, 403, 603, 803 as an electronic component. However, the present invention is not limited to this. As described above, the specific member does not have to be a member constituting part of the unit (device) in which the electronic component is arranged or housed, but as long as it is a member provided around the electronic component, it may be a different member provided separately from the unit (device) in which the electronic component is arranged or housed (for example, a member constituting part of another unit, or a member constituting part of the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3).

In addition, in the characteristic portion 75SG of the above embodiment, the cover members 302, 402, 602, 802 constituting part of the unit (apparatus) in which the electronic components are arranged or housed are exemplified as the translucent member, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the member does not have to be a part of the unit (apparatus) in which the electronic components are arranged or housed as described above, but as long as it is a translucent member that allows the player to see the electronic components and specific members through the member, it may be a different member provided separately from the unit (apparatus) in which the electronic components are arranged or housed (for example, a member that constitutes part of another unit, or a member that constitutes part of the game board 2 or game machine frame 3).

In addition, in the characteristic portion 75SG of the above embodiment, an example is given in which the electronic component and the specific member provided around the electronic component are the same color (same color), but the present invention is not limited to this, and as long as the electronic component and the specific member provided around the electronic component are the same color as described above, the present invention is not limited to the electronic component and the specific member being the same color.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 75SG of the above embodiment, the base members 301, 401, 601, 801 as specific members are partially overlapped on the back side of the LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803 as electronic components, and the non-overlapping portions are arranged around the LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the electronic components and the specific members may be arranged side by side on at least one of the upper, lower, left, and right sides without overlapping when viewed from the player's side. Also, as long as the specific members are arranged around the electronic components when viewed from the player's side, the electronic components and the specific members may be arranged apart in the up-down direction, left-right direction, front-back direction, etc.

The specific component provided around the electronic component includes a specific component provided in a position that is visible to the player together with the electronic component, and may include, for example, a specific component located within a range of approximately 5 cm away from the electronic component.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 75SG of the above embodiment, the cover members 302, 402, 602, 802 made of a translucent synthetic resin material are used as the translucent member, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any material may be used as long as it is a translucent member, and may be glass material, etc. Furthermore, as long as the player can see the electronic components and specific members through the member, it may be transparent or semi-transparent, or may be colored a specified color. Furthermore, the light transmittance does not have to be 100% or a value close to 100%.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 75SG of the above embodiment, the cover member 302, 402, 602, 802 as a translucent member is exemplified as a form in which the player can see through the member to see the LED board 303, 403, 603, 803 as an electronic component and part or all of the base member 301, 401, 601, 801 as a specific component, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as long as at least part of the electronic component is arranged to be visible through the member, it is sufficient that the electronic component and the specific component are arranged to be visible together, even if at least part of the specific component is not arranged to be visible through the member.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 75SG of the above embodiment, the cover member 302, 402, 602, 802 as the translucent member is exemplified as being arranged on the front side of the LED board 303, 403, 603, 803 as the electronic component and the base member 301, 401, 601, 801 as the specific component so as to be aligned with the electronic component and the specific component, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is not necessarily required that the cover member is arranged so as to be aligned with the electronic component and the specific component. In other words, the electronic component and the specific component may be arranged at an angle with respect to the translucent member.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 75SG of the above embodiment, the LED board 303, 403, 603, 803 and the base member 301, 401, 601, 801 have an entire surface of a predetermined color (black or white), but the present invention is not limited to this, and as long as the colors of the parts of the electronic components and specific components that can be seen through the translucent member (for example, the front color of the electronic components and specific components) are similar colors, the entire surface does not necessarily have to be similar colors. In addition, the colors of these electronic components and specific components may be colored when the components are molded, or may be colored by painting or printing after molding, or may be the predetermined color by attaching a sticker or the like.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 75SG of the above embodiment, an embodiment in which the electronic components and the specific members provided around the electronic components are the same color (same color) has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a specific electronic component (e.g., the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the solenoid 81, etc.) that is provided in a manner that is difficult or impossible for the player to see may be provided separately from the LED board 303, 403, 603, 803 as the electronic component and the base member 301, 401, 601, 801 as the specific member. In a light source having a predetermined electronic component (e.g., first start port switch 22A, second start port switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.) and a predetermined component (e.g., components for fixing first start port switch 22A, second start port switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.) provided around the predetermined electronic component, it is preferable that the predetermined electronic component (e.g., first start port switch 22A, second start port switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.) is a non-similar color to the predetermined component (e.g., components for fixing first start port switch 22A, second start port switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.).

In this way, for the specified electronic components such as the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the solenoids 81 and 82, which are installed in a way that is difficult or impossible for the player to see, generic products can be used without having to consider the tradeoff with the specified parts that secure them, thereby reducing manufacturing costs.

In addition, by making the color of the specific component the same hue but with either a higher brightness or saturation than the color of the electronic component, the specific component becomes more visible than the electronic component, making it possible to make the electronic component less conspicuous in comparison.

In addition, by coloring the translucent member in a similar color to the electronic components and specific components, the translucent member blends in with the electronic components and specific components, making the electronic components less noticeable.

For example, if an electronic component such as a black LED board is placed on the right side of the game board 2, an outer rail decoration 212 of the same color or a similar color as the electronic component can be placed on the left side of the game board 2 on the opposite side of the image display device 5, separate from the specific component placed around the electronic component, so that it is visible to the player. This allows the black components to be placed in a balanced manner on the left and right sides of the image display device 5, making it less likely for the player to feel uncomfortable, and making the electronic component less noticeable. In this way, by symmetrically placing components of the same color or a similar color as the electronic component at a distance, separate from the specific component, the electronic component can be made less noticeable.

The configuration related to feature 75SG may be appropriately combined with some or all of the configurations related to feature 91AK, 92AK, 01AK, 02AK, etc. For example, if the effects described in feature 91AK, 92AK, 01AK, 02AK can be executed on image display device 5, the electronic components of first effect unit 300, second effect unit 400, third effect unit 600, and fourth effect unit 800 described in feature 75SG arranged around image display device 5 become less noticeable, making it possible to display the above effects favorably.

Specifically, for example, as described in FIG. 9-9 to FIG. 9-11, when a normal drawing performance NOR is executed during a period other than the performance execution period D0 among the multiple performance execution periods D0 to D4, a light-emitting performance using a first light-emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 or other decorative LEDs can be executed, and when a specific drawing performance SPE is executed during the performance execution period D2, etc., and a light-emitting performance using a second light-emitting member provided around the electronic components (e.g., LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803) and specific components (e.g., base members 301, 401, 601, 801) (e.g., closer than the game effect lamp 9, etc.) may also be controlled not to be executed (or the light amount may be lower than that of the game effect lamp 9, etc.). In this way, it is possible to prevent the electronic components and specific components from being conspicuous by the execution of a light-emitting performance using the second light-emitting member when the light-emitting performance using the first light-emitting member is restricted.

Furthermore, for light-emitting elements that are not noticeable even when they continue to emit light, such as the second performance LED 404A that can emit surface light from the decorative part 420 of the translucent material that is placed on the front side of the electronic components and specific components among the second light-emitting elements provided around the electronic components and specific components, the amount of light may be maintained (execution is not restricted) even when control is performed so that the light-emitting performance using the first light-emitting element is not executed. In this way, the electronic components and specific components can be made less noticeable without reducing the performance effect too much.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1,75SG001 is given as an example of a game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the present invention can also be applied to so-called sealed game machines in which a predetermined number of game balls are enclosed inside the game machine so that they can be circulated, and the number of loaned balls loaned in response to a loan request by a player and the number of prize balls awarded in response to winning are added, while the number of game balls used in the game is subtracted and stored. In these sealed game machines, scores or points are awarded to the player rather than game balls, and these awarded scores or points correspond to the game value.

In addition, in the above embodiment, spherical gaming balls (pachinko balls) were used as an example of gaming media, but the gaming media is not limited to spherical gaming media and may be non-spherical gaming media such as medals.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine was applied as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to a slot machine in which, for example, a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using gaming value, one game ends when a variable display result is derived from a variable display device that can variably display multiple types of identifiable patterns, and a prize can be won depending on the variable display result derived from the variable display device.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to slot machines and other enclosed gaming machines that enclose gaming media and award points based on winning. In addition, a gaming machine capable of playing games is one that at least allows playing games, and is not limited to pachinko gaming machines or slot machines, and may be a general game machine.

The present invention is not limited to the above description. Furthermore, the specific configuration includes the above-mentioned embodiment and other examples described below, as well as modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

Furthermore, among the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modified example described above, and the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modified example described below, all or part of the configurations may be combined in any manner.

The above-mentioned and hereinafter-described embodiments disclosed herein should be considered as illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, not by the above-mentioned and hereinafter-described descriptions, and is intended to include all modifications equivalent to and within the scope of the claims.

Other examples of the gaming machine of the present invention include a gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1, 75SG001) that can be controlled to an advantageous state for a player, and includes electronic components (e.g., LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803) arranged to be visible to the player, specific members (e.g., base members 301, 401, 601, 801) arranged around the electronic components and formed in a similar color to the electronic components, translucent members (e.g., cover members 302, 402, 602, 802) arranged so that the player can see the electronic components and the specific members through the members, display means capable of moving and displaying a pseudo-movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position, a movable body that can be moved from the first position to a second position different from the first position, and performance execution means capable of executing a performance. , the translucent member (e.g., cover member 302) has a decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern 331) formed to straddle the electronic component (e.g., LED board 303) and the specific member (e.g., base member 301) (see FIG. 10-12), the performance execution means is capable of executing a pseudo-movable body display performance that moves and displays the pseudo-movable body display from the first display position to the second display position, and a movable body performance that moves the movable body from the first position to the second position, and the gaming machine is more likely to be controlled to the advantageous state when the performance execution means executes the movable body performance and the pseudo-movable body display performance in a predetermined period of time than when the performance execution means executes the pseudo-movable body display performance without executing the movable body performance in the predetermined period of time.

With this configuration, even if electronic components are placed so that they are visible to the player, the decorative pattern makes the electronic components less noticeable, allowing for greater freedom in design. It is also possible to draw the player's attention to the execution of the moving body presentation and the pseudo moving body display presentation.

In other words, it is possible to create a gaming machine that looks good while increasing the freedom of design, and since players will pay attention to the presentation when the simulated moving body display presentation is executed in the hope that the moving body presentation will also be executed, the entertainment value of the presentation can be improved. In other words, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that looks good when installed in an amusement center and is likely to attract the interest of players.

Furthermore, as an example of a form of a gaming machine that can increase the degree of freedom of design and can draw the player's attention to the execution of a movable body presentation and a pseudo movable body display presentation, there is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and that includes a display means capable of moving and displaying a pseudo movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position, a movable body that can be moved from the first position to a second position different from the first position, and a presentation execution means capable of executing a presentation, the presentation execution means being capable of executing a pseudo movable body display presentation that moves and displays the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position, and a movable body presentation that moves the movable body from the first position to the second position, and a gaming machine that is more likely to be controlled to the advantageous state when the presentation execution means executes the movable body presentation and the pseudo movable body display presentation during a predetermined period than when the presentation execution means executes the pseudo movable body display presentation during the predetermined period without executing the movable body presentation. Below, an example of the form example of these gaming machines will be described as another form example.

(Feature 241SG form)
The gaming machine of form A1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game,
A display means capable of moving and displaying the pseudo-movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 can move and display the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from a first initial display position to a first performance display position on the image display device 5);
A movable body that can be moved from a first position to a second position different from the first position (for example, a mounted movable body 32 that can be moved from an origin position to a performance position);
Equipped with
The direction in which the pseudo-movable body display moves from the first display position to the second display position and the direction in which the movable body moves from the first position to the second position are a common direction (for example, the direction in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first performance display position and the direction in which the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the performance position are a common downward direction).
The movement display of the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position is faster than the movement of the movable body from the first position to the second position (for example, the movement amount L2 per unit time TL2 of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is greater than the movement amount L1A per unit time TL2 of the mounted movable body 32. See FIG. 17-37).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the pseudo movable body display can produce an impressive effect that is faster than the movement of the movable body, giving the player a sense of surprise.

The gaming machine of form A2 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game,
A display means capable of displaying a pseudo-movable body display (for example, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 can display the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 on the image display device 5) is provided,
The pseudo movable body display is a display simulating a movable body (e.g., a first non-mounted movable body M100) that undergoes a recoil action of a predetermined amount of movement when moved from a first position (e.g., a first origin position) to a second position (e.g., a first performance position) different from the first position,
The display means is capable of moving and displaying the pseudo-movable body display from a first display position corresponding to the first position to a second display position corresponding to the second position (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 is capable of vertically moving and displaying the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 on the image display device 5 between a first initial display position corresponding to the first origin position and a first performance display position corresponding to the first performance position),
The pseudo-movable body display performs a recoil movement display of a specific amount of movement when it is moved from the first display position to the second display position (for example, a portion that performs a recoil movement display (bouncing display) of a specific amount of movement when the performance control CPU 120 moves the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position and stops and displays it at the first performance display position).
The specific movement amount is greater than the predetermined movement amount (for example, the movement amount L12 of the first recoil movement display performed when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is greater than the movement amount L13 of the first recoil movement display performed when the first non-mounted movable body M100 is moved from the first origin position to the first performance position. See Figure 17-38).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the pseudo-movable body display makes it possible to simulate an effect similar to that of a movable body without actually mounting a movable body, and by displaying in an exaggerated manner the recoil action that occurs when the movable body moves to the second position, it is possible to provide an effect that will leave a lasting impression on the player.

The gaming machine of form A3 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means capable of moving and displaying the pseudo-movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 can move and display the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from a first initial display position to a first performance display position on the image display device 5);
A movable body that can be moved from a first position to a second position different from the first position (for example, a mounted movable body 32 that can be moved from an origin position to a performance position);
A performance execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance;
Equipped with
The performance execution means includes:
A pseudo-movable body display performance in which the pseudo-movable body display is moved and displayed from the first display position to the second display position (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 can move and display the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position);
A movable body performance that moves the movable body from the first position to the second position (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 can move the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the performance position);
It is possible to execute
When the performance execution means executes the movable body performance and the pseudo-movable body display performance during a predetermined period, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the performance execution means executes the pseudo-movable body display performance without executing the movable body performance during the predetermined period (for example, during a variable display period of a pattern based on a fluctuation pattern of a super reach β or a super reach γ, when a development performance A using the mounted movable body 32 and a development performance B using the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 are executed, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state (jackpot expectation) is higher than when the development performance B is executed without executing the development performance A. See FIG. 17-11).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the execution of the movable body effect and the pseudo movable body display effect.

The gaming machine of form A4 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means capable of moving and displaying the pseudo-movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 can move and display the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 on the image display device 5 from a first specific initial display position to a first specific performance display position);
A performance execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance;
Equipped with
The performance execution means includes:
A special suggestion effect (for example, a notice effect A that predicts the possibility (expectation) that the variable display result will be a jackpot) that suggests that the pseudo-movable body display will be controlled to the advantageous state by being displayed;
A notification effect that notifies the player of advantageous content (for example, a development effect B that notifies the player of the development of a strong super reach effect);
A predetermined presentation (for example, a development suggestion presentation suggesting the possibility that a development presentation B will be executed) that is executed before the notification presentation and suggests that the notification presentation will be executed by displaying a notification-related image (for example, a character image Z310) related to the notification presentation;
It is possible to execute
In the predetermined performance, the pseudo movable body display is displayed in one of a plurality of modes (for example, patterns PS-1 to PS1-4) having different expectations for the execution of the notification performance,
The display means is
In the special suggestion performance, the pseudo movable body display is moved from the first display position to the second display position, then moved from the second display position to the first display position, and then hidden (see Figures 17-25 (C) to (F)),
In the predetermined performance, the pseudo movable body display is displayed at the second display position, and then is hidden without being moved from the second display position to the first display position (see Figs. 17-26(A) to (J), Fig. 17-27(A)),
Before executing the notification performance, when the pseudo-movable body display displayed at the second display position is hidden, the notification-related image (e.g., character image Z310) can be displayed in a display area including the second display position (see Figures 17-26 (F) to (J), Figure 17-27 (A)),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the special suggestion performance, the pseudo-movable body display is displayed moving in the same way as a movable body as a structure, so that the player can focus on whether or not it will be controlled to an advantageous state without feeling any discomfort, while in the specified performance, the display of the notification-related image is prioritized over the pseudo-movable body display moving in the same way as a movable body, and the image is hidden without returning from the second display position to the first display position, so that the player can focus on the suggestion that the notification performance will be executed.

The gaming machine of form A5 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a display means capable of moving and displaying the pseudo-movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 can move and display the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from a first initial display position to the first performance display position, or a portion in which the image display device 5 can move and display the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from a first specific initial display position to a first specific performance display position);
A performance execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance;
Equipped with
The performance execution means includes:
A special effect that notifies the player that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a deciding effect that notifies the player whether the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state);
A specific effect (for example, a development effect B that develops into a strong super reach effect and notifies the player that a deciding effect will be executed) that suggests that the special effect will be executed before the special effect is executed;
It is possible to execute
The display means includes:
The pseudo movable body display can be moved and displayed in the specific performance and the special performance,
When the pseudo-movable body display is moved and displayed in the specific performance, the pseudo-movable body display is moved and displayed from the first display position to the second display position, and then is hidden without being moved and displayed from the second display position to the first display position, and a suggestive image suggesting the execution of the special performance (for example, a state at the start of display of the reach title image Z51) can be displayed in a display area including the second display position (see Figures 17-27 (B) (D) to (F)),
When the pseudo-movable object display is moved and displayed in the special performance, the pseudo-movable object display is moved and displayed from the first display position to the second display position, and then moved and displayed from the second display position to the first display position, and then hidden (see Figures 17-30 (A) to (F)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, before a special effect is executed, the pseudo-movable body display is hidden without returning from the second display position to the first display position, prioritizing the display of the suggestive image over moving in the same way as a movable body as a structure, so that the player can be drawn to the suggestion that a special effect will be executed, while during the special effect, the pseudo-movable body display is moved in the same way as a movable body, so that the player can be drawn to the notification of content that is advantageous to the player without feeling uncomfortable.

The gaming machine of form A6 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game,
A display means capable of moving and displaying the pseudo-movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 can move and display the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from a first initial display position to the first performance display position),
The display means includes:
The pseudo movable body display is moved from the first display position to an intermediate display position (e.g., a first intermediate display position) and then to the second display position;
The pseudo movable body display is moved from the first display position to the second display position in the order of the first display position, the intermediate display position, and the second display position for each display frame (see FIGS. 17-40(A) to 17-40(C));
In a display area including the first display position, the intermediate display position, and the second display position, a specific image that emphasizes the movement display of the pseudo-movable body display (for example, an effect image Z71 in which glass is cracked and an image Z71A showing a plurality of glass fragments is scattered) can be displayed (see FIG. 17-31 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the pseudo-movable object display can be displayed moving quickly without reducing visibility, and the moving display can be emphasized with a specific image, making a good impression on the player.

The gaming machine of form A7 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
The display means is capable of displaying pseudo-movable body displays including a first pseudo-movable body display and a second pseudo-movable body display different from the first pseudo-movable body display (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 can move and display the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from a first initial display position to a first performance display position, and a portion in which the image display device 5 can move and display the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from a first specific initial display position to a first specific performance display position),
The first pseudo movable body display can be moved from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (see FIG. 17-16(B) );
The second pseudo movable body display can be moved and displayed from a first predetermined display position to a second predetermined display position different from the first predetermined display position (see FIG. 17-16(C) );
The display means includes:
The first pseudo movable body display is moved from the first display position to an intermediate display position (e.g., a first intermediate display position) and then to the second display position (see FIGS. 17-40(A) to 17-40(C));
The first pseudo movable body display is moved from the first display position to the second display position in the order of the first display position, the intermediate display position, and the second display position for each display frame (see FIGS. 17-40(A) to 17-40(C));
The speed of the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display from the first display position to the second display position and the movement display of the second pseudo-movable body display from the first predetermined display position to the second predetermined display position are different (for example, the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is faster than the movement display of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position. See FIG. 17-40).
The proportion of the first pseudo movable body display being controlled to the advantageous state is different when the first pseudo movable body display is moved from the first display position to the second display position and when the second pseudo movable body display is moved from the first predetermined display position to the second predetermined display position (for example, in the preview performance B, when the pattern PBY-3 in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position or the pattern PBY-4 in which the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate performance display position or the pattern PBY-2 in which the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate performance display position is executed, the proportion of the second pseudo movable body display being controlled to the jackpot game state (the jackpot expectation degree) is different. See FIG. 17-10 and FIG. 17-20 (B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the first pseudo-movable body display or the second pseudo-movable body display is displayed moving, and it is also possible for the player to recognize that the first pseudo-movable body display and the second pseudo-movable body display have different rates of being controlled to an advantageous state by the difference in the speed of their moving display.

The gaming machine of aspect A8 is the gaming machine of any one of aspects A1 to A7,
A movable body (e.g., a first non-mounted movable body M100) that can move from a first position (e.g., a first origin position) to a second position (e.g., a first performance position) different from the first position,
When the movable body is moved from the first position to the second position, a certain amount of recoil motion is performed (see FIG. 17-36 ).
When the pseudo movable body display is moved from the first display position to the second display position, a reaction movement display of a specific amount of movement is performed (see FIG. 17-36 ).
The specific movement amount is greater than the constant movement amount (for example, the movement amount L12 of the first recoil movement display performed when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is greater than the movement amount L13 of the first recoil movement display performed when the first non-mounted movable body M100 is moved from the first origin position to the first performance position. See Figure 17-38).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the pseudo-movable body display makes it possible to simulate an effect similar to that of a movable body without actually mounting a movable body, and by displaying in an exaggerated manner the recoil action that occurs when the movable body moves to the second position, it is possible to provide an effect that will leave a lasting impression on the player.

The gaming machine of aspect A9 is the gaming machine of any one of aspects A1 to A8,
A movable body (e.g., a mounted movable body 32) that can move from a first position (e.g., an origin position) to a second position (e.g., a performance position) different from the first position,
A distance from the first display position to the second display position (e.g., a moving display distance L2) is longer than a distance from the first position to the second position (e.g., a moving distance L1) (see FIG. 17-16 );
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the pseudo movable body display moves faster and travels a longer distance than the movable body, providing a performance that leaves a lasting impression on the player.

The gaming machine of aspect A10 is the gaming machine of any one of aspects A1 to A9,
The pseudo-movable body display includes a performance display unit (e.g., performance display unit Z100A, Z200A) and a mechanism display unit (e.g., mechanism display unit Z100B, Z200B),
In the movement display of the pseudo-movable body display, the mechanism display unit reaches the second display position before the performance display unit (see FIG. 17-36 (B1) (B2)),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the pseudo movable body display can be displayed moving in a more realistic manner.

The gaming machine of aspect A11 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1 to A10,
The movement display of the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position is faster than the movement display from the second display position to the first display position (for example, the movement amount L2 per unit time TL2 of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is greater than the movement amount L1A per unit time TL2 of the mounted movable body 32. See FIG. 17-37).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the pseudo movable body display can be displayed moving in a more realistic manner.

The gaming machine of aspect A12 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1 to A11,
A period during which the movable body moves between the first position and the second position includes a first period during which the speed increases and a second period during which the speed decreases (see FIG. 17-39(A) );
The moving display period of the pseudo movable object display does not include the first period and the second period (see FIG. 17-39(B) ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the movement of the pseudo movable body display can be displayed more smoothly than the movement of the movable body.

The gaming machine of aspect A13 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1 to A12,
The pseudo movable body display includes a light-emitting display unit (e.g., light-emitting display units Z108A, Z208A to Z208E),
The display means is capable of illuminating the light-emitting display unit when the pseudo-movable body display is moved and displayed to the second display position (the part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes the illumination of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the illumination of the light-emitting display unit Z108A at approximately the same cycle after the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed to the first performance position. See FIG. 17-31 (D)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the pseudo movable object display that has been moved to the second display position.

The gaming machine of aspect A14 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1 to A13,
The pseudo movable body display includes a light-emitting display unit (e.g., light-emitting display units Z108A, Z208A to Z208E),
The display means does not cause the light-emitting display unit to emit light when the pseudo movable body display is being moved (see FIG. 17-31 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by making the (incomplete) pseudo movable object display during the movement display less noticeable, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the presentation effect.

The gaming machine of aspect A15 is the gaming machine according to aspect A13 or A14,
The movable body includes a light-emitting unit capable of emitting light (e.g., light-emitting display units Z108A, Z208A to Z208E),
When the display means moves and displays the pseudo-movable body display to the second display position, the display means performs the illumination display of the light-emitting display unit in a manner common to the illumination of the light-emitting unit (the part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes the illumination of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the illumination display of the light-emitting display unit Z108A at approximately the same cycle after moving and displaying the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 to the first performance position. See FIG. 17-31 (D)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the pseudo movable body display can be displayed moving in a more realistic manner.

The gaming machine of aspect A16 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1 to A17,
The display means is capable of moving and displaying the pseudo-movable body display from a first special display position to a second special display position different from the first special display position (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 can move and display the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from a second specific initial display position to a second intermediate performance display position or a second specific performance display position),
The direction in which the pseudo-movable body display moves from the first display position to the second display position is different from the direction in which the pseudo-movable body display moves from the first special display position to the second special display position (for example, the downward direction in which the performance control CPU 120 moves and displays the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position in the preview performance A is different from the rightward direction in which the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 moves and displays the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from the second specific initial display position to the second specific performance display position in the preview performance B. See FIG. 17-33).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a single pseudo movable object display can be displayed moving from a number of display positions, providing the player with a surprising effect that would be difficult to achieve with a movable object.

The gaming machine of aspect A17 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1 to A16,
The display means is capable of moving and displaying the pseudo movable body display in a direction different from the direction in which the pseudo movable body display is moved and displayed from the first display position to the second display position after the pseudo movable body display is moved and displayed from the first display position to the second display position (see FIG. 17-43 ).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide the player with a surprising effect that would be difficult to achieve with a movable object.

Figure 11 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11, housed in a board case 201, is mounted on the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting change switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting change switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing settings such as the probability of winning a jackpot and the payout rate in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting change switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is disposed in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is disposed to the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured, for example, using a seven-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are disposed directly in front of the main board 11 when the back surface of the game board 2 is viewed with the game machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive win ratio, winning ratio, and base. The consecutive win ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacker) to the total number of winning balls. The winning ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the second start winning port (electric chute) and the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacker) to the total number of winning balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of winning balls to the number of game balls shot out. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display the setting values to be changed or confirmed.

When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The gaming machine frame 3 is provided with a rotatable glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and is configured so that the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the gaming area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a, which is formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201, including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52, from the rear side. The security cover 50A is a roughly L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

(Board configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like, as shown in Fig. 12. In addition, various boards, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board, are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also equipped. The various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on the electronic circuit board.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating the power switch 91 (turning it ON), power from an AC power source such as an external power source such as a commercial power supply, such as 100V AC, can be supplied from the power supply board 17 to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 is equipped with, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), and a power supply circuit for converting a specified DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, 12V DC or 5V DC).

The main board 11 is the main control board, and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of special games (including management of reserved games), execution of regular games (including management of reserved games), jackpot game status, game status, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes the programs stored in the ROM 101 to perform processes that control the progress of the game (processes that realize the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the programs stored in the ROM 101 may be deployed to the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (gaming random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The gaming random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, the normal pattern display device 20, the first hold display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, the normal hold display device 25C, etc., solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23) and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The switch circuit 110 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, an IC with a built-in watchdog timer, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal is turned off when the specified power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a specified value, and is turned on when the period during which the specified power supply voltage is below the specified value continues for longer than the power-off reference time. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, pressing the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 and solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

The main board 11 is connected to a display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90. The door open sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3, including the glass door frame 3a.

As part of controlling the progress of the game, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 according to the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. The presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various determination results in the main board 11 (for example, the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable pattern used when executing the special game (described in detail later)), the game status (for example, the start or end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot opening, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the mounted movable body 32, notifying errors, and notifying of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes the programs stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The presentation control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the performance based on instructions to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display unit 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display unit 5 based on an instruction to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal designating the on/off state of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal to operate the mounted movable body 32 to the mounted movable body 32 or to a drive circuit that drives the mounted movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the turning on and off of the lamp.

The performance control CPU 120 may be configured to execute control of audio output, turning on/off the lamp (such as supplying a sound designation signal or a lamp signal), and controlling the mounted movable body 32 (such as supplying a signal to operate the mounted movable body 32).

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for performance) used to execute various performances. The random numbers for performance may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

The boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main Operations of Main Board 11)
First, a description will be given of the main operations of the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and a game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. Fig. 13 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 13, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S901). Then, necessary initial settings are performed (step S902). The initial settings include setting a stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and settings to make the RAM 102 accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery condition is satisfied (step S903). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is in the OFF state, backup data is present, and the backup RAM is normal. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, if the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, for example, an ON clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an ON clear signal is input, it is determined in step S903 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. The backup data only needs to be capable of being stored in the RAM 102, which serves as the backup RAM for game control. In step S903, it is determined whether the recovery condition can be satisfied by checking or inspecting the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors.

If the recovery condition is met (step S903; Yes), recovery processing (step S904) is executed, followed by setting confirmation processing (step S905). The recovery processing in step S904 sets a working area based on the contents stored in RAM 102. By setting the working area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state when the power supply was stopped is restored, and if, for example, a special symbol was changing, it is sufficient if the change of the special symbol can be resumed from the state before the stoppage.

If the recovery condition is not met (step S903; No), an initialization process (step S906) is executed, and then a setting change process (step S907) is executed. The initialization process in step S906 includes a clearing process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102, and the execution of the clearing process sets initial values in the working area.

In the setting confirmation process of step S905, it is determined whether a predetermined setting confirmation condition is met. The setting confirmation condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting confirmation process of step S905 is executed when the recovery condition is met in step S903, including the clear signal being in the OFF state. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be met when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the clear signal being in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

If the setting confirmation condition is met in the setting confirmation process of step S905, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting confirmation state in which the setting values set therein can be confirmed, and a setting confirmation start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by viewing them on the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is to end, a setting confirmation end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. In the game stop state, the launch of game balls by operating the ball-hitting handle, the detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20 may be controlled to stop displaying a losing symbol or the like, or to display a symbol corresponding to a game stop state other than a losing symbol. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated with it may also end.

In the setting change process of step S907, it is determined whether a predetermined setting change condition is met. The setting change condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state, and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting change condition may also include the clear signal being in the ON state.

If the setting change condition is met in the setting change process of step S907, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting change state in which the setting value set therein can be changed, and a setting change start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is updated and displayed sequentially each time the setting change switch 52 is operated. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an attendant at the game center or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is turned off. When the setting change state is to be ended, a setting change end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be in a play stop state, just as when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the associated play stop state may also end.

When the performance control board 12 receives a setting check start command or a setting change start command, control may be performed to notify the user that a setting check or change is in progress. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light-emitting component such as the game effect lamp 9 may be illuminated in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S906 and the setting change process of step S907 are executed, making it possible to control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S904 and the setting confirmation process of step S905 are executed, making it possible to control to the setting confirmation state. When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S906 is executed but the setting change state is not controlled, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S904 is executed but the setting confirmation state is not controlled.

After executing the setting confirmation process or setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S908). Then, the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S909), and the interrupt is permitted (step S9010). After that, a loop process is entered. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can execute timer interrupt process periodically.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured so that the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change according to the setting value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change by using a display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the setting value. For example, the setting value is made up of six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest winning probability of a jackpot, and the winning probability of a jackpot decreasing as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In this example, when the setting value is set to 6, the player has the highest advantage, and the advantage decreases stepwise as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. If the winning probability of a jackpot changes according to the setting value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the setting value. The winning probability of a jackpot is constant regardless of the setting value, while the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change according to the setting value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set one of a number of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by sending a setting value designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

Figure 14 shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table. Figure 14 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and Figure 14 (B) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the second special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol. The display result judgment table is a collection of data stored in ROM 101. In the display result judgment table, a winning judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 according to a set value is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is updated randomly within the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result judgment table, a display result judgment table common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be used.

As shown in FIG. 14(A), when the variable special chart is the first special chart, if the setting value is 1 and the game state is normal or time-saving, the value can be a number in the range of 0 to 65535, and of the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", 65317 to 65535 are assigned to "miss with time-saving", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Also, when the setting value is 1 and the game state is a probability variable state, of the hit determination values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Note that when the setting value in the first special chart is 2 to 6 and the game state is normal or time-saving, it is as shown in FIG. 14(A).

As shown in FIG. 14(B), when the variable special chart is the second special chart, if the setting value is 1 and the game state is normal or time-saving, the value can be a number in the range of 0 to 65535, and of the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", 65317 to 65425 are assigned to "miss with time-saving", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Also, when the setting value is 1 and the game state is a probability variable state, of the hit determination values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Note that when the setting value in the second special chart is 2 to 6 and the game state is normal or time-saving, it is as shown in FIG. 14(B).

Now, looking at the numerical range of hit determination values assigned to "jackpot" and "miss with time-saving" in each display result determination table, as shown in FIG. 15, in the display result determination table for the first special chart when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit determination values from 1020 to 1237 is set as a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set (1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot"), while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value is set from 1238 as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5, and the range of 1238 to 1346 for setting value 6.

In other words, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is normal or time-saving, when the setting value is 1, among the hit judgment values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while when the setting value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1238 as the setting value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a jackpot is increased by increasing the non-common numerical range that is adjacent to the common numerical range as the set value increases, with 1020 being the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value).

Furthermore, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range of 65317 to 65535 among the hit judgment values is set as the common numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value for judging a time-saving miss regardless of the setting value. If we focus on the case where the setting value is 6, as described above, the hit judgment value is set to 1020 to 1346 as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the time-saving miss judgment value is set to the range of 65317 to 65535 with 65317 as the reference value for the time-saving miss (time-saving miss reference value) in a numerical range different from the range of the jackpot judgment value of the setting value 6 (1020 to 1346), so that the numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value that changes according to each setting value.

In addition, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is in a special probability state, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1346 is set as a common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set (1020 to 1346 is assigned to "jackpot"), while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value is set from 1347 as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1347 to 1383 for setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for setting value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for setting value 4, the range of 1347 to 1556 for setting value 5, and the range of 1347 to 1674 for setting value 6.

In other words, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is in the high probability state, when the setting value is 1, among the hit judgment values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to "jackpot", while when the setting value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the setting value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a jackpot is increased by increasing the non-common numerical range that is adjacent to the common numerical range as the set value increases, with 1020 being the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value).

In the display result judgment table for the second special chart when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1237 is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set (1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot"), while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value is set from 1238 as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5, and the range of 1238 to 1346 for setting value 6.

In other words, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, in the second special chart display result judgment table when the game state is normal or time-saving, when the set value is 1, among the hit judgment values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while when the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a jackpot is increased by increasing the non-common numerical range that is adjacent to the common numerical range as the set value increases, with 1020 being the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value).

Furthermore, in the display result judgment table for the second special chart when the game state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range of 65317 to 65425 among the hit judgment values is set as the common numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value for judging a time-saving miss regardless of the setting value. If we focus on the case where the setting value is 6, as described above, the hit judgment value is set to 1020 to 1346 as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the time-saving miss judgment value is set to the range of 65317 to 65425 with 65317 as the reference value for the time-saving miss (time-saving miss reference value) in a numerical range different from the range of the jackpot judgment value of the setting value 6 (1020 to 1346), so that the numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value that changes according to each setting value.

In the second special symbol display result determination table when the game state is in a special probability state, the hit determination value range of 1020 to 1346 is set as a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. The other features of the second special symbol display result determination table are the same as those of the first special symbol display result determination table.

As described above, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the range of 65317 to 65535 is set as the common numerical range for a miss with time-saving, regardless of the setting value, when the gaming state is normal and when the time-saving state, and when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the range of 65317 to 65425 is set as the common numerical range for a miss with time-saving, regardless of the setting value, when the gaming state is normal and when the time-saving state. In other words, when the gaming state is normal and when the time-saving state, the rate at which the variable display result is a miss with time-saving is the same for all setting values, so it is possible to prevent the setting value from making the game excessively gambling-oriented. Furthermore, for the time-saving miss, which is assigned a common judgment value for each setting value, the setting is set to a continuous numerical range from 65317, which is the time-saving miss reference value, for all setting values, so that the processing load on the CPU 103 for determining whether the variable display result is a time-saving miss can be reduced.

In addition, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, six setting values can be set, from 1 to 6, but the setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. Also, the smaller the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player.

The jackpot type may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The fluctuation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the fluctuation pattern judgment table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may differ depending on the set value, so that the setting value may be suggested by the frequency at which normal reaches and super reaches are executed. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may be common regardless of the set value. In addition, any setting suggestion performance may be possible at different rates depending on the set value.

Figure 16 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of Figure 6 as the performance control process processing. In the performance control process processing shown in Figure 16, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a look-ahead preview setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead preview setting process, for example, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing the look-ahead preview performance are made based on the performance control command at the time of the start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, processing is executed to display the hold display based on the number of hold memories identified from the performance control command.

After executing the processing of step S161, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processing of steps S170 to S90175 as described below, depending on the value of a performance process flag provided in, for example, RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the change pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the mounted movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special winning wait process of step S173 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "3". In this special winning wait process, the presentation control CPU 120 judges whether or not a presentation control command designating the start of a jackpot game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a presentation control command designating the start of a jackpot game state is received, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "4". Also, when a command designating the start of a jackpot game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special winning game was a "miss", and the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value of "0". When the value of the presentation process flag is updated, the special winning wait process is terminated.

The jackpot performance process of step S90174 is executed when the performance process flag value is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process ends.

The ending presentation process of step S90175 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "7". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Modification of the basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a prize is won, but it may also be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a prize is won.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol showing "- ") may be displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be achieved by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the pattern. Furthermore, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the display result may not include the symbol showing "- ").

In the above basic explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to slot machines (e.g., slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.)) that can play a game in which medals are inserted and a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

The programs and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to being distributed or provided to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, but may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device of the computer device or the like. Furthermore, the programs and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communications processing unit.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory, or by directly executing the game using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions of comparison of various percentages such as the execution percentage of effects (such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) may include one being a "0%" percentage. For example, this also includes one being a "0%" percentage and the other being a "100%" percentage or a percentage less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding characteristic portion 241SG)
Next, the pachinko gaming machine 1 as the characteristic part 241SG in this embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 17-1 to 17-40. In the following, the components similar to those of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description, or components having similar functions but different shapes or positions, etc., will be denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions will be omitted, and the differences from the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description will be mainly described.

As shown in FIG. 17-1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 as the characteristic part 241SG has a mounted movable body 32 that is slightly larger than the mounted movable body 32 shown in FIG. 1.

As shown in FIG. 17-2, a vibration motor 61 built into the stick controller 31A is connected to the performance control board 12, and the performance control CPU 120 is capable of vibrating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. In addition, a button LED 62 built into the push button 31B is connected to the lamp control board 14, and the performance control CPU 120 is capable of turning the button LED 62 on and off.

Figure 17-3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a performance control command used in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The performance control command is, for example, two bytes in length, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (type of command). The first bit of the MODE data (bit 7) is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in Figure 17-3 (A) is only an example, and other command formats may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 17-3(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is a variable pattern designation command that specifies the variable pattern (variable time (variable display time)) of the decorative symbols (also called performance symbols) that are variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is set arbitrarily according to the contents of the instruction by the performance control command. In addition, in the variable pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the specified variable pattern, etc.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result specification command, a presentation control command that specifies a variable display result such as a special pattern or a decorative pattern. In the variable display result specification command, as shown in FIG. 17-3 (B), for example, different EXT data is set depending on the result of the determination (predetermination result) of whether the variable display result (also called the variable display result) is a "miss", a "jackpot", or a "minor jackpot", and the result of the determination of which of several types of jackpot type should be selected when the variable display result is a "jackpot".

For example, as shown in FIG. 17-3(B), in the variable display result designation command, command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "miss". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot A". Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot B". Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot C". Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command that notifies the predetermined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "non-variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result specification command that notifies the predetermined result that the variable display result is "small jackpot".

Command 8F00H is a pattern determination command that specifies the stop (determination) of the change in the decorative patterns in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5. Command 95XXH is a game state designation command that specifies the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which neither time-saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed but probability variable control is not performed (low probability high base state, time-saving state). In addition, command 9502H is a third game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which high probability bonus control is performed but time-saving control is not performed (high probability low base state, high probability bonus state without time-saving), and command 9503H is a fourth game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control and high probability bonus control are both performed (high probability high base state, high probability bonus state with time-saving).

Command 9000 (H) is a presentation control command (initialization command: power-on command) that is sent when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started. Command 9200 (H) is a presentation control command (power outage recovery command) that is sent when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is resumed after a temporary halt. When power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 100 sends a power outage recovery command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and sends an initialization command if not.

Command A0XXH is a start of jackpot command (also called a "fanfare command") that specifies the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot or small jackpot game. Command A1XXH is a large prize opening open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening is in an open state during a jackpot game. Command A2XXH is a large prize opening post-open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening has changed from an open state to a closed state during a jackpot game. Command A3XXH is a end of jackpot command that specifies the display of an effect image at the end of a jackpot game or small jackpot game.

In the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result specification command may be set, so that different EXT data is set according to the pre-determined result and the result of the big win type determination. Alternatively, in the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the big win type determination result and the EXT data set may be made different from the correspondence in the variable display result specification command. In the large prize opening notification command and the large prize opening after opening notification command, for example, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds (for example, "1" to "10") executed in the normal opening big win state and the high-speed opening big win state described below.

Command B100H is a first start port entry designation command that notifies the first start condition for executing a special symbol game using a first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (first start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A being detected by the first start port switch 22A. Command B200H is a second start port entry designation command that notifies the second start condition for executing a special symbol game using a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (second start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B being detected by the second start port switch 22B.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command that notifies the first reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. Command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command that notifies the second reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. The first reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the first start port entry designation command is transmitted based on, for example, the game ball passing (entering) the first start port and the first start condition being satisfied. The second reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the second start port entry designation command is transmitted based on, for example, the game ball passing (entering) the second start port and the second start condition being satisfied. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command may be sent in response to the start of execution of the special game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is met (when the pending memory number is reduced).

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total pending memory number may be sent. In other words, the total pending memory number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total pending memory number.

Command D100 is a customer waiting demo designation command for designating the execution of a customer waiting demo performance, and as described below, is a command sent by the demo display setting that is executed when neither the first reserved memory nor the second reserved memory exists in the normal processing of special symbols, and the customer waiting demo performance is executed when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the customer waiting demo designation command is sent.

The commands shown in FIG. 17-3(A) are merely examples, and some of these commands may not be included, or different commands may be used instead of these commands, or different commands may be added to these commands. For example, a prize ball number notification command may be provided to enable the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game ball's entry into each winning port to be specified, a gate passage notification command to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, and a notification command to notify the remaining number of times that the special bonus control or time-saving control will be executed.

Figure 17-4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in Figure 17-4, on the main board 11 side, the numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the random number value MR4 for determining the normal chart display result are controlled so as to be countable. Note that random number values other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called gaming random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data indicating some or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 may count numerical data indicating some of the random number values MR1 to MR4 by updating various numerical data by software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting section set in the RAM 102, as described below.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control the game state to a jackpot by treating the variable display result of a special symbol or the like in a special symbol game as a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536", for example. The random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is a random number value used to determine the jackpot type as either "Probable jackpot A", "Probable jackpot B", "Probable jackpot C", or "Non-probable jackpot" when the variable display result is a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special patterns and decorative patterns to one of several types prepared in advance, and can take a value in the range of "1" to "997", for example.

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display device 20 is a "normal symbol hit" or a "normal symbol miss", and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

Figure 17-5 (A) shows an example of the configuration of the special chart display result judgment table 1 stored in ROM 101. In this embodiment, a common special chart display result judgment table is used for the first special chart and the second special chart as the special chart display result judgment table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and separate special chart display result judgment tables may be used for the first special chart and the second special chart.

The special pattern display result determination table 1 is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" before a determined special pattern that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in a special pattern game using a first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A or a special pattern game using a second special pattern by the second special pattern display device 4B, based on a random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result.

In the special chart display result judgment table 1 in this embodiment, a numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" or "miss" depending on whether the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state).

In the special chart display result judgment table 1, the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is judgment data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special chart display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot". In the special chart display result judgment table 1 in this embodiment, when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values are assigned to the special chart display result of a "jackpot" than when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, in the probability variable state (high probability state) in which the probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state is higher (about 1/30 in this embodiment) than the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state) (about 1/300 in this embodiment). That is, in the special chart display result judgment table 1, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a probability variable state (high probability state), the judgment data is assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state so that the probability of deciding to control to a jackpot gaming state is higher than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state.

Also, FIG. 17-5(B) shows an example of the configuration of the special symbol display result judgment table 2 stored in the ROM 101. The special symbol display result judgment table 2 is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a small win game state as a "small win" based on the random number value MR1 for special symbol display result judgment before the determined special symbol that is the variable display result is derived and displayed in the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. In the special symbol display result judgment table 2 in this embodiment, regardless of whether the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state), a number (judgment value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for special symbol display result judgment is assigned to the special symbol display result of "small win".

In the special chart display result judgment table 2, the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is judgment data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special chart display result to a small win game state as a "small win". In the special chart display result judgment table 2 in this embodiment, the number of judgment values assigned to a "small win" differs between the first special chart special chart game and the second special chart game. Specifically, in the first special chart special chart game, a judgment value is assigned to a "small win", but in the second special chart special chart game, no judgment value is assigned to a "small win". Therefore, as described below, the variable display of the second special chart is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special chart, and in a high base state in which the time-saving control is executed, a win occurs in the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, and the variable display of the second special chart is executed frequently, so that "small wins" hardly occur. In a high base state in which game balls are likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the occurrence of small wins in which many game balls cannot be obtained can be avoided, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

Figure 17-6 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table stored in ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in this embodiment is a table that is referenced to determine the jackpot type as one of multiple types based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. In the jackpot type determination table, a number (determination value) that is compared with the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination is assigned to multiple types of jackpot types such as "non-variable jackpot", "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", and "variable jackpot C" depending on whether the special symbol that is variably displayed (variably displayed) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B).

Now, the types of jackpots in this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 17-6 (B). In this embodiment, the types of jackpots are set to "Probable variable jackpot A" and "Probable variable jackpot B", in which high probability control and time-saving control are executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state, and the game transitions to a high probability, high base state; "Probable variable jackpot C", in which high probability control is executed but time-saving control is not executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state, and the game transitions to a high probability, low base state; and "Non-probable variable jackpot", in which only time-saving control is executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state, and the game transitions to a low probability, high base state.

The jackpot game state by "probable jackpot A" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). On the other hand, the jackpot game state by "probable jackpot B" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 5 times (so-called 5 rounds). Also, the jackpot game state by "non-probable jackpot" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). Therefore, "probable jackpot A" may be called a 10-round (10R) probable jackpot, and "probable jackpot B" may be called a 5-round (5R) probable jackpot. Furthermore, in the jackpot game with "Probable jackpot C", the round that changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player is repeated twice (so-called two rounds), and the opening period of the special variable winning ball device 7 in each round is shorter (for example, 0.1 seconds) than in other jackpot games, making it a high-speed opening jackpot. Note that, during jackpot games of any type, no probable jackpot control or time-saving control is executed.

Although not specifically shown, the small win game state in this embodiment changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state, which is advantageous to the player, twice, and the opening time is the same as the opening period of the special big win C (0.1 seconds in this embodiment). After the small win game ends, the game state immediately before the small win game is carried over.

In other words, in this embodiment, when it is decided to have a "high probability jackpot C" or a "small jackpot", the variable display is executed in the same variable pattern (PC1-1 shown in FIG. 17-7), and the chance eye is displayed as a variable display result. Furthermore, since the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 is the same, it is not possible to distinguish from these variable displays and the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 whether it is a "high probability jackpot C" in which high probability control is executed, or a "small jackpot" in which the previous game state continues without high probability control. Therefore, after the end of the high probability jackpot C jackpot game or small jackpot game, it is possible to have the player continue playing while expecting that high probability control is being executed.

The high probability control and time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state of the variable probability jackpot A or the variable probability jackpot B will continue to be executed until another jackpot occurs after the end of the jackpot game state. Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is the variable probability jackpot A or the variable probability jackpot B, the high probability control and time-saving control will be executed again after the end of the jackpot game state, resulting in a so-called consecutive jackpot state in which the jackpot game state occurs continuously without going through the normal state.

On the other hand, the time-saving control that is executed after the end of the jackpot game state due to a "non-variable jackpot" ends when a specified number of special game games (100 times in this embodiment) are played, or when the jackpot game state is reached before the specified number of special game games are played.

In the example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 17-6(A), the allocation of determination values to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot A", "Probable variable jackpot B", "Probable variable jackpot C", and "Non-probable variable jackpot" differs depending on whether the variably displayed special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart. In other words, when the variably displayed special chart is the first special chart, a predetermined range of determination values (values in the range of "81" to "100") are assigned to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot B" and "Probable variable jackpot C" with fewer rounds, whereas when the variably displayed special chart is the second special chart, no determination value is assigned to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot B" and "Probable variable jackpot C". With this setting, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C" with fewer rounds can be made different between the case where the first start condition for starting a special game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied and the case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of the multiple types based on the second start condition for starting a special game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B being satisfied. In particular, in a special game using the second special symbol, the jackpot type is not determined to be "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C" and controlled to a normal opening jackpot state or a high-speed opening jackpot state with fewer rounds, so that, for example, in a game state where game balls are likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B due to high opening control accompanying time reduction control, frequent occurrence of a jackpot state with fewer winning balls can be avoided, preventing a decline in game interest.

In the example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 17-6(A), the allocation of the determination value for the "non-probability variable" jackpot type is the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart game, so the probability of a non-probability variable jackpot and the probability of a probability variable jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart game.

As described above, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot B" and "Probable Variable Jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, and accordingly, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" which has a larger number of rounds, it is set up so that it is easier to determine in the second special chart game than in the first special chart game.

In addition, in the case of the special chart game of the second special chart, a predetermined range of judgment values different from that in the case of the special chart game of the first special chart may be assigned to the jackpot type of "Probable jackpot B" or "Probable jackpot C". For example, in the case of the special chart game of the second special chart, a smaller judgment value than that in the case of the special chart game of the first special chart may be assigned to the jackpot type of "Probable jackpot B" or "Probable jackpot C" compared to the case of the special chart game of the first special chart. Alternatively, regardless of whether it is the special chart game of the first special chart or the second special chart, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data.

Figure 17-6 shows the variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for the cases where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" and a "reach", and for the cases where the variable display result is a "jackpot" or a "small hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also called a "non-reach miss variation pattern"), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also called a "reach miss variation pattern"). The non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the miss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is called a jackpot variation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach performance is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach performance is executed. In this embodiment, only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and multiple normal reach fluctuation patterns such as normal reach α, normal reach β, ... may be provided, just like the super reach fluctuation pattern, and in this case, the jackpot expectation (jackpot reliability) of each normal reach fluctuation pattern such as normal reach α, normal reach β, ... may be different. In addition, although super reach α and super reach β are provided as super reach fluctuation patterns, the present invention is not limited to this, and the super reach fluctuation pattern may be only one type, just like the normal reach fluctuation pattern.

The variation pattern in this embodiment also includes a special winning variation pattern (PC1-1) that corresponds to the case where the variable display result is a "small win" or the variable display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot type is a "high probability jackpot C."

As shown in FIG. 17-7, the special chart variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach performance of the normal reach in this embodiment is executed is set to be shorter than that of the super reach variation pattern. In addition, among the super reach variation patterns, the variable display period of the super reach β and super reach γ variation patterns is set to be longer (60 seconds) than the variable display period of the super reach α variation pattern (50 seconds).

In addition, in this embodiment, as described later, instead of first determining the type of the fluctuation pattern, such as the non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, etc., and then determining the fluctuation pattern to be executed from the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type, these fluctuation patterns are determined using only the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination without determining these types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, a random number value for fluctuation pattern type determination may be provided, and the type of fluctuation pattern may be determined first from these random number values for fluctuation pattern type determination, and then the fluctuation pattern to be executed may be determined from the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type.

Figure 17-8 is an explanatory diagram of the method for determining the variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the variation pattern determination table to be selected varies depending on the game state, the display result of the variable display to be executed, and the number of reserved memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 17-8(A), when the variable display result is a non-probability jackpot in the normal game state (low base state), the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PB1-1 (the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (the super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-3 (the super reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern) using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A. Also, when the variable display result is a probability jackpot A or a probability jackpot B in the normal game state (low base state), the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PB1-1 (the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (the super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-3 (the super reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern) using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B.

As shown in FIG. 17-8(A), the number of judgment values assigned to PB1-1, PB1-2, and PB1-3 differs between jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table A and jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table B. Specifically, in jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table A, 497 judgment values are assigned to PB1-1, 300 judgment values are assigned to PB1-2, and 200 judgment values are assigned to PB1-3. On the other hand, in jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table B, 250 judgment values are assigned to PB1-1, 347 judgment values are assigned to PB1-2, and 400 judgment values are assigned to PB1-3. In other words, in this embodiment, when the variable display result is a sure-win A or a sure-win B, the fluctuation pattern is more likely to be determined as a Super Reach fluctuation pattern than when the variable display result is a non-sure-win, and Super Reach β is more likely to be determined than Super Reach α, making it possible to draw the player's attention to the fluctuation pattern in the variable display.

In addition, if the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot C or a small jackpot, a special jackpot variation pattern determination table is selected, and the variation pattern is determined to be PC1-1 (special jackpot variation pattern) using the special jackpot variation pattern determination table. In other words, in this embodiment, the variable display is executed with the same variation pattern when the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot C or a small jackpot, making it difficult for the player to determine from the variation pattern whether the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot C or a small jackpot.

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is two or less, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is used to determine the fluctuation pattern from PA1-1 (non-reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-3 (super reach β miss fluctuation pattern).

Specifically, in the miss fluctuation pattern judgment table A, 600 judgment values are assigned to PA1-1, 300 judgment values are assigned to PA2-1, 90 judgment values are assigned to PA2-2, and 7 judgment values are assigned to PA2-3.

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is three, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PA1-2 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach miss), PA2-1 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach miss), PA2-2 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α miss), and PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β miss) using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B.

Specifically, in the miss fluctuation pattern judgment table B, 700 judgment values are assigned to PA1-2, 200 judgment values are assigned to PA2-1, 90 judgment values are assigned to PA2-2, and 7 judgment values are assigned to PA2-3.

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is four, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C is used to determine the fluctuation pattern from PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach miss), PA2-1 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach miss), PA2-2 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α miss), and PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β miss).

Specifically, in the miss fluctuation pattern judgment table C, 800 judgment values are assigned to PA1-3, 100 judgment values are assigned to PA2-1, 90 judgment values are assigned to PA2-2, and 7 judgment values are assigned to PA2-3.

In this way, in this embodiment, if the variable display result is a "miss," based on the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart being 3 or 4, etc., the variable display is executed more frequently using a shortened variable pattern (PA1-2, PA1-3) in which the special chart variable display time is shorter than the normal non-miss variable pattern (PA1-1), making it possible to prevent the game from becoming protracted while shortening the period until the next variable display result is a jackpot.

Next, as shown in Figure 17-8 (B), when the variable display result in the high base state is a non-probable jackpot, jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PB1-1 (fluctuation pattern of a normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (fluctuation pattern of a super reach α jackpot), PB1-3 (fluctuation pattern of a super reach β jackpot), and PB1-4 (fluctuation pattern of a super reach γ jackpot) using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A. Also, in the low base state, if the variable display result is a sure-win jackpot A or sure-win jackpot B, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PB1-1 (fluctuation pattern of a normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (fluctuation pattern of a super reach α jackpot), PB1-3 (fluctuation pattern of a super reach β jackpot), and PB1-4 (fluctuation pattern of a super reach γ jackpot) using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B.

As shown in FIG. 17-8(B), the number of judgment values assigned to PB1-1, PB1-2, PB1-3, and PB1-4 differs between jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table A and jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table B. Specifically, in jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table A, 97 judgment values are assigned to PB1-1, 350 judgment values are assigned to PB1-2, 300 judgment values are assigned to PB1-3, and 250 judgment values are assigned to PB1-4. On the other hand, in jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table B, 50 judgment values are assigned to PB1-1, 200 judgment values are assigned to PB1-2, 347 judgment values are assigned to PB1-3, and 400 judgment values are assigned to PB1-4. In other words, in this embodiment, when the variable display result is a sure-win A or a sure-win B, the fluctuation pattern is more likely to be determined as a Super Reach β or Super Reach γ fluctuation pattern than when the variable display result is a non-sure-win, making it possible to draw the player's attention to the fluctuation pattern in the variable display.

In addition, if the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot C or a small jackpot, a special jackpot variation pattern determination table is selected, and the variation pattern is determined to be PC1-1 (special jackpot variation pattern) using the special jackpot variation pattern determination table. In other words, in this embodiment, the variable display is executed with the same variation pattern when the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot C or a small jackpot, making it difficult for the player to determine from the variation pattern whether the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot C or a small jackpot.

In addition, if the variable display result is "miss" in the time-saving state (high base state), the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PA1-4 (time-saving shortened fluctuation pattern for non-reach miss), PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach β miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach γ miss fluctuation pattern) using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D.

Specifically, in the miss fluctuation pattern judgment table D, 800 judgment values are assigned to PA1-4, 100 judgment values are assigned to PA2-1, 80 judgment values are assigned to PA2-2, 10 judgment values are assigned to PA2-3, and 7 judgment values are assigned to PA2-4.

In other words, in this embodiment, if the variable display result is a "miss" in the high base state (time-saving state), the variable display is executed more frequently using the shortening variable pattern (PA1-4) in which the special chart variable display time is shorter than the normal non-reach miss variable pattern (PA1-1) due to the time-saving state, so it is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result is a jackpot while preventing the game from becoming protracted. Note that the variable patterns PA2-4 and PB1-4 (Super Reach γ) are variable patterns that can only be executed in the high base state (time-saving state).

In this embodiment, the RAM 102 is provided with, for example, a game control data holding area as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The game control data holding area includes, for example, a first special chart reserve memory section, a second special chart reserve memory section, a regular chart reserve memory section, a game control flag setting section, a game control timer setting section, a game control counter setting section, and a game control buffer setting section.

The first special symbol reservation memory unit stores reservation data of a special symbol game (a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A and a start winning (first start winning) has occurred but has not yet started. As an example, the first special symbol reservation memory unit associates reservation numbers with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) in the first start winning port, and stores, as reservation data, random number values MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, random number values MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and numerical data indicating random number values MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the establishment of the first start condition when the game ball passes (enters), until the number of memories reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The reserved data stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit thus indicates that the execution of the special chart game using the first special chart is on hold, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display result (special chart display result) in this special chart game.

The second special symbol reservation memory unit stores reservation data of a special symbol game (a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a start winning (second start winning) has occurred but has not yet started. As an example, the second special symbol reservation memory unit associates reservation numbers with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) into the second start winning port, and stores, as reservation data, random number values MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and numerical data indicating random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the establishment of the second start condition when the game ball passes (enters), until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The reserved data stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit thus indicates that the execution of the special chart game using the second special chart is on hold, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display result (special chart display result) in this special chart game.

The reserved information (first reserved information) based on the establishment of the first start condition by the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning port, and the reserved information (second reserved information) based on the establishment of the second start winning condition by the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning port may be stored in a common reserved memory unit in association with the reserved number. In this case, start port data indicating whether the game ball passed (entered) the first or second start winning port may be included in the reserved information and stored in association with the reserved number.

The regular symbol reserve memory unit stores reserved information for regular symbol games that have not yet been started by the regular symbol display device 20, even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the regular symbol reserve memory unit associates the game balls with reserved numbers in the order in which they passed through the passing gate 41, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the regular symbol display result extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., based on the passage of the game ball, as reserved data, until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated depending on the progress of the game on the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating the timer values of each of multiple types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit is provided with multiple types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for counting some or all of the game random numbers in a manner that allows the CPU 103 to update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR2 to MR4, are stored as random count values, and the numerical data indicating each random number is updated periodically or irregularly according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the updating operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scrambling or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104.

The game control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating the buffer values for each of multiple types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in FIG. 17-2 has a performance control data holding area that holds various data used to control performance operations. This performance control data holding area includes a performance control flag setting section, a performance control timer setting section, a performance control counter setting section, and a performance control buffer setting section.

The performance control flag setting unit is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to performance operation states, such as the display state of the performance image on the screen of the image display device 5, and performance control commands sent from the main board 11. For example, the performance control flag setting unit stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit is provided with multiple types of timers that are used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as the display operation of a performance image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the performance control timer setting unit stores data indicating the timer values of each of the multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting unit is provided with multiple types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting unit stores data indicating the buffer values for each of multiple types of buffers.

In this embodiment, data constituting a start winning reception command buffer in which entries capable of storing data such as a start winning designation command, a pattern designation command, a variable category command, and a reserved memory number notification command are set in association with buffer number 1-0 corresponding to the variable display during execution due to the reserved memory of the first special chart, buffer number 1-1 to buffer number 1-4 corresponding to the reserved memory 1 to 4 of the first special chart, buffer number 2-0 corresponding to the variable display during execution due to the reserved memory of the second special chart, and buffer number 2-1 to buffer number 2-4 corresponding to the reserved memory 1 to 4 of the second special chart are stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting section. When a start winning occurs at the first start winning port or the second start winning port, four commands, namely, a start winning designation command (first start winning port designation command or second start winning port designation command), a pattern designation command, a variable category designation command, and a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command or second reserved memory number notification command), are transmitted as one set from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The four commands that make up this set - the start port winning designation command, the pattern designation command, the variable category designation command, and the pending memory count notification command - are stored in the entry for the buffer number that corresponds to the start port winning designation command and the pending memory count notification command.

The contents of the storage area (entry) corresponding to buffer numbers 1-0 to 1-4 corresponding to the first special chart are shifted up one by one as described below when the start condition is met and the variable display of the top reserved memory (buffer number "1-1") is started, and the contents of buffer number "1-0" that stores the contents of the reserved memory for which the start condition is met are cleared in the special chart hit waiting process executed when the variable display is ended. Similarly, the contents of the storage area (entry) corresponding to buffer numbers 2-0 to 1-4 corresponding to the second special chart are shifted up one by one as described below when the start condition is met and the variable display of the top reserved memory (buffer number "2-1") is started, and the contents of buffer number "2-0" that stores the contents of the reserved memory for which the start condition is met are cleared in the special chart hit waiting process executed when the variable display is ended.

When a first start winning port is entered, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance stores the commands in the start winning port reception command buffer, starting from the top of the free entries (the entry with the lowest buffer number) among buffer numbers 1-1 to 1-4, and when a second start winning port is entered, starting from the top of the free entries (the entry with the lowest buffer number) among buffer numbers 2-1 to 2-4. When a start winning port is entered, the start winning port entry designation command through the reserved memory number notification command are sent in sequence. Therefore, when a command is received, the start winning port entry designation command, pattern designation command, variable category designation command, and reserved memory number notification command are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the end of the buffer numbers "1" to "4" corresponding to the first or second special pattern reserved memory, in that order.

Whenever the variable display of the decorative pattern starts, the commands stored in the start winning reception command buffer are deleted from the entry corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that just ended (the entry with buffer number "1-0" or "2-0"), and the contents of the entries corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that is about to start (the entry corresponding to buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") and the contents of the entries after the reserved memory of the variable display that is about to start are shifted. For example, when the variable display of the decorative pattern of the first special pattern reserved memory ends, the commands stored in buffer number "1-0" are deleted, the commands stored in buffer number "1-1" are shifted to buffer number "1-0", the commands stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "1-2" are shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1-1", and the commands stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "1-3" and "1-4" are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "1-2" and "1-3". Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes the area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending memory that is variably displayed at that time.

(Super Reach performance)
Here, the effects during the super reach will be described with reference to Fig. 17-9. Fig. 17-9 is a diagram showing the execution periods of various effects during normal reach and super reach.

As shown in FIG. 17-9, in the variable display of decorative symbols based on a normal reach variation pattern or a super reach variation pattern, the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display and then performs a normal reach performance as a variable display performance based on the variable display mode being the normal reach display mode. Also, in the super reach variation pattern, after executing a normal reach performance, it performs a super reach performance (weak super reach performance or strong super reach performance) as a variable display performance based on the variable display mode being the super reach display mode, and ends the variable display of decorative symbols after the super reach performance ends.

The presentation control CPU 120 can also execute preview presentation A or preview presentation B, which notifies the possibility (expectation level) that the variable display result will be a jackpot, as a presentation different from the variable display presentation in a normal reach presentation in a normal reach fluctuation pattern or a super reach fluctuation pattern (super reach α, β, γ). The presentation control CPU 120 can also execute development presentation A, which notifies the player that a normal reach presentation in a super reach fluctuation pattern will develop into a weak super reach presentation (content advantageous to the player).

The presentation control CPU 120 can also execute a development suggestion presentation that suggests the possibility of executing a development presentation B that notifies the player that a weak super reach presentation in a super reach variation pattern (super reach α, β, γ) will develop into a strong super reach presentation (content that is advantageous to the player), and can execute a development presentation B that notifies the player that a weak super reach presentation in a super reach variation pattern (super reach β, γ) will develop into a strong super reach presentation (content that is advantageous to the player).

The presentation control CPU 120 can also execute a deciding presentation that notifies the player that the variable display result will be a jackpot or a miss in the strong super reach presentation in the super reach variation pattern (super reach β, γ).

In this way, in a normal reach miss variation pattern, the normal reach performance will not develop into a weak super reach performance, resulting in a jackpot or miss, in a super reach variation pattern (super reach α, β, γ), the normal reach performance will develop into a weak super reach performance, and in a super reach variation pattern (super reach β, γ), the weak super reach performance will develop into a strong super reach performance.

In other words, Super Reach α is a weak Super Reach with a higher expectation than a normal reach, and Super Reach β and γ are strong Super Reach with a higher expectation than a weak Super Reach (jackpot expectation: normal reach < Super Reach α < Super Reach β < Super Reach γ).

In addition, normal reaches and super reaches α, β, and γ may each have a different type of normal reach effect or super reach effect, or they may have a common or at least partially similar type of super reach effect. Also, the types of super reaches are not limited to the above three types, and may be one or two types, or four or more types.

In the feature section 241SG, in the above-mentioned preview performance A and preview performance B, development performance A and B, development suggestion performance, and deciding performance, it is possible to move the mounted movable body 32, which is a structure, and to move and display the first pseudo movable body display and the second pseudo movable body display described below. Therefore, before explaining the specific content of each performance, the mounted movable body 32, the first pseudo movable body display, and the second pseudo movable body display will be explained.

(Pachinko machine development process)
First, in order to understand the circumstances under which the above-mentioned mounted movable body 32, the first pseudo movable body display, and the second pseudo movable body display were mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1, the outline of the development flow of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained with reference to Fig. 17-12. Fig. 17-12 is an explanatory diagram showing the outline of the development flow of the pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in Figure 17-12, when development of a given pachinko gaming machine (such as Pachinko gaming machine 1) begins, a proposal is first prepared that clearly defines what is to be communicated to gaming establishments and players, and what the player is expected to feel (step 241SGS001). Specifically, the game content, highlights, specs, game flow, presentation configuration such as reaches, board configuration, movable bodies (structures), etc. of the machine are considered.

Next, based on the proposal, a prototype (first prototype, design mockup) of the board (game board), images and materials that allow for an image of variable displays, a spec confirmation sheet, etc. are created (step 241SGS002). At the stage when this prototype is created, for example, although it was planned to include multiple movable bodies, problems may arise that make it impossible to include multiple movable bodies (for example, lack of space due to interference with other movable bodies, cost, durability, etc.).

Next, images such as variable display and effects are created (step 241SGS003). Here, for the effect images, a pseudo-movable body display image is created that imitates the non-mounted movable body, based on the design and movement of the movable body that could not be mounted due to the problem that arose in step 241SGS002. Note that since the movement display in the pseudo-movable body display has less impact than when the non-mounted movable body is moved, for example, the reaction display movement when the moving display is stopped and the speed of the moving display are often deformed (exaggerated or highlighted).

Then, a prototype (secondary prototype) of the game board (game board) including images of variable displays and effects is created, and the variable displays, core effects, and the operation of the movable bodies are checked (step 241SGS004). If there are no problems, a mold product of the game board (game board) is created (step 241SGS005).

In this way, by installing multiple movable bodies that can provide an impactful presentation to the player, the presentation effect can be further enhanced and the presentation can be diversified, but due to various problems such as those mentioned above, it is often difficult to actually install multiple bodies. Therefore, it is becoming common to use the movement display of a pseudo-movable body display that imitates the non-installed movable body, based on the design and movement of the movable body that could not be installed.

In the following, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 as the characteristic part 241SG, multiple movable bodies were planned to be mounted during the development stage, but due to the occurrence of various problems as described above, it was decided to mount one movable body (e.g., mounted movable body 32), and the mounting of the other movable bodies (e.g., first non-mounted movable body M100, second non-mounted movable body M200) was not decided and they were left unmounted, so it will be described as follows: instead of the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the second non-mounted movable body M200, a moving display of a first pseudo movable body display imitating the first non-mounted movable body M100 and a moving display of a second pseudo movable body display imitating the second non-mounted movable body M200 are adopted.

In the above, the pseudo-movable body display is exemplified as a form adopted as a substitute for the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the second non-mounted movable body M200 that were ultimately not mounted, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there are also cases where a movable body could be mounted but a pseudo-movable body display is used deliberately to diversify the presentation. It is also possible to use a pseudo-movable body display that imitates a movable body that is not planned to be mounted at the development stage (for example, a virtual movable body or a movable body that is mounted or planned to be mounted on another model).

(Mounted movable body 32)
The mounted movable body 32 will be described below with reference to Fig. 17-13. Fig. 17-13 (A) is a diagram showing a movement mode of the mounted movable body, and (B) is a diagram explaining a state in which the mounted movable body is lifted.

As shown in FIG. 17-13(A), the mounted movable body 32 is composed of a performance section 32A formed in a roughly trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front and decorated on the front, and a mechanism section 32B. The left and right sides of the mechanism section 32B, which are extended from the performance section 32A to the left and right, respectively, are supported by drive mechanisms 201L, 201R arranged on the left and right sides of the image display device 5, allowing it to move vertically between an upper origin position (the origin position shown by a solid line in FIG. 17-13(A)) and a performance position below the origin position (the position shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 17-13(A)). Note that the mechanism section 32B is a transmission member that transmits the power of the drive mechanisms 201L, 201R to the performance section 32A.

The driving mechanism 201L, 201R mainly includes a mounted movable body motor 202L, 202R, a driving gear 203L, 203R fixed to the driving shaft of the mounted movable body motor 202L, 202R, a driven gear 204L, 204R meshing with the driving gear 203L, 203R, a vertically oriented rotating shaft 205L, 205R with the driven gear 204L, 204R fixed to its lower end, a moving body 206L, 206R inserted into the rotating shaft 205L, 205R, a mounted movable body solenoid 207L, 207R capable of holding the mounted movable body 32 at the origin position, and a mounted movable body LED 208 (see FIG. 17-2) built into the performance section 32A and capable of illuminating a light-emitting section 208A consisting of the letter "X" (see FIG. 17-2).

The left and right ends (guided parts) of the mechanism 32B are inserted (guided) into the rotating shafts 205L and 205R so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and are retained in the origin position by being locked to the mounted movable body solenoids 207L and 207R. When the mounted movable body solenoids 207L and 207R are turned on while retained in the origin position and the locked state is released, the mounted movable body 32 falls from the origin position due to its own weight, and the left and right ends of the mechanism 32B come into contact with the moving bodies 206L and 206R, restricting downward movement, so that the mounted movable body 32 stops at the performance position.

While a spiral groove 205A is formed on the outer periphery of the rotating shafts 205L and 205R, the moving bodies 206L and 206R have an engagement portion (not shown) formed on the inner periphery that can be engaged with the groove 205A, and the rotation around the rotating shafts 205L and 205R is restricted, so that the rotating shafts 205L and 205R are rotated forward and backward by the mounted movable body motors 202L and 202R to move in the vertical direction. Therefore, the mounted movable body 32 can fall from the origin position to the performance position by its own weight, and after falling, as shown in FIG. 17-13(B), the mounted movable body motors 202L and 202R rotate the rotating shafts 205L and 205R to raise the moving bodies 206L and 206R, so that the moving bodies rise from the performance position to the origin position, and are held at the origin position by the mounted movable body solenoids 207L and 207R.

(First pseudo movable display and first non-mounted movable body)
Next, the first pseudo movable display and the first non-mounted movable body will be described with reference to Fig. 17-14. Fig. 17-14 is a diagram showing the movement display mode of the first pseudo movable body display (A), and a diagram showing the movement mode of the first non-mounted movable body (B).

The first pseudo movable body display Z100 shown in Figure 17-14 (A) is an image that imitates the first non-mounted movable body M100 that was planned to be mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 but was not mounted due to various circumstances, as shown in Figure 17-14 (B).

The first non-mounted movable body M100, which is not mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1, is composed of a performance section M100A formed in a roughly rectangular shape when viewed from the front and decorated on the front, and a mechanism section M100B. The left side of the mechanism section M100B, which extends leftward from the performance section M100A, is supported by a drive mechanism M101 located on the left side of the image display device 5, so that it can move vertically between a first origin position above (the origin position shown by the two-dot chain line in Figure 17-14 (B)) and a first performance position below the first origin position (the position shown by the solid line in Figure 17-14 (B)).

The drive mechanism M101 mainly comprises a movable body motor M102, a drive gear M103 fixed to the drive shaft of the movable body motor M102, a driven gear M104 meshing with the drive gear M103, a vertically oriented rotating shaft M105 with the driven gear M104 fixed to its lower end, a movable body solenoid M107 capable of holding the first non-mounted movable body M100 at the first origin position, a moving body M106 inserted into the rotating shaft M105, and a non-mounted movable body LED (not shown) built into the performance section M100A and capable of illuminating a circular light-emitting section M108A when viewed from the front.

The performance unit M100A has striped decorations on the front and four performance movable parts M110A-M110D arranged around the light-emitting unit M108A, and can be changed between a first performance state (indicated by two-dot chain lines in Figure 17-14 (B)) in which the performance movable parts M110A-M110D are close to each other, and a second performance state in which the performance movable parts M110A-M110D move radially away from the light-emitting unit M108A.

The first non-mounted movable body M100 is inserted (guided) in a vertically movable manner on the rotation axis M105 at the left end (guided part) of the mechanism M100B, and is held at the first origin position by being engaged with the movable body solenoid M107. When the movable body solenoid M107 is turned on while held at the first origin position and the engaged state is released, the first non-mounted movable body M100 falls from the first origin position under its own weight, and the left and right ends of the mechanism M100B come into contact with the moving body M106, restricting downward movement, so that the first non-mounted movable body M100 stops at the first performance position.

In addition, a spiral groove M105A is formed on the outer periphery of the rotation axis M105, while a locking portion (not shown) that can be locked to the groove M105A is formed on the inner periphery of the moving body M106, and rotation around the rotation axis M105 is restricted, so that the moving body M106 can move up and down by rotating the rotation axis M105 forward and backward by the moving body motor M102. Therefore, the first non-mounted moving body M100 can fall from the first origin position to the first performance position by its own weight, and after falling, the moving body M106 rises from the first performance position to the first specific origin position by rotating the rotation axis M105 by the moving body motor M102 to raise the moving body M106, and is held at the first origin position by the moving body solenoid M107.

As shown in FIG. 17-14(A), the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is an image that imitates the above-mentioned first non-mounted movable body M100, and has a performance display part Z100A corresponding to the performance part M100A, a mechanism display part Z100B corresponding to the mechanism part M100B, and a light-emitting display part Z108A corresponding to the light-emitting part M108A. The first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is movable and displayed in the vertical direction between a first initial display position corresponding to the first origin position and a first performance display position corresponding to the first performance position (see FIG. 17-16(B)), and is movable and displayed in the vertical direction between a first initial display position corresponding to a position different from the first origin position and a first performance display position corresponding to a position different from the first performance position (see FIG. 17-17(A)). Additionally, the performance section M100A has performance movable display sections Z110A-Z110D that correspond to the performance movable sections M110A-M110D, and can be changed between a first performance display state that corresponds to the first performance state, and a second performance display state that corresponds to the second performance state.

(Second pseudo movable display and second non-mounted movable body)
Next, the second pseudo movable display and the second non-mounted movable body will be described with reference to Fig. 17-15. Fig. 17-15 is a diagram showing the movement display mode of the second pseudo movable body display (A), and a diagram showing the movement mode of the second non-mounted movable body (B).

The second pseudo movable body display Z200 shown in Figure 17-15 (A) is an image that imitates the second non-mounted movable body M200 that was planned to be mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 but was not mounted due to various circumstances, as shown in Figures 17-15 (B) and (C).

Note that, for the second non-mounted movable body M200, two mounting plans with different operating modes (for example, mounting plan 1 shown in FIG. 17-15(B) and mounting plan 2 shown in FIG. 17-15(C)) were devised at the beginning of development, but due to development reasons, it became impossible to mount the second non-mounted movable body itself, so the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 was made capable of executing a movement display corresponding to mounting plan 1, which will be described below, and a movement display corresponding to mounting plan 2.

As shown in Figures 17-15 (B) and (C), the second non-mounted movable body M200 not mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is composed of a performance section M200A formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front and decorated on the front side, and a mechanical section M200B, and is incorporated into a first performance device (mounting plan 1: see Figure 17-15 (B)) in which the lower end of the mechanical section M100B is supported by a first drive mechanism M201A arranged below the image display device 5, and a second performance device (mounting plan 2: see Figure 17-15 (C)) in which the upper end of the mechanical section M100B is supported by a second drive mechanism M201B arranged above the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 17-15(B), the first drive mechanism M201A has a movable body motor (not shown) provided on the back side of the base member M202, a rotating body M203 rotated by the movable body motor (not shown), and a guide rail M204 that guides the performance unit M200A so that it can move up and down. One end of the mechanism unit M200B is supported so as to be rotatable around a rotation axis facing in the front-to-rear direction relative to the base member M202, and a long hole M206 is formed into which a connecting shaft M205 protruding from the peripheral portion on the front side of the rotating body M203 is slidably inserted.

Therefore, the second non-mounted movable body M200 driven by the first drive mechanism M201A can be moved vertically between a first specific origin position below (the origin position shown by the two-dot chain line in Figure 17-15 (B)) and a first specific performance position above the first specific origin position (the position shown by the solid line in Figure 17-15 (B)) by rotating the rotating body M203 by the movable body motor (not shown) and rotating the mechanism part M200B about the rotation axis.

The performance unit M200A also has a rotating unit M207 that is circular when viewed from the front, and a non-mounted movable body LED (not shown) that can illuminate multiple (e.g., five) light-emitting units M208A to M208E provided on the rotating unit M207. As the rotating unit M207 rotates, the non-mounted movable body LED (not shown) lights up, causing the light-emitting units M208A to M208E to emit light in multiple colors (e.g., seven colors).

As shown in FIG. 17-15(C), the second drive mechanism M201B mainly comprises a movable body motor M212, a drive gear M213 fixed to the drive shaft of the movable body motor M212, a driven gear M214 meshing with the drive gear M213, and a rotation shaft M215 facing left and right with the driven gear M214 fixed to its left end. A spiral groove M215A is formed on the outer periphery of the rotation shaft M215, while a mechanism part M200B extending upward from the performance part M200A has a locking part (not shown) formed on its inner periphery that can be locked into the groove M215A, and rotation around the rotation shaft M215 is restricted.

Therefore, the second non-mounted movable body M200 driven by the second drive mechanism M201B can be moved left and right between a second specific origin position on the left side (the origin position shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 17-15(C)) and a second specific performance position on the right side (the position shown by the solid line in FIG. 17-15(C)) by rotating the rotation shaft M215 forward and backward by the movable body motor M212, and can be stopped at a second intermediate performance position halfway between the second specific origin position and the second specific performance position.

As shown in FIG. 17-15(A), the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is an image that imitates the second non-mounted movable body M200, and has a performance display section Z200A corresponding to the performance section M200A, a mechanism display section Z200B corresponding to the mechanism section M200B, a rotation display section Z207 corresponding to the rotation section M207, and light-emitting display sections Z208A-Z208E corresponding to the light-emitting sections M208A-M208E.

Incidentally, at the beginning of development, it was planned to install a full-color LED as the non-mounted movable body LED (not shown), but due to cost considerations, it may be necessary to install a single-color LED. However, by making it the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, it is possible to make the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E light up in multiple colors (e.g., seven colors) without considering the cost.

Then, it can be moved vertically between a first specific initial display position corresponding to the first specific origin position and a first specific performance display position corresponding to the first specific performance position (see FIG. 17-16(C)), and can be moved horizontally between a second specific initial display position corresponding to the second specific origin position and a second specific performance display position corresponding to the second specific performance position (see FIG. 17-17(B)).

Next, the movement mode of the mounted movable body 32 and the movement display mode of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 will be explained based on Figures 17-16 and 17-17. Figure 17-16 is a diagram showing (A) the movable range of a non-mounted movable body, (B) the movement display area of the first pseudo movable body display, and (C) the movement display area of the second pseudo movable body display. Figure 17-17 is a diagram showing (A) a specific movement display area of the first pseudo movable body display, and (B) a specific movement display area of the second pseudo movable body display.

As shown in FIG. 17-16(A), the mounted movable body 32 can be moved vertically between an origin position where the lower part of the performance unit 32A overlaps with the upper part of the display area of the image display device 5, and a performance position where the performance unit 32A and the mechanism unit 32B overlap at approximately the center of the display area of the image display device 5, and the movement distance from the origin position to the performance position is L1.

As shown in FIG. 17-16 (B), the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can be moved up and down between a first initial display position where the lower part of the performance display unit Z100A is displayed at the top of the display area of the image display device 5, and a first performance display position where the performance display unit Z100A and the mechanism display unit Z100B are displayed at approximately the lower center of the display area of the image display device 5, and the moving display distance from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is L2.

As shown in FIG. 17-17(A), the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can be moved vertically between a first specific initial display position where the upper part of the performance display unit Z100A is displayed at the bottom of the display area of the image display device 5, and a first specific performance display position where the performance display unit Z100A and the mechanism display unit Z100B are displayed at approximately the upper center of the display area of the image display device 5, and the specific moving display distance from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position is L2A.

In this way, the first pseudo movable body display Z100, like the first non-mounted movable body M100, can not only be displayed by moving vertically within a movable range between a first initial display position corresponding to the first origin position and a first performance display position corresponding to the first performance position, but can also be displayed by moving vertically within a specific movable range between a second initial display position not corresponding to the first origin position and a second performance display position not corresponding to the first performance position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 17-16 (C), the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 can be moved up and down between a first specific initial display position where the lower part of the performance display unit Z200A is displayed at the top of the display area of the image display device 5, and a first specific performance display position where the performance display unit Z200A and the mechanism display unit Z200B are displayed at approximately the center of the display area of the image display device 5, and the moving display distance from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position is L3.

Also, as shown in FIG. 17-17(B), the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 can be moved left and right between a second specific initial display position where the right part of the performance display unit Z200A is displayed at the left position of the display area of the image display device 5, and a second specific performance display position where the performance display unit Z200A and the mechanism display unit Z200B are displayed at approximately the center position of the display area of the image display device 5, and the moving display distance from the second specific initial display position to the second specific performance display position is L3A.

In this way, the second pseudo movable body display Z200, like the second non-mounted movable body M200, can not only be displayed by moving up and down within a movable range between a first specific initial display position corresponding to the first specific origin position and a first specific performance display position corresponding to the first specific performance position, but can also be displayed by moving left and right within a specific movable range between a second specific initial display position not corresponding to the first specific origin position and a second specific performance display position not corresponding to the first specific performance position.

Furthermore, the movement display distance L2 of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is longer than the movement distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32, and the movement display distance L3 of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is shorter than the movement distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32 (L2>L1>L3).Furthermore, the movement display distance L2A of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is longer than the movement distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32, and the movement display distance L3A of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is longer than the movement distance L1 and the movement display distance L2A of the mounted movable body 32 (L3A>L2A>L1).

In this way, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 can be displayed moving over a longer distance (L2, L2A, L3A) than the moving distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32, making it possible to realize a more impactful presentation than the mounted movable body 32.

As shown in FIG. 17-16, the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 are composed of performance display units Z100A, Z200A and mechanism display units Z100B, Z200B, and the mechanism display units Z100B, Z200B are extended to the edge of the display area of the image display device 5, so that it appears as if the performance display units Z100A, Z200A are supported by the drive mechanism M101, first drive mechanism M201A, and second drive mechanism M201B arranged on the side of the image display device 5, making it possible to express the movement display more realistically.

In other words, a pseudo-movable body display (pseudo-movable body image) is a display that imitates a movable body as a structure that can be operated by a drive mechanism, such as a movable body mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1, a non-mounted movable body, or a virtual movable body, and is different from an image that does not have a mechanism display section, such as the development notification image Z300 (see Figure 17-25 (H)).

In addition, it is sufficient if it is possible to display something that is partially different from the model movable body, or to display something that cannot be achieved with the model movable body (for example, a deformed or transformed display), or to display movement (for example, a high-speed movement display).

The pseudo-movable body display (pseudo-movable body image) may be an image or video created by a computer or the like, or may be an image or video captured of a movable body as an actual structure. Furthermore, when these pseudo-movable body displays are displayed moving, a pseudo-impact can be generated by outputting sound effects that are the same as or similar to the sound effects output when the movable body is moved or the impact sound generated when the movable body is stopped, vibrating the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A with the vibration motor 61 when the pseudo-movable body display reaches the performance display position, or by outputting deep bass sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R, etc., thereby providing the player with a more realistic performance.

Next, the details of the various effects using the mounted movable body 32, the first pseudo movable body display Z100, and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 will be explained using Figure 17-10. Figure 17-10 is a diagram for explaining the content and configuration of the various effects in the super reach.

(Preview performance A)
As shown in Figure 17-10, the preview performance A is executable when the base state is low, and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed at the first specific initial display position and then moved to the first specific performance display position, and then the light-emitting display sections Z208A to Z208E light up in a color corresponding to the determined performance pattern, thereby indicating the possibility (expectation) of a jackpot.

In addition, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, which has been moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position, is erased after being moved from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position (see Figures 17-25 (C) to (F)).

In more detail, when pattern PYA-1 is determined in the preview performance A type determination process of step 241SGS278A described later, the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E are displayed in white, when pattern PYA-2 is determined, the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E are displayed in blue, when pattern PYA-3 is determined, the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E are displayed in green, and when pattern PYA-4 is determined, the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E are displayed in red. Therefore, the light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E with the highest expectation of a jackpot is red. The light-emitting color can be changed in various ways, and when a jackpot is confirmed, the light-emitting display units may be illuminated in gold or rainbow colors, etc.

(Preview Performance B)
The preview performance B is executable when the base state is high, and the possibility (expectation) of the variable display result being a jackpot is indicated depending on whether the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position or from the second initial display position to the second performance display position, or whether the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate performance display position or the second specific performance display position.

The first pseudo-movable body display Z100 that has been moved and displayed at the first performance display position is erased without being moved and displayed from the first performance display position to the first initial display position (see Figures 17-34 (A) to (C)). The first pseudo-movable body display Z100 that has been moved and displayed at the second performance display position is erased without being moved and displayed from the second performance display position to the second initial display position (see Figures 17-34 (D) to (F)).

The second pseudo-movable body display Z200 that has been moved and displayed at the second intermediate performance display position is erased without being moved and displayed from the second intermediate performance display position to the second specific initial display position (see Figures 17-33 (A) to (C)). The second pseudo-movable body display Z200 that has been moved and displayed at the second specific performance display position is erased without being moved and displayed from the second specific performance display position to the second specific initial display position (see Figures 17-33 (D) to (F)).

In detail, in the preview performance B type determination process of step 241SGS278A described below, if pattern PYB-1 is determined, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate performance display position, if pattern PYB-2 is determined, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second specific performance display position, if pattern PYB-3 is determined, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first performance display position, and if pattern PYB-4 is determined, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the second initial display position to the second performance display position. Therefore, the probability of a jackpot is higher when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is displayed in a moving manner than when the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed in a moving manner, and the moving display pattern with the highest probability of a jackpot is the pattern in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is displayed in a moving manner from the second initial display position to the second performance display position.

Furthermore, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first performance display position or from the second initial display position to the second performance display position faster than the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 moves from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate performance display position or the second specific performance display position.

(Development A)
In the development performance A, the development to a weak super reach is announced by the mounted movable body 32 moving (falling) from the origin position to the performance position (see FIG. 17-25 (H)). The mounted movable body 32, which has been moved from the origin position to the performance position, rises from the performance position to the origin position and returns after a predetermined time has passed.

In more detail, if execution is determined in the development performance A type determination process of step 241SGS278B described later, the development to a weak super reach is announced by the mounted movable body 32 dropping from the origin position to the performance position at the performance start timing (see FIG. 17-25 (H)). On the other hand, if non-execution is determined, the mounted movable body 32 does not drop from the origin position at the performance start timing, and the development to a weak super reach is announced by the display of a development announcement image Z300 on the image display device 5 (see FIG. 17-25 (G)). In other words, non-execution is determined in the development performance A type determination process, which means that a performance pattern is decided in which the mounted movable body 32 is not dropped and the development announcement image Z300 is displayed to announce the development to a weak super reach.

The development notification image Z300 is an image (display) that imitates the mounted movable body 32, but unlike pseudo-movable body displays such as the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, which are displayed and move in the same way as the movable body, it is an image (display) that imitates only the performance section 32A, and is displayed in a display mode that differs from the movement of the mounted movable body 32. For example, at the performance start timing, it is displayed from the beginning at a performance display position that corresponds to the performance position of the mounted movable body 32, without any movement display.

(Development suggestion)
The development suggestion effect can be executed before the development effect B is executed, and after the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed at the first specific initial display position and then moved to the first specific effect display position, when a rapid-fire operation of the push button 31B by the player (an operation in which the detection signal of the push sensor 35B is detected multiple times within a specified period) is detected during an effective operation period in which the rapid-fire operation is effective, the light-emitting display sections Z208A-Z208E change to an illuminated display color corresponding to the determined effect pattern, thereby suggesting the display color of the character image Z310 described below, i.e., the possibility that the development effect B will be executed.

In addition, in the characteristic part 241SG, during the effective operation period during which the repeated operation of the push button 31B is valid in the development suggestion performance, an operation promotion image (such as an image imitating the push button 31B) that promotes the repeated operation of the push button 31B is not displayed on the image display device 5, and instead, the button LED 62 (see FIG. 17-2) built into the push button 31B is turned on to promote the repeated operation of the push button 31B. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an operation promotion display that promotes the repeated operation of the push button 31B during the effective operation period may be displayed on the image display device 5.

In addition, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, which has been moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position, is displayed so that the character image Z310 related to the model overlaps (acts on) the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 in an area including the first specific performance display position in the display area of the image display device 5, and then is erased without being moved from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position (see Figures 17-26 (A) to (J), Figure 17-27 (A)).

In more detail, in the development suggestion performance type determination process of step 241SGS278B described later, if pattern PS-1 is determined, the light-emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E will remain white even if the push button 31B is repeatedly pressed, if pattern PS-2 is determined, the light-emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E will change from white to blue in response to the repeated pressing of the push button 31B, if pattern PS-3 is determined, the light-emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E will change from white to blue to green in response to the repeated pressing of the push button 31B, and if pattern PS-4 is determined, the light-emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E will change from white to blue to green to red in response to the repeated pressing of the push button 31B. Therefore, the final light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E with the highest execution expectation of development performance B will be red.

The light color and the pattern of change in light color can also be changed in various ways. For example, the light color may change from white to red without changing to blue or green, or the light color may be other than white from the beginning. In addition, the number of lit light-emitting display parts Z208A-Z208E may be increased in response to repeated pressing of the push button 31B, so that a higher number of lit light-emitting parts increases the expectation of the development performance B being executed than a lower number of lit light-emitting parts. The expectation may also differ depending on the light color and the number of lights.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 241SG, when the repeated tapping of the push button 31B is not detected during the valid operation period or the amount of the repeated tapping is small, even if one of the patterns PS-2 to 4 is determined, the illumination color does not change depending on the amount of the repeated tapping operation. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the repeated tapping of the push button 31B is not detected during the valid operation period or the amount of the repeated tapping operation is small, the illumination color may change to the illumination color corresponding to the determined pattern PS-2 to 4 at the timing when the valid operation period ends.

In addition, the character image Z310 displayed after the valid operation period ends is displayed in a color that corresponds to the light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E when the valid operation period ends.

In addition, different types of character images Z310 may be displayed depending on the light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E when the effective operation period ends. Even if the light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E does not change despite the fact that one of the patterns PS-2 to 4 has been determined as described above, a character image Z310 (a color different from the light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E) in a color corresponding to the determined pattern PS-2 to 4 may be displayed. Furthermore, the light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E may be changed to the same color as the character image Z310 at the timing when the character image Z310 is displayed.

(Development B)
In the development performance B, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position, thereby informing the player that the performance will develop into a strong super reach performance and a deciding performance will be executed (content advantageous to the player) (see FIG. 17-27(D)). Also, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 that was moved and displayed at the first specific performance display position is erased without being moved from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position (see FIG. 17-27(D) to (F)).

In addition, when the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is erased without moving from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position, a reach title image Z51 is displayed in the display area including the first specific performance display position so as to overlap the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 in a manner indicating that the image is about to be displayed, thereby suggesting that the variable display result will be a jackpot (the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state).

In more detail, when execution is determined in the development performance B type determination process of step 241SGS280 described later, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position at the performance start timing, thereby notifying the development to a strong super reach (see FIG. 17-27 (D)). On the other hand, when non-execution is determined, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is not moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position at the performance start timing, and the image display device 5 displays the reach title image Z51 in a ready state to notify the development to a strong super reach (see FIG. 17-27 (C)). In other words, when non-execution is determined in the development performance B type determination process, a performance pattern is determined in which the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is not moved and the reach title image Z51 is displayed in a ready state to notify the development to a strong super reach.

(Decisive performance)
The deciding performance is a performance that concludes the battle between the ally character and the enemy character that has been executed in the super reach performance, and notifies the player of whether or not the game state is controlled to a jackpot. Specifically, for example, after a display is made in which the ally character deals a final blow to the enemy character, a display is made to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A, and at the timing when the operation of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A is detected, or at the timing when the operation of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A is not detected and the operation effective period ends, either a jackpot confirmation notification is made in which the enemy character is defeated by moving the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the performance position, and the player wins the battle, or a loss confirmation notification is made in which the mounted movable body 32 is not moved from the origin position to the performance position, and is defeated by the enemy character, and the player loses the battle.

Patterns KB-1 and KV-1 are selected when the variable display result is a miss, and a confirmed miss notification is made in which the friendly character is defeated by the enemy character and loses the battle, while patterns KB-2 and KV-2 are selected when the variable display result is a jackpot, and a confirmed jackpot notification is made in which the friendly character defeats the enemy character and wins the battle.

In addition, in patterns KB-2 and KV-2, when the operation of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A is detected, or when the effective operation period ends without the operation of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A being detected, the vibration motor 61 is driven for a predetermined period (e.g., about 10 seconds) to vibrate the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A.

In addition, if the execution of pattern KB-2 or KV-2 is determined in the determination effect type determination process of step 241SGS282 described later, the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the effect position at the timing when the mounted movable body 32 falls, and a jackpot confirmation notification is made, and after returning from the effect position to the origin position, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first effect display position and the variable display of the decorative pattern is resumed. Then, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the first effect display position to the first initial display position and the variable display of the decorative pattern is stopped, and the variable display result is a jackpot (see Figures 17-29 (E) to (G), Figures 17-30 (A) to (F)).

On the other hand, if it is decided to execute pattern KB-1 or KV-1, the mounted movable body 32 will not move from the origin position at the timing when it falls, and an effect image Z57 of cracked glass will be displayed to notify the user of a confirmed miss, and the variable display result will be a miss (see Figures 17-29 (H) to (J)).

Next, the probability of winning depending on the execution status of development performance A using the mounted movable body 32 in super reach β and γ (strong super reach) and development performance B using the second pseudo movable body display Z200 will be explained based on Figure 17-11. Figure 17-11 is a diagram showing the probability of winning depending on the execution status of development performance A and development performance B.

As shown in Figure 17-11, pattern A is a pattern in which both development effect A and development effect B are not executed during the variable display period of the pattern based on the fluctuation pattern of super reach β and γ (strong super reach), pattern B is a pattern in which development effect A is not executed and development effect B is executed, pattern C is a pattern in which development effect A is executed and development effect B is not executed, and pattern D is a pattern in which development effect A and development effect B are both executed.

In the above, the jackpot expectation is set in the order of pattern A < pattern B < pattern C < pattern D. In other words, during the variable display period of the pattern based on the variable pattern of the Super Reach β or Super Reach γ, when the development performance A using the mounted movable body 32 and the development performance B using the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 are executed, the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state (jackpot expectation) is higher than when the development performance B is executed without executing the development performance A. Also, when the development performance A and the development performance B are executed, the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state (jackpot expectation) is higher than when the development performance A is executed without executing the development performance B. Also, when the development performance A and the development performance B are executed, the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state (jackpot expectation) is higher than when the development performance A and the development performance B are not executed.

Figure 17-18 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the performance control process shown in Figure 16. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the first variable display start command reception flag is on (step 241SGS271). If the first variable display start command reception flag is on (step 241SGS271; Y), the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special chart reserved memory in the start winning time reception command buffer are shifted up by one buffer number at a time (step 241SGS272). Note that the contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so it is erased.

Specifically, the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-1" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-0", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-2" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-1", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-3" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-2", and the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-4" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-3".

Also, in step 241SGS271, if the first variable display start command reception flag is off (step 241SGS271; N), it is determined whether the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 241SGS273). If the second variable display start command reception flag is off (step 241SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 241SGS273; Y), the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special chart reservation memory in the start winning time reception command buffer 109SG194A are shifted up by one buffer number (step 241SGS274). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so it is erased.

Specifically, the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-1" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-0", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-2" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-1", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-3" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-2", and the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-4" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 241SGS272 or step 241SGS274, the performance control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 241SGS275).

Next, the display result (stopping pattern) of the decorative pattern is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (i.e., the received display result designation command) (step 241SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern according to the display result designated by the display result designation command, and stores data indicating the determined stopping pattern of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area.

In this feature section 241SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability of a jackpot A, the performance control CPU 120 determines, for example, a combination of decorative patterns (jackpot patterns) in which three patterns are aligned to "7" as the stopping pattern. When the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability of a jackpot B, the stopping pattern is determined from among multiple combinations of odd numbers other than "7" (for example, combinations of decorative patterns such as "111", "333", "555", and "999"). When the received variable display result designation command is the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability of a jackpot C, the stopping pattern is determined from among "334" and "778", which are the same chance numbers as the small win. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to a non-probability jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 determines, for example, a combination of decorative patterns (jackpot patterns) in which three patterns are aligned as even numbers as the stopping patterns. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the sixth variable display result designation command corresponding to a small jackpot, the stopping patterns are determined from among "334" and "778", which are the same chance numbers as the probability jackpot C. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to a miss, the stopping patterns are determined to be decorative patterns in which three patterns are not aligned, and are combinations other than the above-mentioned chance numbers (miss patterns).

When determining these stopping patterns, the performance control CPU 120 may, for example, extract a random number for determining the stopping pattern, and determine the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern using a stopping pattern determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative patterns are associated with numerical values. In other words, the stopping pattern may be determined by selecting data indicating the combination of decorative patterns that corresponds to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

Then, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance checks whether the fluctuation pattern in the variable display is a normal reach fluctuation pattern or a super reach fluctuation pattern (step 241SGS277). If it is a normal reach fluctuation pattern or a super reach fluctuation pattern (step 241SGS277; Y), it executes the preview performance type determination process shown in FIG. 17-19 to determine the performance pattern (performance type) of the preview performance A or the preview performance B in the variable display (step 241SGS278A), and executes the development performance A type determination process shown in FIG. 17-21 (A) to determine the performance pattern (performance type) of the development performance A in the variable display (step 241SGS278B). If it is not a normal reach fluctuation pattern or a super reach fluctuation pattern (step 241SGS277; N), it proceeds to step 241SGS283.

As shown in Figure 17-19, in the preview performance type determination process, the performance control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (step 241SGS301). The variable display result can be identified by a variable display result designation command stored in a variable display result designation command storage area for storing a variable display result designation command for designating the variable display result (miss, variable probability jackpot A, variable probability jackpot B, variable probability jackpot C, non-variable probability jackpot, small win) sent from the main board 11 at the start of the variable display. In addition, the variation pattern can be identified by a variation pattern designation command stored in a variation pattern designation command storage area, as described above. In addition, in this feature section 241SG, since the target of the preview performance is normal reach and super reach, specifically, the variable display result designation command is used to specify whether the variable display result is a jackpot (probable jackpot A, probable jackpot B, probable jackpot C, non-probable jackpot) or a miss, and the variable pattern designation command is used to specify whether the variation pattern is a normal reach or a super reach. Note that the case of probable jackpot C may be excluded as a target of the preview performance.

Next, the CPU 120 for controlling the effects determines whether the game state is in a low base state (time-saving state) (step 241SGS302), and if it is in a low base state (step 241SGS302; Y), it extracts a random number for determining the advance notice effect and determines the effect pattern of advance notice effect A using table A for determining the type of advance notice effect shown in FIG. 17-20 (A) (step 241SGS303). On the other hand, if it is not in a low base state, that is, if it is in a high base state (step 241SGS302; N), it extracts a random number for determining the advance notice effect and determines the effect pattern of advance notice effect B using table B for determining the type of advance notice effect shown in FIG. 17-20 (B) (step 241SGS304).

As shown in Figure 17-20 (A), in the table for determining the type of preview performance A, for each of "Pattern PYA-1", "Pattern PYA-2", "Pattern PYA-3", and "Pattern PYA-4", different judgment values are assigned for the cases where the variable display result is a special jackpot (special jackpot A, special jackpot B, or special jackpot C), a non-special jackpot, a super reach miss, or a normal reach miss, so that the judgment value numbers shown in Figure 17-20 (A) are obtained.

Specifically, when the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-1", 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-2", 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-3", and 50 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-4". When the variable display result is a non-guaranteed jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-1", 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-2", 50 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-3", and 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-4". When the variable display result is a super reach miss, 50 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-1", 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-2", 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-3", and 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-4". Additionally, when the variable display result is a normal reach miss, 80 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-1," 10 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-2," 8 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-3," and 2 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-4."

By assigning the judgment values in this way, if the variable display results in a guaranteed jackpot, "Pattern PYA-4" is determined with the highest probability, if it results in a non-guaranteed jackpot, "Pattern PYA-3" is determined with the highest probability, and if it results in a super reach miss or normal reach miss, "Pattern PYA-1" is determined with the highest probability. In other words, "Pattern PYA-4" has the highest jackpot expectation, with the jackpot expectation decreasing in the order of "Pattern PYA-4" > "Pattern PYA-3" > "Pattern PYA-2" > "Pattern PYA-1". The above determination ratios can be changed in various ways.

As shown in Figure 17-20 (B), in the table for determining the type of preview performance B, for each of "Pattern PYB-1", "Pattern PYB-2", "Pattern PYB-3", and "Pattern PYB-4", different judgment values are assigned for the cases where the variable display result is a special jackpot (special jackpot A, special jackpot B, or special jackpot C), a non-special jackpot, a super reach miss, or a normal reach miss, so that the judgment value numbers shown in Figure 17-20 (B) are obtained.

Specifically, when the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-1", 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-2", 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-3", and 50 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-4". When the variable display result is a non-guaranteed jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-1", 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-2", 50 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-3", and 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-4". When the variable display result is a super reach miss, 50 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-1", 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-2", 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-3", and 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-4". Furthermore, when the variable display result is a normal reach miss, 80 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-1," 10 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-2," 8 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-3," and 2 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-4."

By assigning the judgment values in this way, if the variable display results in a guaranteed jackpot, "Pattern PYB-4" is determined with the highest probability, if it results in a non-guaranteed jackpot, "Pattern PYB-3" is determined with the highest probability, and if it results in a super reach miss or normal reach miss, "Pattern PYB-1" is determined with the highest probability. In other words, "Pattern PYB-4" has the highest jackpot expectation, with the jackpot expectation decreasing in the order of "Pattern PYB-3" > "Pattern PYB-3" > "Pattern PYB-2" > "Pattern PYB-1". The above determination ratios can be changed in various ways.

In addition, in the characteristic section 241SG, an example is given in which the determination ratio of each pattern is the same in the table for determining the preview performance type A for a low base state and the table for determining the preview performance type B for a high base state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination ratio of each pattern may be different in the table for determining the preview performance type A and the table for determining the preview performance type B.

Returning to FIG. 17-19, in step 241SGS305, the preview performance type determined in step 241SGS303 or step 241SGS304 is stored in a predetermined area of RAM 122 (step 241SGS305). Then, the process proceeds to step 241SGS306, where the preview performance start waiting timer is set to the period until the performance starts (step 241SGS306), and the process ends.

Next, as shown in FIG. 17-21, in the development performance A type determination process, the performance control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (step 241SGS311). The variable display result can be identified by a variable display result designation command stored in a variable display result designation command storage area for storing a variable display result designation command for designating the variable display result (miss, variable probability jackpot A, variable probability jackpot B, variable probability jackpot C, non-variable probability jackpot, small jackpot) sent from the main board 11 at the start of the variable display. In addition, the variation pattern can be identified by a variation pattern designation command stored in a variation pattern designation command storage area, as described above. In addition, in this feature section 241SG, since the target of the development performance A is the normal reach and the super reach, specifically, the variable display result designation command is used to specify whether the variable display result is a jackpot (probable jackpot A, probable jackpot B, probable jackpot C, non-probable jackpot) or a miss, and the variable pattern designation command is used to specify whether the variation pattern is a normal reach or a super reach. Note that the case of the probable jackpot C may be excluded as a target of the development performance A.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 extracts a random number for determining the type of advanced performance, and determines the performance pattern of advanced performance A using the table for determining the type of advanced performance A shown in FIG. 17-21 (B) (step 241SGS312).

As shown in Figure 17-21 (B), in the table for determining the type of development performance A, for each of the patterns of "non-execution" and "execution", different judgment values are assigned for the cases where the variable display result is a special jackpot (special jackpot A, special jackpot B, or special jackpot C), a non-special jackpot, a super reach miss, or a normal reach miss, so that the judgment value numbers shown in Figure 17-21 (B) are assigned.

Specifically, when the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot, a judgment value of 10 is assigned to "not execute" and a judgment value of 90 is assigned to "execute". When the variable display result is a non-guaranteed jackpot, a judgment value of 20 is assigned to "not execute" and a judgment value of 80 is assigned to "execute". When the variable display result is a miss for a super reach, a judgment value of 80 is assigned to "not execute" and a judgment value of 20 is assigned to "execute". When the variable display result is a miss for a normal reach, a judgment value of 100 is assigned to "not execute". In other words, when a normal reach is a miss, it does not develop into a weak super reach performance, so development performance A is not executed.

By assigning the judgment values in this way, when the variable display results in a guaranteed jackpot or non-guaranteed jackpot, "execute" is determined with the highest probability, and when the super reach or normal reach is missed, "non-execute" is determined with the highest probability. In other words, the probability of a jackpot is higher when development performance A is executed than when it is not executed. The above determination ratios can be changed in various ways.

Returning to FIG. 17-21(A), in step 241SGS313, the type of advanced performance A determined in step 241SGS312 is stored in a specified area of RAM 122 (step 241SGS313). Then, the process proceeds to step 241SGS314, where the advanced performance A start waiting timer is set to the period until the start of the performance (step 241SGS314), and the process ends.

Returning to Figure 17-18, after executing the processing of step 241SGS278B, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the fluctuation pattern in the variable display is a super reach fluctuation pattern (step 241SGS279), and if it is a super reach fluctuation pattern (step 241SGS279; Y), it executes the development suggestion performance type determination processing shown in Figure 17-22 (A) to determine the performance pattern (performance type) of the development suggestion performance in the variable display (step 241SGS280), executes the development performance B type determination processing shown in Figure 17-23 (A) to determine the performance pattern (performance type) of the development performance B in the variable display (step 241SGS281), and executes the deciding performance B type determination processing shown in Figure 17-24 (A) to determine the performance pattern (performance type) of the deciding performance in the variable display (step 241SGS282). If it is not a super reach fluctuation pattern, that is, if it is a normal reach fluctuation pattern (step 241SGS279; N), proceed to step 241SGS283.

As shown in FIG. 17-22 (A), in the development suggestion performance type determination process, the performance control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (step 241SGS321). The variable display result can be identified by a variable display result designation command stored in a variable display result designation command storage area for storing a variable display result designation command for designating the variable display result (miss, special chance jackpot A, special chance jackpot B, special chance jackpot C, non-special chance jackpot, small win) sent from the main board 11 at the start of the variable display. In addition, the variation pattern can be identified by a variation pattern designation command stored in a variation pattern designation command storage area, as described above. In addition, in this feature section 241SG, since the target of the preview performance is normal reach and super reach, specifically, the variable display result designation command is used to specify whether the variable display result is a jackpot (probable jackpot A, probable jackpot B, probable jackpot C, non-probable jackpot) or a miss, and the variable pattern designation command is used to specify whether the variation pattern is a normal reach or a super reach. Note that the case of probable jackpot C may be excluded as a target of the preview performance.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 extracts a random number for determining the development suggestion performance, and determines the performance pattern of the development suggestion performance using the development suggestion performance type determination table shown in Figure 17-22 (B) (step 241SGS322).

As shown in Figure 17-22 (B), in the table for determining the type of development suggestion performance, different judgment values are assigned to each of "Pattern PS-1", "Pattern PS-2", "Pattern PS-3", and "Pattern PS-4" when the variable display result is a sure chance jackpot (sure chance jackpot A, sure chance jackpot B, or sure chance jackpot C), when it is a non-sure chance jackpot, when it is a super reach miss, or when it is a normal reach miss, so that the judgment value numbers shown in Figure 17-20 (A) are assigned.

Specifically, when the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-1", 15 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-2", 30 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-3", and 50 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-4". When the variable display result is a non-guaranteed jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-1", 15 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-2", 50 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-3", and 30 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-4". When the variable display result is a super reach miss, 50 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-1", 30 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-2", 15 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-3", and 5 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-4".

By assigning the judgment values in this way, if the variable display results in a guaranteed jackpot, "Pattern PS-4" is determined most frequently, if it results in a non-guaranteed jackpot, "Pattern PS-3" is determined most frequently, and if it results in a super reach miss, "Pattern PS-1" is determined most frequently. In other words, "Pattern PS-4" has the highest jackpot expectation, with the jackpot expectation decreasing in the order of "Pattern PS-4" > "Pattern PS-3" > "Pattern PS-2" > "Pattern PS-1". The above determination ratios can be changed in various ways.

Returning to FIG. 17-22(A), in step 241SGS323, the type of development suggestion effect determined in step 241SGS322 is stored in a specified area of RAM 122 (step 241SGS323). Then, the process proceeds to step 241SGS324, where the development suggestion effect start waiting timer is set to the period until the effect starts (step 241SGS324), and the process ends.

Next, as shown in FIG. 17-23(A), in the development performance B type determination process, the performance control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (step 241SGS331). The variable display result can be identified by the variable display result designation command stored in the variable display result designation command storage area for storing the variable display result designation command for designating the variable display result (miss, variable probability jackpot A, variable probability jackpot B, variable probability jackpot C, non-variable probability jackpot, small jackpot) sent from the main board 11 at the start of the variable display. In addition, the variation pattern can be identified by the variation pattern designation command stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area, as described above. In addition, in this feature section 241SG, since the target of the preview performance is normal reach and super reach, specifically, the variable display result designation command is used to specify whether the variable display result is a jackpot (probable jackpot A, probable jackpot B, probable jackpot C, non-probable jackpot) or a miss, and the variable pattern designation command is used to specify whether the variation pattern is a normal reach or a super reach. Note that the case of probable jackpot C may be excluded as a target of the preview performance.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 extracts a random number for determining the advanced performance and determines the performance pattern of advanced performance B using the table for determining the advanced performance B type shown in FIG. 17-23 (B) (step 241SGS332).

As shown in Figure 17-23 (B), in the table for determining the type of development performance B, for each of the patterns of "non-execution" and "execution", different judgment values are assigned for the cases where the variable display result is a special jackpot (special jackpot A, special jackpot B, or special jackpot C), a non-special jackpot, a super reach miss, or a normal reach miss, so that the judgment value numbers shown in Figure 17-23 (B) are assigned.

Specifically, when the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot, 20 judgment values are assigned to "not execute" and 80 judgment values are assigned to "execute". When the variable display result is a non-guaranteed jackpot, 30 judgment values are assigned to "not execute" and 70 judgment values are assigned to "execute". When the variable display result is a miss for Super Reach β or γ, 30 judgment values are assigned to "not execute" and 70 judgment values are assigned to "execute". When the variable display result is a miss for Super Reach α, 100 judgment values are assigned to "not execute". In other words, when Super Reach α is a miss, it does not develop into a strong Super Reach performance, so development performance B is not executed.

By assigning the judgment values in this way, when the variable display results in a guaranteed jackpot or non-guaranteed jackpot, "execute" is determined with the highest probability, and when the super reach misses or normal reach misses, "non-execute" is determined with the highest probability. In other words, the expectation of a jackpot is higher when development performance B is executed than when it is not executed. The above determination ratios can be changed in various ways.

Returning to FIG. 17-23(A), in step 241SGS333, the type of advanced performance B determined in step 241SGS332 is stored in a specified area of RAM 122 (step 241SGS333). Then, the process proceeds to step 241SGS334, where the advanced performance B start waiting timer is set to the period until the start of the performance (step 241SGS334), and the process ends.

As shown in FIG. 17-24(A), in the process of determining the type of final effect, the CPU 120 for controlling the effect determines the pattern of the final effect using the table for determining the type of final effect shown in FIG. 17-24(B) based on the variable display result identified in step 241SGS301 (step 241SGS341). Next, the determined type of final effect is stored in a specified area of the RAM 122 (step 241SGS342), the timer waiting for the start of the final effect is set to the period until the start of the effect (step 241SGS343), and the process ends.

As shown in FIG. 17-24(B), in the deciding effect type determination table, for "Pattern KB-1" and "Pattern KB-2" which display an operation prompt to encourage the player to press the push button 31B once by enabling the operation of the push button 31B, and "Pattern KV-1" and "Pattern KV-2" which display an operation prompt to encourage the player to pull the stick controller 31A once by enabling the operation of the stick controller 31A, different judgment values are assigned to the variable display results when the variable display results in a special jackpot (special jackpot A, special jackpot B, or special jackpot C), when the variable display results in a non-special jackpot, or when the super reach is missed, so that the judgment value numbers shown in FIG. 17-24(B) are assigned.

Specifically, when the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot, 30 judgment values are assigned to "pattern KB-2" and 70 judgment values are assigned to "pattern KV-2". When the variable display result is a non-guaranteed jackpot, 70 judgment values are assigned to "pattern KB-2" and 30 judgment values are assigned to "pattern KV-2". When the variable display result is a miss for the Super Reach β/γ, 70 judgment values are assigned to "pattern KB-1" and 30 judgment values are assigned to "pattern KV-1".

By assigning the judgment values in this way, if a sure-win occurs in the variable display, "Pattern KV-1" in which the control object is the stick controller 31A is determined most frequently, if a sure-win occurs but a non-sure-win occurs, "Pattern KB-2" in which the control object is the push button 31B is determined most frequently, and if a super reach is missed, "Pattern KB-1" in which the control object is the push button 31B is determined most frequently. In other words, the probability of a sure-win is higher when the stick controller 31A is the control object than when the push button 31B is the control object. The above determination ratios can be changed in various ways.

In addition, in this feature section 241SG, the random numbers for determining the preview performance, the random numbers for determining the development performance A, the random numbers for determining the development hint performance, the random numbers for determining the development performance B, and the random numbers for determining the final performance are each set to random numbers in the range of 1 to 100, and one of the values in the range of 1 to 100 is extracted. In other words, the number of judgment values for these various performance determination random numbers is set to 100 in the range of 1 to 100, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the range of these various performance determination random numbers can be determined appropriately. Also, a performance determination random number counter for generating these various performance determination random numbers is set in RAM 122, and this performance determination random number counter is updated at each timer interruption in the random number update process. Also, a common random number may be used for these various performance determination random numbers.

In addition, in this feature section 241SG, an example of determining the performance pattern of various performances in the various performance type determination process has been given, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in addition to the above-mentioned performances, it is also possible to determine the execution of preview performances such as a character preview performance in which a character appears, a step-up preview in which the preview image changes in stages, and a group preview in which a group of specified characters crosses the display area.When determining these different types of preview performances, the timing to start the preview performance differs depending on the type of preview performance, so a different period depending on the type of preview performance can be set in the preview performance start waiting timer described below.

Returning to FIG. 17-18, in step 241SGS283, the performance control CPU 120 selects a performance control pattern (process table) according to the variable pattern designation command. Then, it starts the process timer for process data 1 of the selected process table (step 241SGS284).

In addition, in the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, sound control execution data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (numbers 1 to N).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, speakers 8L, 8R as performance components, and operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.)) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1) (step 241SGS285). For example, to display an image corresponding to a fluctuation pattern on the image display device 5, it outputs a command to the display control unit 123. It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. It also outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the sound control board 13 to output sound from the speakers 8L, 8R.

In addition, in this feature section 241SG, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display of the decorative pattern to vary according to a variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern designation command, but the performance control CPU 120 may select the variation pattern to be used from multiple types of variation patterns that correspond to the variation pattern designation command.

Then, the variable display time timer is set to a value equivalent to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command (step 241SGS286). A predetermined time is also set to the variable display control timer (step 241SGS287). The predetermined time is, for example, 33 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 writes image data being variably displayed, including image data showing the display state of the left, center, and right decorative patterns, to the VRAM each time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written to the VRAM to the image display device 5, which then displays an image corresponding to the signal. This realizes the variable display of the decorative patterns and the display of videos of other performances.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 sets the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the performance processing during variable display (step S172), and ends the variable display start setting processing (step 241SGS288).

(Example of Super Reach β performance)
Next, a description will be given of an example of the performance of the Super Reach β based on FIG. 17-25 to FIG. 17-31. FIG. 17-25 (A) to (H) are diagrams showing examples of the performance of the Super Reach β mainly in the normal reach. FIG. 17-26 (A) to (J) are diagrams showing examples of the performance of the weak Super Reach. FIG. 17-27 (A) to (F) are diagrams showing examples of the performance of the weak Super Reach. FIG. 17-28 (A) to (D) are diagrams showing examples of the performance of the strong Super Reach. FIG. 17-29 (E) to (J) are diagrams showing examples of the performance of the strong Super Reach performance. FIG. 17-30 (A) to (F) are diagrams showing examples of the performance after the big win confirmation notification. FIG. 17-31 (A) to (D) are diagrams showing details of the moving display of the first pseudo movable body display. FIG. 17-32 is a diagram showing the relationship between the light-emitting display unit and the mounted movable body LED.

Below, we will explain various examples of performance actions during the variable display period based on the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach β.

As shown in FIG. 17-25(A), the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R based on the variable pattern of the Super Reach β, which is based on the occurrence of a start winning win. In addition, the upper left corner of the display area of the image display device 5 is provided with a display area 5SL for displaying the first reserved memory number (e.g., the number "2"), the second reserved memory number (e.g., the number "0"), and a small symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol (e.g., an arrow "↓↓↓"), and the small symbol is variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The first and second reserved memory numbers, small symbols, and error display (not shown) indicating an error state that has occurred in the pachinko game machine 1 are displayed in front of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 (higher layer), preventing the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 from overlapping and reducing the visibility of the first reserved memory number, the second reserved memory number, small symbols, and error display. On the other hand, the decorative symbols are displayed behind the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 (lower layer), preventing the decorative symbols from overlapping and reducing the visibility of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200.

After the variable display starts, as shown in FIG. 17-25(B), if the variable display mode is set to the normal reach display mode, the normal reach presentation starts as a variable display presentation of the decorative pattern.

As shown in FIG. 17-25(C), at the start timing of the preview performance A when a predetermined time has elapsed since the normal reach display mode, the performance control CPU 120 displays the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 at the first specific initial display position, then moves it to the first specific performance display position (see FIG. 17-25(D)), and as shown in FIG. 17-25(E), executes the preview performance A suggesting that it will be controlled to a jackpot game state by lighting up the light-emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E in a display color corresponding to the pattern (any of PYA-1 to 4) determined in the preview performance type determination process of step 241SGS278A. In addition, an effect image Z60 for emphasizing the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 is displayed around the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 that has been moved to the first specific performance display position.

The effect image Z60 is displayed in a manner that corresponds to the light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E. For example, when the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E are displayed in white based on pattern PYA-1, the effect image Z60 is white and has a small display size, and when the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E are displayed in red based on pattern PYA-4, the effect image Z60 is red and preferably has a large display size according to the degree of expectation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 17-25 (F), the effect image Z60 is erased, and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position, and then the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is erased, thereby ending the preview performance A. After that, a reduced decorative pattern is displayed in a slightly larger form than the small pattern in the display area 5SR provided in the upper right corner of the display area of the image display device 5.

If it is decided not to execute development performance A in the development performance A type determination process of step 241SGS278B, as shown in FIG. 17-25(G), at the start timing of development performance A, the mounted movable body 32 is not dropped but is kept in the origin position, and a development notification image Z300 is displayed, and an effect image Z61A is displayed around it, to notify that it will develop into a weak super reach performance. If it is decided to execute development performance A, as shown in FIG. 17-25(H), at the start timing of development performance A, the mounted movable body solenoids 207L, 207R are turned on to drop the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the performance position, and an effect image Z61B different from the effect image Z61A for emphasizing the mounted movable body 32 is displayed around it, to notify that it will develop into a weak super reach performance.

In addition, in the characteristic section 241SG, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state is higher when the drop of the mounted movable body 32 is executed as development performance A than when it is not executed, but even if it has been decided not to execute development performance A (drop of the mounted movable body 32), the development notification image Z300 can be displayed to notify the player that the performance will progress to a weak super reach performance.

As shown in FIG. 17-26 (A), after the execution period of development performance A ends, the performance control CPU 120 starts the weak super reach performance by displaying the character image Z310, and displays the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 at the first specific initial display position, and then moves and displays it at the first specific performance display position, starting the development suggestion performance (see FIG. 17-26 (B)). At this time, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed so that a part of it overlaps with the front side of the character image Z310.

In addition, when the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved to the first specific display position as a development suggestion effect, the light-emitting display sections Z208A-Z208E are illuminated in white, and the button LED 62 of the push button 31B is lit up to encourage the operation of the push button 31B.

Next, as shown in FIG. 17-26(C), an effect image Z62 for emphasizing the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 is displayed around the second pseudo-movable object display Z200. Then, if one of the patterns (PS-2 to 4) is determined in the development suggestion performance type determination process of step 241SGS280, as shown in FIG. 17-26(D), the effect image Z62 is enlarged according to the number of repeated taps of the push button 31B during the effective operation period (the number of operations detected), and the light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E is changed every time a predetermined time has passed, thereby indicating that development performance B will be executed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 17-26(E), even after the effective operation period has ended, the light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E is maintained, and the background image is darkened to display a blackout. After that, a small-sized character image Z310 is displayed in the upper position of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 in the same color as the light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E when the effective operation period has ended, and an effect image Z63 for highlighting the character image Z310 is displayed (see FIG. 17-26(F)), the character image Z310 is temporarily erased while the effect image Z63 is displayed (see FIG. 17-26(G)), a medium-sized character image Z310 is then displayed (see FIG. 17-26(H)), the character image Z310 is temporarily erased while the effect image Z63 is displayed (see FIG. 17-26(I)), and then a large-sized character image Z310 is displayed (see FIG. 17-26(J)).

In addition, in Figures 17-26 (E) to (J), taking into consideration the appearance of the presentation, it is preferable to continue the illumination of the illumination display units Z208A to Z208E, but not to display the effect image Z62.

In this way, the character image Z310, which is the same color as the light-emitting display portions Z208A to Z208E, is displayed in a manner that gradually increases in size from the back of the screen to the front, and when small, medium, and large sized character images Z310 are displayed, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 17-26 (J) in FIG. 17-27, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is overlapped with at least a portion of the front side of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 in an area including the first specific performance display position of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, so that the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 can be seen through the overlapping area, thereby more appropriately enhancing anticipation for the execution of the development performance B.

In addition, since the character image Z310 is preferentially displayed in front of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, the display of the character image Z310 can appropriately suggest that development performance B will be executed, while diverting the player's attention from the fact that the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 will be erased without being moved to the first specific initial display position.

In addition, while the character image Z310 is displayed in a manner that gradually increases in size, it may also be displayed so as to overlap at least a portion of the front side of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 in an area including the first specific performance display position of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from the start of display. In addition, the effect image Z63 may also be displayed as a suggestion image so as to overlap at least a portion of the front side of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200.

Next, as shown in FIG. 17-27(A), while the large-sized character image Z310 is being displayed, the performance control CPU 120 erases (hides) the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 without moving it from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position. Specifically, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is hidden by being gradually faded out as a display to emphasize that it has been erased. After that, the large-sized character image Z310 is erased by being gradually faded out.

In the characteristic section 241SG, the performance control CPU 120 has exemplified a form in which, as shown in FIG. 17-27(A), the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is erased (hidden) without being moved from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position while the large-sized character image Z310 is being displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 may be erased (hidden) without being moved from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position while the character image Z310 is being displayed when the display of the character image Z310 is started, or when a predetermined time has elapsed since the display was started, as shown in FIG. 17-26(F).

Furthermore, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is not limited to being erased (hidden) without being moved from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position, but may be erased (hidden) by moving the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position while fading out.

After that, as shown in FIG. 17-27(B), at the start timing of the development performance B, the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 is displayed at the first specific initial display position. Here, if it is determined in the development performance B type determination process of step 241SGS281 that development performance B will not be executed, as shown in FIG. 17-27(C), the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 is erased without being moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position, and the reach title image Z51 described later is displayed in a predetermined form (for example, a form at the start of display with high transparency and low visibility), thereby announcing that the development will progress to a strong super reach.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 17-27(D), when it is decided to execute the development performance B, the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position to notify that it will develop into a strong super reach. At this time, as shown in the enlarged view, the light-emitting display parts Z208A-Z208E are illuminated in a predetermined color (e.g., white) when moving, and the rotating display part Z207 including the light-emitting display parts Z208A-Z208E is displayed in a manner that rotates clockwise when viewed from the front. In addition, an effect image Z65 for emphasizing the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is displayed around the second pseudo movable object display Z200 that has been moved to the first specific performance display position.

The light-emitting display colors of the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E in FIG. 17-27(D) are different from the development suggestion effects and do not indicate the likelihood of a jackpot, but are light-emitting display colors that correspond to the colors of the effect images Z65, etc., displayed on the image display device 5 as images of the weak reach effects.

Next, as shown in FIG. 17-27(E), the reach title image Z51 described later is displayed in a predetermined state (for example, a state at the start of display in which the transmittance is high and the visibility is low), and then, as shown in FIG. 17-27(F), the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is erased (hidden) without being moved from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 17-28(A), when the variable display mode is set to the super reach display mode, the performance control CPU 120 displays a reach title indicating the type of super reach performance and a reach title image Z51 indicating the expected jackpot probability, and notifies the player that the performance has progressed to the super reach performance. Next, the super reach performance (for example, a performance displaying an image Z52 in which an ally character and an enemy character battle (confront)) is started (see FIG. 17-28(B)). Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the super reach display mode was set, if the patterns KB-1 and KB-2 have been determined in the performance type determination process of step 241SGS282, that is, if the operation target is the push button 31B, an operation prompting image Z53 is displayed to prompt the player to press the push button 31B, as shown in FIG. 17-28(C). On the other hand, if the patterns KV-1 and KV-2 have been determined in the final performance type determination process of step 241SGS282, that is, if the operation target is the stick controller 31A, an operation prompting image Z54 is displayed to encourage the player to pull the stick controller 31A, as shown in FIG. 17-28(D).

When the operation prompt display is displayed during the operation effective period, at the timing when the push operation of the push button 31B (detection signal from the push sensor 35B) or the pull operation of the stick controller 31A (detection signal from the stick controller 31A) is detected, or at the timing when the operation effective period ends without detecting the push operation of the push button 31B or the pull operation of the stick controller 31A, if the variable display result is a jackpot, as shown in FIG. 17-29 (E), a movable body performance is executed in which the mounted movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the performance position in front of the display area, and the effect image Z55 is displayed. In addition, in response to the movement of the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the performance position, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speakers 8L, 8R, and the mounted movable body LED 208 is illuminated in a predetermined color (for example, rainbow color, etc.).

Effect image Z55 is an effect image including a plurality of glass fragment images displayed in a manner in which glass cracks and scatters, and is exemplified in a manner similar to effect image Z71 described below, but the present invention is not limited to this, and an effect image in a manner different from effect image Z71 may be used. For example, by displaying only a portion of the glass cracking and scattering into fragments, while leaving the remaining portion intact, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand what has happened over some time, even in a situation in which the mounted movable body 32 overlaps with effect image Z55 displayed on the image display device 5 and the display is difficult to see.

Furthermore, in effect image Z55, similar to effect image Z71 described below, by reflecting a portion of the mounted movable body 32 arranged in front of the image display device 5 in at least one of the multiple glass fragment images displayed in a scattering manner, the positional relationship between the mounted movable body 32 and the glass fragment image becomes clearer, thereby realizing a more three-dimensional display.

After that, the mounted movable body 32 is moved from the performance position to the origin position, and then, as shown in FIG. 17-29(F), an image Z56 is displayed indicating that the friendly character has won the battle against the enemy character, and then, as shown in FIG. 17-29(G), the combination of jackpot symbols is temporarily displayed to notify the player of a confirmed jackpot. Note that even if the combination of jackpot symbols is temporarily displayed, the small symbols remain variably displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 17-30(A), the performance control CPU 120 displays an effect image Z71 in which glass cracks and glass fragments scatter in the display area of the image display device 5, and displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 in the first initial display position. Then, as shown in FIG. 17-30(B), the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position, and the performance movable display units Z110A-Z110D are changed from the first performance display state to the second performance display state. In addition, in response to the movement of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speakers 8L, 8R, and the light-emitting display unit Z108A is illuminated in a predetermined color (e.g., rainbow color) in the same way as when the mounted movable body 32 is dropped in FIG. 17-29(E).

Here, the details of the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position described in Figures 17-30 (A) and (B) are described in Figure 17-31.

As shown in FIG. 17-31(A), the performance control CPU 120 displays an effect image Z71 including an image Z71A showing glass cracking and scattering into multiple pieces of glass in the display area of the image display device 5, and displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 in the first initial display position. The performance control CPU 120 displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 so that a portion of it is visible below the mounted movable body 32 held in the origin position. Then, as shown in FIG. 17-31(B), when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed in the first intermediate display position between the first initial display position and the first performance display position, the amount and movement display speed of the images Z71A showing the glass fragments are increased compared to the state shown in FIG. 17-31(A), and the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed in front of these images Z71A.

Next, as shown in Figures 17-31 (C) and (D), when the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 is displayed at the first performance display position, the amount and movement display speed of images Z71A showing glass fragments are further increased than in the state shown in Figure 17-31 (B), and these images Z71A are displayed in front of the first pseudo-movable object display Z100.

In this way, in response to the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100, an effect image Z71 for emphasizing the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed in a display area including the first initial display position, the first intermediate display position, and the first performance display position of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100, and only the image Z71A showing glass fragments in the effect image Z71 is displayed moving from the back side to the front side of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100, thereby not only creating a three-dimensional effect with the image Z71A scattering around, but also making the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 look as if it were a real structure.

Furthermore, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 17-31(C), the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can be displayed so as to be visible through one of the multiple images Z71A displayed in front of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100, or as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 17-31(D), a portion of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can be reflected and displayed in one of the multiple images Z71A displayed in front of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100, thereby making the positional relationship between the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the image Z71A clearer, thereby realizing a display with a more three-dimensional feel.

Also, as shown in FIG. 17-31 (D), the performance control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 to the first performance position, then changes the performance movable display units Z110A-Z110D from the first performance display state to the second performance display state, and executes the illumination of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the illumination display of the light-emitting display unit Z108A at approximately the same cycle.

In more detail, as shown in FIG. 17-32, after the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 moves to the first performance display position, the performance control CPU 120 repeats a blinking display pattern multiple times during the performance periods ta1 to ta4 during which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed at the first performance display position, in which the light-emitting display unit Z108A is illuminated for a first period ta1 to ta2 (e.g., 33 ms) and then hidden for a second period ta2 to ta3 (e.g., 33 ms), while repeating a blinking pattern multiple times during the performance periods ta1 to ta4 during which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed at the first performance display position, in which the mounted movable body LED 208 is illuminated for a first corresponding period (e.g., 30 ms) corresponding to the first period and then turned off for a second corresponding period (e.g., 40 ms) corresponding to the second period.

In this way, by executing (synchronizing) the illumination of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the illumination display of the light-emitting display unit Z108A at approximately the same cycle, the performance can be more appropriately enhanced. Even if it is difficult to accurately match (synchronize) the time during which the light-emitting display unit Z108A is illuminated (e.g., 33 ms) and the time during which the mounted movable body LED 208 is turned on (e.g., 30 ms) during the first period ta1-ta2, it is possible to prevent the deviation between the illumination display of the light-emitting display unit Z108A and the illumination of the mounted movable body LED 208 from becoming large over time, for example, by making the off period of the mounted movable body LED 208 longer than the on period.

In addition, during the performance periods ta1 to ta4, a vibration performance may be executed in which the vibration motor 61 is driven to vibrate the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A. In this way, the performance can be made more exciting. The driving of the vibration motor 61 may be synchronized with the light-emitting display of the light-emitting display unit Z108A and the lighting of the mounted movable body LED 208.

Returning to FIG. 17-30(C), the performance control CPU 120 returns the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the second performance display state to the first performance display state, ends the reduced display of the decorative symbols, and temporarily stops and displays them in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Then, as shown in FIG. 17-30(D), the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves upward, and as shown in FIG. 17-30(E), it moves and displays them to the first performance display position and then erases them. Then, the combination of confirmed decorative symbols is stopped and the small symbols are also stopped and displayed in the combination of jackpot symbols.

In this way, after executing the effect of dropping the mounted movable body 32 to notify the player of a confirmed jackpot, the effect of moving the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is executed, allowing the player to more effectively experience the feeling that the game is being controlled into a jackpot gaming state.

Returning to FIG. 17-29, when the operation effective period during which the operation prompt display is displayed is detected, at the timing when a single push operation of the push button 31B (detection signal from the push sensor 35B) or a single pull operation of the stick controller 31A (detection signal from the stick controller 31A) is detected, or at the timing when the operation effective period ends without detecting a single push operation of the push button 31B or a single pull operation of the stick controller 31A, if the variable display result is a miss, as shown in FIG. 17-29(H), the movable body performance of dropping the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position above the display area of the image display device 5 to the performance position in front of the display area is not executed, and an effect image Z57 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 17-29(I), an image Z58 indicating that the friendly character has lost the battle with the enemy character is displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 17-29(J), a miss pattern combination is displayed as a stop to notify the confirmed miss. Also, in synchronization with the stop display of the miss pattern combination, the small patterns are displayed as the miss pattern combination.

For example, a difference in scale will occur between when push button 31B is operated at the start of the valid operation period and when push button 31B is not operated during the valid operation period. Therefore, the difference in scale that occurs at the timing of operating push button 31B may be absorbed by extending or shortening any of the following periods: 1. the period during which the decorative pattern shakes until the pattern is determined; 2. the display period of images Z55 to Z58; or 3. the performance period of the movable body performance.

(Example of Super Reach γ performance)
Next, an example of the performance of the Super Reach γ will be described with reference to Fig. 17-33 to Fig. 17-34. Fig. 17-33 (A) to (F) are diagrams showing an example of the performance of the advance notice performance B in the Super Reach γ. Fig. 17-34 (A) to (F) are diagrams showing an example of the performance of the advance notice performance B in the Super Reach γ.

Below, we will explain an example of the performance of preview performance B executed in the normal reach performance in the Super Reach γ fluctuation pattern. The flow from the start of the variable display to the start of the normal reach performance is the same as that of Super Reach β, so we will not explain it here. Note that Super Reach γ is a fluctuation pattern that is selected only when the game state is in a high base state.

As shown in FIG. 17-33(A), when pattern PYB-1 is determined in the preview performance type determination process of step 241SGS278B, the performance control CPU 120 executes the preview performance B, which suggests that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state, by displaying the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 at the second specific initial display position at the start timing of the preview performance B when a predetermined time has elapsed since the normal reach display mode was set, and then moving and displaying it at the second intermediate performance display position (see FIG. 17-33(B)). In addition, an effect image Z81 is displayed around the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 that has been moved and displayed at the second intermediate performance display position to highlight the second pseudo-movable object display Z200.

The second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed overlapping the front side of the decorative pattern variably displayed in the decorative pattern display area 5L at the second intermediate performance display position, making it difficult to see the decorative pattern variably displayed in the decorative pattern display area 5L.

Then, as shown in FIG. 17-33(C), the performance control CPU 120 erases (hides) the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 without moving it from the second intermediate performance display position to the second specific initial display position.

As shown in FIG. 17-33(D), when pattern PYB-2 is determined in the preview performance type determination process of step 241SGS278B, the performance control CPU 120 executes the preview performance B, which suggests that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state, by displaying the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 at the second specific initial display position at the start timing of the preview performance B when a predetermined time has elapsed since the normal reach display mode was set, and then moving and displaying it at the second specific performance display position (see FIG. 17-33(E)). In addition, an effect image Z81 is displayed around the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 that has been moved and displayed at the second specific performance display position to highlight the second pseudo-movable object display Z200.

The second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed overlapping the front side of the decorative pattern variably displayed in the decorative pattern display area 5C at the second specific performance display position, making it difficult to see the decorative pattern variably displayed in the decorative pattern display area 5C.

Then, as shown in FIG. 17-33 (F), the performance control CPU 120 erases (hides) the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 without moving it from the second specific performance display position to the second specific initial display position.

As shown in FIG. 17-34(A), when pattern PYB-3 is determined in the preview performance type determination process of step 241SGS278B, the performance control CPU 120 executes the preview performance B, which suggests that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state, by displaying the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 at the first initial display position at the start of the preview performance B when a predetermined time has elapsed since the normal reach display mode was selected, and then moving and displaying it at the first performance display position (see FIG. 17-34(B)). In addition, an effect image Z82 is displayed around the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 that has been moved and displayed at the first performance display position to highlight the first pseudo-movable object display Z100.

The first pseudo movable body display Z100 is displayed overlapping the front side of the decorative patterns variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R at the first performance display position, making it difficult to see some of the decorative patterns variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Then, as shown in FIG. 17-34 (C), the performance control CPU 120 erases (hides) the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 without moving it from the first performance display position to the first initial display position.

As shown in FIG. 17-34(D), when pattern PYB-4 is determined in the preview performance type determination process of step 241SGS278B, the performance control CPU 120 executes the preview performance B, which suggests that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state, by displaying the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 at the second initial display position at the start of the preview performance B when a predetermined time has elapsed since the normal reach display mode was selected, and then moving and displaying it at the second performance display position (see FIG. 17-34(E)). In addition, an effect image Z82 is displayed around the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 that has been moved and displayed at the second performance display position to highlight the first pseudo-movable object display Z100.

The first pseudo movable body display Z100 is displayed overlapping the front side of the decorative patterns variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R at the second performance display position, making it difficult to see some of the decorative patterns variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Then, as shown in FIG. 17-34 (F), the performance control CPU 120 erases (hides) the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 without moving it from the second performance display position to the second initial display position.

(Pseudo moving object display and moving object)
Next, the pseudo movable body display and the movable body will be described based on Fig. 17-35 to Fig. 17-40. Fig. 17-35 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display with a non-mounted movable body. Fig. 17-36 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display with a non-mounted movable body. Fig. 17-37 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display with a non-mounted movable body. Fig. 17-38 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display with a non-mounted movable body. Fig. 17-39 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display with a non-mounted movable body. Fig. 17-40 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the first pseudo movable body display with the second pseudo movable body display.

As shown in FIG. 17-35, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is a pseudo movable body display that imitates the first non-mounted movable body M100, which differs from the mounted movable body 32 in shape, weight, drive mechanism, etc., as described in FIG. 17-14 (B), but the first initial display position and the origin position of the mounted movable body 32 are both approximately the same position at the top of the display area of the image display device 5, and the first performance display position and the performance position of the mounted movable body 32 are both positions lower than the first initial display position and the origin position, so the direction of movement from the first initial display position to the first performance display position and the direction of movement of the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the performance position are both downward. In other words, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the mounted movable body 32 are both movable downward from the first initial display position and the origin position at the top of the display area of the image display device 5.

As explained in Figure 17-16, the moving display distance L2 from the first initial display position of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to the first performance display position is longer than the moving distance L1 from the origin position of the mounted movable body 32 to the performance position (L2>L1).

As shown in Figures 17-35 (A') to (C'), the mounted movable body 32 takes approximately 300 ms to fall (move) under its own weight from the upper origin position through the intermediate position to the lower performance position, whereas the first pseudo movable body display Z100 takes approximately 100 ms to move from the first initial display position through the first intermediate display position to the first performance display position, as shown in Figures 17-35 (A) to (C). In other words, the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position has a longer movement display distance and is faster than the movement of the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the performance position.

In this way, when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100, which imitates the first non-mounted movable body M100, can be displayed moving in the same direction from approximately the same position as the mounted movable body 32 as a structure that can move in the same direction as the first non-mounted movable body M100 (e.g., downward), the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position can be made faster than the movement of the mounted movable body 32 from its origin position to its performance position, thereby making it possible to produce an impactful performance that is faster than the movement of the mounted movable body 32 that is actually mounted, thereby surprising the player.

Next, as shown in Figures 17-36 (A') and (B'), the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is a display that imitates the first non-mounted movable body M100, which, when moved from the first origin position to the first performance position that is lower than the first origin position, stops as the mechanical part M100B abuts against the upper part of the movable body M106 and restricts downward movement, and performs a recoil action (bounce) of a predetermined amount of movement due to the vibration that occurs when the movement is restricted.

As a result, as shown in Figures 17-36 (A) and (B), when the performance control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position and stops and displays it at the first performance display position, it performs a recoil action display (bounce display) of a specific amount of movement.

More specifically, the first non-mounted movable body M100 has a cantilever structure in which only the left side of the performance part M100A is supported by the drive mechanism M101, and when it moves to the first performance position, the mechanism part M100B abuts against the upper part of the moving body M106, restricting downward movement, so that a recoil action due to vibration occurs in the mechanism part M100B before the performance part M100A, and then the vibration is transmitted to the performance part M100A, causing a recoil action.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 17-36 (B1), when the performance control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 to the first performance display position, it first displays the recoil action of the mechanism unit M100B, and then displays the recoil action of the performance unit M100A, as shown in FIG. 17-36 (B2). By doing this, it is possible to move and display the first pseudo-movable body display Z100, which imitates the first non-mounted movable body M100, which is different from the mounted movable body 32, in a more realistic manner (for example, a manner different from the display imitating the mounted movable body 32).

As shown in Figures 17-36 (C') and (D'), the mounted movable body 32 is structured so that the left and right sides of the performance part 32A are supported by the drive mechanisms 101L and 101R, and when it moves to the performance position, the mechanism part 32B comes into contact with the upper parts of the left and right moving bodies 206, restricting downward movement, and a recoil action of a predetermined amount of movement is performed due to the vibrations that occur when the movement is restricted.

Next, we will explain the operation of the mounted movable body 32 and the first pseudo movable body during the final performance.

As explained in Figures 17-28 to 17-30, the presentation control CPU 120 executes a movable body presentation in which the mounted movable body 32 is dropped from the origin position to the presentation position during the execution period (ta0 to ta10) of the deciding presentation, and then notifies the player of a confirmed jackpot, and then executes a pseudo-movable body display in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first presentation display position.

In more detail, as shown in FIG. 17-37(A), the presentation control CPU 120 starts the deciding presentation at timing ta0, and then drops the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the presentation position at timing ta1 when it detects the operation of the stick controller 31A or push button 31B by the player within the effective operation period. The mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the presentation position during the period TL1 (e.g., about 300 ms) from timing ta1 to ta2, and then performs a recoil action during the period ta2 to ta3 (e.g., about 700 ms).

Then, at timing ta4, the mounted movable body 32 is moved (raised) from the presentation position to the origin position, and a jackpot confirmation notification is issued. Here, the period TL3 (e.g., about 1000 ms) from timing ta4 to ta5 during which the mounted movable body 32 moves from the presentation position to the origin position is longer than the period TL1 (e.g., about 300 ms) from timing ta1 to ta2 during which the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the presentation position. In other words, the speed at which the mounted movable body 32 moves from the presentation position to the origin position is slower than the speed at which the mounted movable body 32 moves (falls) from the origin position to the presentation position.

In this way, in a performance using the mounted movable body 32, which is a structure, when the mounted movable body 32 is moved from the origin position to the performance position in response to detection of the player's operation, it is possible to give an impact to the player by having it fall quickly under its own weight, while when the mounted movable body 32 is moved from the performance position to the origin position, it is possible to prevent the mounted movable body 32 from being damaged by impact by moving it slowly.

Then, at timing ta6, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the big win confirmation notification, the presentation control CPU 120 displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 in the first initial display position, and during the period TL2 from timing ta6 to ta7 (e.g., about 100 ms), moves it from the first initial display position to the first presentation display position, and then performs a recoil action display during the period ta7 to ta8 (e.g., about 900 ms).

After that, at timing ta9, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved (raised) from the first performance display position to the first initial display position, and then the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is erased. Here, the period TL4 (e.g., about 1000 ms) from timing ta9 to ta10 during which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the first performance display position to the first initial display position is longer than the period TL2 (e.g., about 100 ms) from timing ta6 to ta7 during which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position. In other words, the speed at which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first performance display position to the first initial display position is slower than the speed at which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position.

In this way, by making the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position faster than the movement display from the first performance display position to the first initial display position, in the same way as the mounted movable body 32, it is possible to make the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 move in a more realistic manner.

Also, as shown in FIG. 17-37(B), when comparing the amount of movement L2 (movement display distance L2) per unit time (e.g., TL2) when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position, and the amount of movement L1A per unit time (e.g., TL2) when the mounted movable body 32 is moved from the origin position to the performance position, the amount of movement L2 per unit time TL2 of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is greater than the amount of movement L1A per unit time TL2 of the mounted movable body 32. In other words, the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is faster than the movement of the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the performance position. In this way, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can perform an impactful performance faster than the movement of the mounted movable body 32, which can give the player a surprise.

Also, as shown in FIG. 17-37(C), the movement amount L12 of the first recoil action display performed when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is greater than the movement amount L11 of the first recoil action display performed when the mounted movable body 32 is moved from the origin position to the performance position. Also, the number of times the first pseudo movable body display Z100 displays the recoil action (e.g., six times) is greater than the number of times the mounted movable body 32 displays the recoil action (e.g., four times). In this way, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can simulate a performance similar to that of the first non-mounted movable body M100 without mounting the first non-mounted movable body M100, and by displaying the recoil action that occurs when the first non-mounted movable body M100 moves to the first performance position in an exaggerated manner, a performance that leaves an impression on the player can be provided.

Also, as shown in Figures 17-38 (A) and (B), the movement display distance L2 of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is the same as the movement display distance L2 of the first non-mounted movable body M100 from the first origin position to the first performance position, and the period TL2 during which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is shorter than the period TL10 during which the first non-mounted movable body M100 is moved from the first origin position to the first performance position (TL2 < TL10). Therefore, the movement amount L2 per unit time (e.g., TL2) when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is greater than the movement amount per unit time (e.g., TL2) when the first non-mounted movable body M100 is moved from the first origin position to the first performance position. In other words, the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is faster than the movement of the first non-mounted movable body M100 from the first origin position to the first performance position. By doing this, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can create an impactful performance that is faster than the movement of the first non-mounted movable body M100, which can surprise the player.

Also, as shown in FIG. 17-38(C), the amount of movement L12 of the first recoil action display that occurs when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is greater than the amount of movement L11 of the first recoil action display that occurs when the mounted movable body 32 is moved from the origin position to the performance position, and the amount of movement L13 of the first recoil action display that occurs when the first non-mounted movable body M100 is moved from the first origin position to the first performance position. Also, the number of times the recoil action is displayed of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 (e.g., six times) is greater than the number of times the recoil action is displayed of the mounted movable body 32 and the first non-mounted movable body M100 (e.g., four times). In this way, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can simulate an effect similar to that of the first non-mounted movable body M100 or the mounted movable body 32 without mounting the first non-mounted movable body M100, and by displaying in an exaggerated manner the recoil action that occurs when the first non-mounted movable body M100 moves to the first performance position or when the mounted movable body 32 moves to the performance position, it is possible to provide an effect that leaves a lasting impression on the player.

In addition, in the characteristic part 241SG, the comparison between the predetermined movement amount in the recoil action of the mounted movable body 32 or the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the specific movement amount in the recoil action display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is a comparison between the first recoil action and the recoil action display, but it may be a comparison between any of the second or subsequent recoil actions and the recoil action display, or a comparison between the total or average movement amount of multiple recoil actions and the total or average movement amount of the recoil action display.

The recoil action has been exemplified as an action in which the movable body jumps upward due to the recoil when it stops at the second position, but it also includes deformation or vibration of a specific part of the movable body due to the recoil.

Next, as shown in FIG. 17-39(A), when the mounted movable body 32 is moved from the performance position to the origin position, or when the first non-mounted movable body M100 is moved from the first performance position to the first origin position, a driving source such as the mounted movable body motors 202L, 202R, and M101 is used, so the performance control CPU 120 increases the control speed of the mounted movable body 32 and the first non-mounted movable body M100 during a first period from timing tb1 when the movement starts to timing tb2, keeps it constant during a period from timing tb2 to timing tb3, and decreases it during a second period from timing tb3 to timing tb4. In other words, the mounted movable body 32 and the first non-mounted movable body M100 accelerate from the start of movement until the first period has elapsed, then move at a constant speed, and decelerate and stop during a second period just before the stop position.

In contrast, the speed at which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 are displayed is constant from the time tb1 when the movement starts to the time tb4 when the movement stops, as shown in Figure 17-39 (B), and a first period for accelerating the display of the movement and a second period for decelerating the display of the movement are not required, so the display of the movement of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 can be performed more smoothly than the movement of the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the mounted movable body 32.

Next, the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 will be explained using Figure 17-40.

As shown in Figures 17-40 (A) to (C), when creating a video in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position, at least a first frame, which is an input image for displaying the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 at the first initial display position, and a second frame, which is an input image for displaying the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 at the first performance display position, are required.

On the other hand, as shown in Figures 17-40 (A') to (B'), when creating a video in which the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved from a first specific initial display position to a first specific performance display position, at least a first frame, which is an input image for displaying the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 at the first specific initial display position, and a second frame, which is an input image for displaying the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 at the first specific performance display position, are required.

As explained in FIG. 17-16, the moving display distance L2 is the moving display distance from the first initial display position of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to the first performance display position, and the moving display distance L3 is the moving display distance L2 from the first specific initial display position of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 to the first specific performance display position. The moving display distance L2 is longer than the moving display distance L3, but the time required to move the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is about 100 ms, while the time required to move the second pseudo movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first performance display position is about 800 ms, so the moving display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is faster than the moving display of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first performance display position.

Here, when the performance control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position, it is possible to display the first frame shown in FIG. 17-40(A) and then the second frame shown in FIG. 17-40(C) in that order, but this would result in a low frame rate and a jerky, unnatural movement.

Therefore, one interpolation frame shown in FIG. 17-40 (B) is inserted between the first and second frames as an input image for displaying the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 at the first intermediate display position, thereby increasing the number of frames in the video and raising the frame rate, and the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is performed in the order of the first initial display position, the first intermediate display position, and the first performance display position for each display frame, thereby enabling a natural and smooth movement display.

In this way, even when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed moving at high speed from the first initial display position to the first performance display position, by inserting at least one interpolation frame between the first frame and the second frame to achieve a natural and smooth moving display, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can be displayed moving quickly without reducing visibility.

On the other hand, when the performance control CPU 120 moves and displays the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position, it is also possible to display the first frame shown in FIG. 17-40 (A') and then the second frame shown in FIG. 17-40 (B'), but this would result in a lower frame rate and a jerky, unnatural movement.

Therefore, between the first and second frames, multiple interpolation frames (not shown) are inserted as input images for displaying the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 at multiple first intermediate display positions between the first specific initial display position and the first specific performance display position, thereby increasing the number of frames of the video and increasing the frame rate to achieve a natural and smooth moving display, and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed moving from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position in the order of the first specific initial display position, each of the first intermediate display positions, and the first specific performance display position for each display frame, thereby making it possible to display the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 moving at a slower speed than the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 without reducing visibility.

In addition, for example, in the preview performance B, when pattern PBY-3 in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position or pattern PBY-4 in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the second initial display position to the second performance display position is executed, and when pattern PBY-1 or PBY-2 in which the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved from the second specific initial display position to the second specific performance display position or the second intermediate performance display position is executed, the rate at which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 are controlled to the jackpot game state at different rates can be recognized by the difference in the speed of the movement display.

In addition, when pattern PBY-3 in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position or pattern PBY-4 in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the second initial display position to the second performance display position is executed, the rate at which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is controlled to a jackpot state (expected jackpot probability) is higher than when patterns PBY-1 and PBY-2 in which the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved from the second specific initial display position to the second specific performance display position or the second intermediate performance display position are executed, which allows attention to be drawn to the moving display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100.

In addition, in the characteristic section 241SG, an example is given of a form in which a recoil action display (bounce display) of a predetermined amount of movement is performed when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed on the image display device 5 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position and then stopped and displayed at the first performance display position, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in Figures 17-34 (D) to (E), when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed on the image display device 5 from the second initial display position to the second performance display position and then stopped and displayed at the second performance display position, a recoil action display (bounce display) of a predetermined amount of movement may be performed.

In addition, as shown in Figures 17-33 (A) to (B), when the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed on the image display device 5 from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate performance display position and stopped at the second intermediate performance display position, or as shown in Figures 17-33 (D) to (E), when the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed on the image display device 5 from the second specific initial display position to the second specific performance display position and stopped at the second specific performance display position, a recoil action display (bounce display) of a predetermined amount of movement may be performed.

Furthermore, it is preferable that the recoil action display performed when the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate display position or the second specific display position in the preview performance B has a larger amount of movement than the recoil action display performed when the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific display position in the preview performance A. By doing this, the amount of movement in the preview performance B is larger than that of the preview performance A, so that the movement can be displayed in a more realistic manner.

In addition, it is preferable that the recoil action display that occurs when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first performance display position in pattern PBY-3 of the preview performance B or after the jackpot announcement in the deciding performance is greater in amount of movement than the recoil action display that occurs when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the second initial display position to the second performance display position in pattern PBY-4 of the preview performance B. By doing this, the recoil action display is larger when it moves downward than when it moves upward, so it is possible to display the movement in a more realistic manner.

(Action and Effects)
As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic portion 241SG, the direction in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first performance position and the direction in which the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the performance position are both downward directions, and the movement amount L2 of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 per unit time TL2 is greater than the movement amount L1A of the mounted movable body 32 per unit time TL2.
According to this feature, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can produce an impactful effect that is faster than the movement of the mounted movable body 32, thereby surprising the player.
In addition, it is possible to display movement at a speed that is difficult to achieve with the mounted movable body 32, or at a plurality of speeds, thereby enabling diversification of the presentation.

In addition, in the characteristic section 241SG, an example is given of a form in which the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is compared with the speed of movement of the mounted movable body 32, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be a comparison of the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 with the speed of movement of the first non-mounted movable body M100, or a comparison of the movement display of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 with the speed of movement of the second non-mounted movable body M200. In other words, as long as the comparison is between the movement display of the pseudo movable body display and the speed of movement of the movable body, the type of pseudo movable body display and the movable body to be compared may be changed arbitrarily.

In addition, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is a display imitating the first non-mounted movable body M100 which performs a recoil action of a predetermined amount when moved from the first origin position to the first performance position, and the performance control CPU 120 is capable of moving and displaying the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 in the vertical direction between a first initial display position corresponding to the first origin position and a first performance display position corresponding to the first performance position on the image display device 5, and when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first performance display position and then stopped and displayed at the first performance display position, a recoil action display (bounce display) of a predetermined amount of movement is performed, and the amount of movement L12 of the first recoil action display performed when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is greater than the amount of movement L13 of the first recoil action display performed when the first non-mounted movable body M100 is moved and displayed from the first origin position to the first performance position.
According to this feature, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 makes it possible to simulate an effect similar to that of the first non-mounted movable body M100 without mounting the first non-mounted movable body M100, and by displaying in an exaggerated manner the recoil action that occurs when the first non-mounted movable body M100 moves to the first effect position, it is possible to provide an effect that will leave a lasting impression on the player.

In the characteristic section 241SG, an example is given of a form in which the recoil action display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is compared with the amount of movement of the recoil action of the first non-mounted movable body M100, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may also be a comparison of the recoil action display of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 with the amount of movement of the recoil action of the second non-mounted movable body M200, or a comparison of the recoil action display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 or the second pseudo movable body display Z200 with the recoil action of the mounted movable body 32. In other words, as long as the comparison is between the amount of movement of the recoil action display of the pseudo movable body display and the recoil action of the movable body, the type of pseudo movable body display and the movable body to be compared may be changed arbitrarily.

In addition, during the variable display period of the pattern based on the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach β or Super Reach γ, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state (jackpot expectation) is higher when development performance A using the mounted movable body 32 and development performance B using the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 are executed than when development performance B is executed without execution of development performance A.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the execution of development performance A, which is a movable body performance, and development performance B, which is a pseudo-movable body display performance.
In addition, when development performance A using the mounted movable body 32 and development performance B using the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 are executed, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state is higher than when development performance A is not executed and development performance B is executed, this includes being controlled to a jackpot game state 100% of the time when development performance A and development performance B are executed.

In addition, it is possible to execute a preview performance A which predicts the possibility (expectation level) that the variable display result will be a jackpot, a development performance B which notifies that it will develop into a strong super reach performance, and a development suggestion performance which suggests the possibility that the development performance B will be executed. In the preview performance A, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the first specific performance display position to the first specific performance display position, and then moved and displayed from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position, and then hidden. In the development performance B, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed at the first specific performance display position, and then hidden without moving and displaying from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position. When the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 displayed at the first specific performance display position before executing the development performance B and displayed at the first specific initial display position is hidden, a character image Z310 can be displayed in the display area including the first specific performance display position.
According to this feature, in the preview performance A, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed moving in the same way as a movable body as a structure, so that the player can focus on whether or not it will be controlled to an advantageous state without feeling any discomfort, while in the development suggestion performance, the display of the character image Z310 is prioritized over the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 being displayed moving in the same way as a movable body, and the character image Z310 is hidden without returning from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position, so that the player can focus on the suggestion of the execution of the development performance B.

In addition, it is possible to execute a deciding effect which notifies the player whether or not the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state, and a development effect B which notifies the player that the deciding effect will be executed by developing into a strong super reach effect. When the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed in the development effect B, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position, and then is made invisible without being moved and displayed from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position, and the state at the start of the display of the reach title image Z51 which suggests the execution of the development effect B can be displayed in a display area including the first specific effect display position. When the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed in the deciding effect, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, and then is made invisible.
According to this feature, before the deciding performance is executed, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 prioritizes displaying the suggestive image over displaying it in the same way as a movable body as a structure, and is hidden without returning it from the second display position to the first display position, so that the player can be drawn to the suggestion of the execution of the deciding performance.On the other hand, during the deciding performance, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed moving in the same way as a movable body, so that the player can be drawn to the notification of content that is advantageous to the player without feeling uncomfortable.
In addition, in the characteristic section 241SG, an example is given of a form in which the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed in the development performance B (specific performance), and the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed in the deciding performance (special performance), but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to move a pseudo-movable body display that is common to the specific performance and the special performance.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 performs the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position for each display frame in the order of the first initial display position, the first intermediate display position, and the first performance display position, and can display a specific image that emphasizes the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 (for example, an effect image Z71 in which glass cracks and image Z71A showing multiple glass fragments scatters) in a display area including the first initial display position, the first intermediate display position, and the first performance display position.
According to this feature, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can be displayed moving quickly without reducing visibility, and the moving display can be emphasized with a specific image to make a good impression on the player.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 performs the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position in the order of the first initial display position, the first intermediate display position, and the first performance display position for each display frame, and the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is faster than the movement display of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position, in the preview performance B. The rate at which the jackpot state is controlled (the probability of a jackpot) differs between when pattern PBY-3 in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position or pattern PBY-4 in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the second initial display position to the second performance display position is executed and when patterns PBY-1 or PBY-2 in which the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved from the second specific initial display position to the second specific performance display position or the second intermediate performance display position is executed.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 or the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed as moving, and it is also possible for the player to recognize that the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, which have different proportions of being controlled to a jackpot game state, are displayed at different speeds of movement.
In addition, in the preview performance B, when the pattern PBY-3 in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position or the pattern PBY-4 in which the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved from the second specific performance display position to the second specific performance display position or the second intermediate performance display position is executed, the rate at which the pseudo movable body display Z200 is controlled to the jackpot state (the probability of winning) is different. This includes cases where the rate of being controlled to the jackpot state is 100% when pattern PBY-3 or pattern PBY-4 is executed, and the rate of being controlled to the jackpot game state is 0% when pattern PBY-1 or pattern PBY-2 is executed, and cases where the rate of being controlled to the jackpot game state is 100% when pattern PBY-1 or pattern PBY-2 is executed in the preview performance B, and the rate of being controlled to the jackpot game state is 0% when pattern PBY-3 or pattern PBY-4 is executed.

In addition, by making the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 display images having not only the performance display parts Z100A, Z200A but also the mechanism display parts Z100B, Z200B, etc., it is possible to more realistically represent the movable body operated by the drive mechanism and realize a movable body display performance similar to a movable body performance, while with regard to the movement display, it is possible not only to display the movement in a manner similar to the movement of the movable body, but also to display the movement in a manner that is difficult to realize with a movable body due to reasons such as the mechanism becoming complicated or the cost becoming high, thereby suitably improving the interest of the performance.

Furthermore, in characteristic section 241SG, examples of movement display in a manner that is difficult to achieve with a movable body include high-speed movement, deformed display, and erasing (not displaying) the display without returning from the performance display position to the initial display position. However, by realistically expressing the display manner of the pseudo-movable body display while displaying the movement display unrealistically, it is possible to provide a surprising performance.

In particular, the pseudo-movable body display that has been moved to the performance display position can be made invisible or visible at the desired timing, which has the effect of increasing the freedom of performance design, for example by avoiding a decrease in visibility due to other performance images being hidden when the movable body as a structure that has been moved to the performance position is returned to the origin position, making it possible to start the next performance immediately.

In addition, the amount of movement L12 of the first recoil action display that occurs when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is greater than the amount of movement L13 of the first recoil action display that occurs when the first non-mounted movable body M100 is moved from the first origin position to the first performance position. This makes it possible to simulate a performance similar to that of the first non-mounted movable body M100 by using the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 without mounting the first non-mounted movable body M100, and by displaying the recoil action that occurs when the first non-mounted movable body M100 is moved to the first performance position in an exaggerated manner, it is possible to provide a performance that leaves an impression on the player.

In addition, the moving display distance L2 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is longer than the moving distance L1 from the origin position to the performance position, so the first pseudo movable body display Z100 has a faster moving speed and a longer moving distance than the mounted movable body 32, and therefore can provide a performance that leaves a lasting impression on the player.

The pseudo-movable body display also includes performance display units Z100A, Z200A and mechanism display units Z100B, Z200B, and in the movement display of the pseudo-movable body display, the mechanism display units Z100B, Z200B reach the first performance display position before the performance display units Z100A, Z200A, allowing the pseudo-movable body display to be displayed moving in a more realistic manner.

In addition, the movement amount L2 of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 per unit time TL2 is greater than the movement amount L1A of the mounted movable body 32 per unit time TL2, so that the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can be displayed moving in a more realistic manner.

In addition, the period of movement of the mounted movable body 32 between the origin position and the performance position includes a first period in which the speed increases and a second period in which the speed decreases, and the period of movement display of the pseudo movable body display does not include the first period and the second period, so that the movement display of the pseudo movable body display can be performed more smoothly than the movement of the movable body.

In addition, after the presentation control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 to the first presentation position, it executes the illumination of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the illumination display of the light-emitting display unit Z108A at approximately the same cycle, thereby drawing the player's attention to the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 that has been moved and displayed to the first presentation display position.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 does not illuminate the light-emitting display unit Z108A when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is being displayed moving, thereby making the incomplete first pseudo-movable body display Z100 that is being displayed moving less noticeable, thereby preventing a decrease in the performance effect.

In addition, after the performance control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 to the first performance position, it executes the illumination of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the illumination display of the light-emitting display unit Z108A at approximately the same cycle, thereby making it possible to move and display the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 in a more realistic manner.

In addition, the presentation control CPU 120 can move and display the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate presentation display position or the second specific presentation display position, and the downward direction in which the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific presentation display position in the preview presentation A is different from the right direction in which the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second specific presentation display position in the preview presentation B. This makes it possible to move and display one pseudo-movable body display from multiple display positions, thereby providing the player with a surprising presentation that is difficult to achieve with a movable body.

In addition, the presentation control CPU 120 can move the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first presentation display position, and then move it in a direction different from the direction in which it moves from the first initial display position to the first presentation display position, thereby providing the player with a surprising presentation that would be difficult to achieve with a movable body.

(Variation 1)
Next, a first modified example of the characteristic portion 241SG will be described with reference to Fig. 17-41. Fig. 17-41 (A) to (D) are diagrams showing a first modified example of the characteristic portion 241SG.

As explained in FIG. 17-25, in the characteristic part 241SG, in the preview performance A, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position, then moved and displayed from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position, and then erased, and then, as the development performance A, the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the performance position.

Here, as shown in FIG. 17-41 (D), when the movable range of the mounted movable body 32 and the movable range of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 overlap in part, that is, when the mounted movable body 32 that has been moved to the performance position overlaps with the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 that has been moved and displayed at the first specific performance display position, if the performance control CPU 120 executes the movement of the mounted movable body 32 to the performance position and the movement and display of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 to the first specific performance display position during a common period, the mounted movable body 32 overlaps in front of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, making it difficult to see the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, making it easy to see that the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is a display body and not a structure, reducing the interest of the performance.

In such a case, as shown in FIG. 17-41(A), the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed at the first specific initial display position, and then moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position (see FIG. 17-41(B)), and then erased without moving from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position (see FIG. 17-41(C)). This avoids the mounted movable body 32, which has moved from the origin position to the performance position as advanced performance A, from overlapping with the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, as shown in FIG. 17-41(D).

(Variation 2)
Next, a second modified example of the characteristic portion 241SG will be described with reference to Fig. 17-42. Fig. 17-42 (A) to (H) are diagrams showing a second modified example of the characteristic portion 241SG.

In the characteristic portion 241SG, a form has been exemplified in which the direction in which the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the performance position and the direction in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves and displays from the first initial display position to the first performance display position are the same direction (downward), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in a case in which the direction in which the mounted movable body 401 as modified example 2 moves between the first position and a second position lower than the first position and the direction in which the pseudo movable body display Z402 as modified example 2 moves and displays between the first display position and a second display position higher than the first display position are the same direction (for example, up and down), it is sufficient that the movement display of the pseudo movable body display Z402 from the first display position to the second display position is faster than the movement of the mounted movable body 401 from the first position to the second position.

In addition, the direction in which the mounted movable body 401 moves from the first position to the second position (downward) and the direction in which the pseudo movable body display Z402 moves from the first initial display position to the first performance display position (upward) may be different directions.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 241SG, the movement of the mounted movable body 32 and the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 are not executed in a common period, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as in this modified example 2, the movement of the mounted movable body 401 and the movement display of the pseudo movable body display Z402 may be executed in a common period, making it possible to execute a performance using the mounted movable body 401 and the pseudo movable body display Z402.

To be more specific, as shown in FIG. 17-42, the mounted movable body 401 as modified example 2 is a structure on which the character "合" is displayed, and is movable between a first position at the top of the display area of the image display device 5 and a second position below the first position, the mounted movable bodies 501L and 501R as modified example 2 are movable between a first predetermined position on the left or right side of the display area of the image display device 5 and a second predetermined position closer to the center than the first predetermined position, and the pseudo movable body display Z402 as modified example 2 is capable of displaying the character "体" and is movable and displayed between a first display position at the bottom of the display area of the image display device 5 and a second display position above the first display position. Note that detailed illustrations and descriptions of the drive mechanisms of the mounted movable body 401 and the mounted movable bodies 501L and 501R are omitted.

For example, when the performance control CPU 120 executes a performance using the mounted movable bodies 401, 501L, 501R and the pseudo-movable body display Z402 in the above-mentioned preview performances A and B or development performances A and B, it first waits at the first position as shown in FIG. 17-42(A), displays the pseudo-movable body display Z402 at the first display position as shown in FIG. 17-42(B), and then moves and displays the pseudo-movable body display Z402 from the first display position to the second display position as shown in FIG. 17-42(C).

Next, as shown in FIG. 17-42 (D), the mounted movable body 401 is moved from the first position toward the second position. Then, when the mounted movable body 401 moves to a position close to the pseudo movable body display Z402 displayed at the second display position, the pseudo movable body display Z402 is moved and displayed toward the first display position. At this time, it is preferable to move and display the mounted movable body 401 so that it does not overlap with the pseudo movable body display Z402.

Next, as shown in FIG. 17-42(E), when the mounted movable body 401 moves to the second position and the pseudo movable body display Z402 moves and displays to the first display position, the mounted movable body 401 is closest to the pseudo movable body display Z402, resulting in a pseudo-combined state in which the word "combined" can be recognized. Then, as shown in FIG. 17-42(F), while maintaining the pseudo-combined state between the mounted movable body 401 and the pseudo movable body display Z402, the mounted movable body 401 is moved upward and the pseudo movable body display Z402 is moved and displayed upward, and further, the mounted movable bodies 501L and 501R are moved to the second predetermined position, thereby announcing that the pseudo-combination has been successful and the performance will develop.

After that, as shown in FIG. 17-42 (G), the mounted movable body 401 and the mounted movable bodies 501L, 501R are moved to a first position or a first predetermined position, and the pseudo movable body display Z402 is moved and displayed in a manner in which the image is divided to a first specific display position (e.g., a position on the left or right side) different from the first display position, and then it is erased by framing out to the left or right of the screen or fading out.

On the other hand, if it has been decided to notify that the pseudo merging has not been successful and the performance will not progress, as shown in FIG. 17-42 (D), the downward movement of the mounted movable body 401 is decelerated and stopped midway through the downward movement of the mounted movable body 401 and the downward movement display of the pseudo movable body display Z402, and the pseudo movable body display Z402 is displayed in a manner in which the upper part is destroyed, thereby notifying that the pseudo merging has not been successful and the performance will not progress. In this way, the pseudo movable body display Z402 can easily realize performances in a manner that is difficult to realize with a movable body as a structure.

(Variation 3)
Next, a third modification of the characteristic portion 241SG will be described with reference to Fig. 17-43. Fig. 17-43 (A) to (C) are diagrams showing a third modification of the characteristic portion 241SG.

In the characteristic section 241SG, the performance control CPU 120 has exemplified a form in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 can be moved between the first display position and the second display position, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is not limited to a form in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can be moved back and forth in one direction, such as up and down or left and right. For example, the performance control CPU 120 may move the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position as shown in Figures 17-43 (A) and (B), and then move it in a direction different from the direction in which it moves from the first initial display position to the first performance display position as shown in Figure 17-43 (C).

As shown in FIG. 17-43(C), it is preferable to be able to execute various types of movement displays, such as displaying only the performance display unit Z200A in vertical rotation around a rotation axis facing left and right at the first performance display position, which is a rotational movement display different from a linear movement display facing one direction, or a movement display in a manner that moves in a direction different from the one direction (for example, the depth direction). In this way, it is possible to provide the player with unexpected effects that are difficult to achieve with a movable body.

The characteristic feature 241SG in the embodiment of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to these examples, and the present invention also includes modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

(Explanation of Modifications and Applications)
In the characteristic portion 241SG, the mounted movable body 32 is exemplified as a movable body mounted on the pachinko game machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of movable bodies other than the mounted movable body 32 may be mounted on the pachinko game machine 1. In addition, the movable body is not limited to the board-side movable body provided on the game board 2, but may be a frame-side movable body provided on the game machine frame 3 or an opening/closing door that can open and close the game machine frame 3, and a pseudo-movable body display imitating the frame-side movable body may be movable and displayed. In addition, as the board-side movable body, a pseudo-movable body display imitating a variable winning device provided in relation to the game may be displayed.

In addition, in the characteristic part 241SG, an example is given of a form in which the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the second non-mounted movable body M200 are applied as movable bodies that were planned to be mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 but ended up not being mounted, but the present invention is not limited to this, and movable bodies other than the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the second non-mounted movable body M200 may be planned to be mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 but ended up not being mounted.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 241SG, when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 or the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is erased, an example is given of a form in which it is made invisible by gradually fading out, but the present invention is not limited to this, and an effect image emphasizing that it has been erased may be displayed, or it may be erased by a method other than these.

In addition, in the characteristic part 241SG, the movement distance L1 from the origin position of the mounted movable body 32 to the performance position is shorter than the movement display distance L2 from the first initial display position of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 to the first performance display position, and a common effect image Z71 of glass cracking and glass fragments scattering is displayed and a common sound effect is output when the mounted movable body 32 moves and when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed, respectively. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movement distance L1 from the origin position of the mounted movable body 32 to the performance position may be longer than the movement display distance L2 from the first initial display position of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 to the first performance display position, and different effect images may be displayed and different sound effects may be output when the mounted movable body 32 moves and when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed. By doing this, the movement of the mounted movable body 32 can be emphasized by using the movement display of the pseudo movable body display.

In addition, in the characteristic part 241SG, during the variable display period of the super reach, the movement of the mounted movable body 32 can be executed a maximum of two times for the development performance A and the deciding performance, the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can be executed a maximum of two times for the preview performance B and the deciding performance, and the movement display of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 can be executed a maximum of four times for the preview performance A, the preview performance B, the development suggestion performance, and the development performance B, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of times the movement of the movable body and the movement display of the pseudo movable body display can be executed may be executed a number of times other than the above.

Furthermore, when the movable body is allowed to move a first number of times in one variable display period, it is preferable to allow the pseudo movable body display to move a second number of times, which is greater than the first number, in one variable display period. By doing this, it is possible to avoid increasing the number of opportunities for the movable body performance to be performed too much, which would lower the expectation of a jackpot, and instead to prevent a decrease in interest due to fewer performances by increasing the number of opportunities for the pseudo movable body display to be performed.

In addition to the above multiple effects, for example, when the pattern is promoted in the re-draw after the jackpot confirmation notification or during the jackpot, the pseudo-movable body display may be moved, and the pseudo-movable body display that is moved at that time may be a pseudo-movable body display different from the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200.

In addition, an example has been given in which a preview effect A is applied as a special suggestion effect suggesting that control will be made into an advantageous state, a development effect B is applied as a notification effect notifying the player of content that is advantageous to the player, a development suggestion effect is applied as a predetermined effect suggesting that a notification effect will be executed, a decision effect is applied as a special effect notifying that control will be made into an advantageous state, and a preview effect B is applied as a specific effect suggesting that the special effect will be executed before the special effect is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this and various other effects can be applied. In addition, although these various effects can be executed during the variable display period of one Super Reach, they may also be effects that can be executed across multiple variable display periods.

In addition, in the case of the pachinko game machine 1, the contents that are advantageous to the player may include variable display results, controls, and effects such as pseudo consecutive wins, big wins, small wins, reach, reserved consecutive wins, chance-up effects, foresight notice effects, misses with time-saving, and ceiling time-saving control, which will be described later. In the case of the slot machine, the contents may include chance zone (CZ) wins, assist time (AT) wins, replay time (RT) wins, bonus wins, and the like.

In addition, in the characteristic part 241SG, when the display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is started, the brightness of the game effect lamps 9 provided on the game board 2 and the game machine frame 3 is lowered or turned off, thereby making the display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 stand out, while when the display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is erased, the brightness of the game effect lamps 9 provided on the game board 2 and the game machine frame 3 is increased or turned on, thereby diverting the player's attention from the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200.

Furthermore, in the characteristic portion 241SG, it is preferable that while the player is able to adjust the light intensity of the game effect lamps 9 and the like provided on the game board 2 and the game machine frame 3, the player is not able to adjust the light intensity of the light-emitting display portion Z108A of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the light-emitting display portions Z208A to Z208E of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the pseudo-movable body display from being impaired or becoming less noticeable.

In addition, in the characteristic section 241SG, when the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 displayed at the first specific initial display position is made invisible in the development suggestion performance, an example is given of a form in which the character image Z310 is preferentially displayed as the notification-related image in the display area including the first specific performance display position, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification-related image may be an image other than a character image (for example, an image imitating smoke, fog, waves, etc.) as long as it is an image related to the notification performance (for example, development performance B).

In addition, in the characteristic section 241SG, an example was given of a form in which the reach title image Z51 is displayed in the state it is in when the display starts as a suggestive image that suggests the execution of a deciding performance in the development performance B, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the suggestive image may be an image other than a reach title image (for example, a character image that appears in a strong super reach performance or a deciding performance) as long as it suggests the execution of a deciding performance.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 241SG, an example is given in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 can be displayed in separate periods, but the present invention is not limited to this, and multiple pseudo movable body displays may be moved and displayed in a common period. In this case, for example, when the movable displayable range of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the movable displayable range of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 overlap, and the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 are displayed in the overlapping area, by displaying one of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 on a display layer closer to the viewer than the other, the viewer can be made aware of the relative front-to-back positions of each other, thereby realizing a more realistic presentation.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 241SG, taking into consideration that the mechanism display portions Z100B, Z200B of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 are displayed cut off at the edges of the display area of the image display device 5, the mounted movable body or a center decorative frame, etc. may be arranged so as to cover the portion in the display area of the image display device 5 where the display of the mechanism display portion of the pseudo-movable body display begins, or the mounted movable body may be moved to make it difficult to see the portion where the display of the mechanism display portion of the pseudo-movable body display begins.

In addition, in the characteristic section 241SG, an example was given of a form in which the display result of the variable display includes "miss with time reduction", but the CPU 103 may be able to execute ceiling time reduction control, which controls to the time reduction state without going through the jackpot game state, based on the variable display having been performed a specified number of times (e.g., 900 times) since a specified condition (e.g., performing a clearing process to clear flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102 in the initialization process of step S6, controlling to the jackpot game state, or setting the display result to miss with time reduction) being met. The internal count of the specified number of times is reset when the specified condition is met, and the number of time reductions in the time reduction state due to the ceiling time reduction control (e.g., 900 times) may be different from the number of time reductions in the normal time reduction state (e.g., 100 times).

When the above-mentioned ceiling time-saving control is executed and the number of times the variable display is executed reaches the above-mentioned specified number of times without the above-mentioned predetermined condition being met, the performance control CPU 120 may be able to execute the moving display of the pseudo-movable body display such as the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 or the second pseudo-movable body display Z200. In this way, the moving display of the pseudo-movable body display may be executed in each notification such as a jackpot notification, a time-saving miss notification, and a ceiling time-saving control notification, and the type of pseudo-movable body display and the manner of the moving display may be different in each notification.

In addition, in the characteristic section 241SG, a form in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved to notify of a jackpot has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. If the variable display result is a small jackpot or a miss with time reduction, or if the above-mentioned ceiling time reduction control is executed, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 or the second pseudo movable body display Z200 may be moved to notify of a small jackpot or a miss with time reduction, or to notify that the conditions for executing the ceiling time reduction control have been met, while if the variable display result is a jackpot, the mounted movable body 32 may be moved to notify of a jackpot.

Also, when the display result of the variable display is a small win or a miss with time reduction, and when the display result of the variable display is a big win, a common type of pseudo-moving body display is used to notify, but the manner of the moving display may be different.Also, when the display result of the variable display is a small win or a miss with time reduction, and when the display result of the variable display is a big win, a pseudo-moving body display is used to notify, but the type of pseudo-moving body display may be different.

In addition, in the characteristic section 241SG, a pachinko gaming machine that can be controlled to a high probability state after a jackpot game ends is used as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be a so-called type 1/type 2 gaming machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state by a V winning occurring as a result of a small jackpot in the time-saving state after a jackpot game ends, and the gameplay can be changed in various ways.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a pachinko game machine 1 is given as an example of a game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the present invention can also be applied to so-called sealed game machines in which a predetermined number of game balls are enclosed inside the game machine so that they can be circulated, and the number of loaned balls loaned in response to a loan request by a player and the number of prize balls awarded in response to winning are added, while the number of game balls used in the game is subtracted and stored. In these sealed game machines, scores or points are awarded to the player rather than game balls, and these awarded scores or points correspond to the game value.

In addition, in the above embodiment, spherical gaming balls (pachinko balls) were used as an example of gaming media, but the gaming media is not limited to spherical gaming media and may be non-spherical gaming media such as medals.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine was applied as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to a slot machine in which, for example, a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using gaming value, one game ends when a variable display result is derived from a variable display device that can variably display multiple types of identifiable patterns, and a prize can be won depending on the variable display result derived from the variable display device.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to slot machines and other enclosed gaming machines that enclose gaming media and award points based on winning. In addition, a gaming machine capable of playing games is one that at least allows playing games, and is not limited to pachinko gaming machines or slot machines, and may be a general game machine.

1,75SG001 Pachinko game machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 32 On-board movable body 100 Game control microcomputer 120 Performance control CPU
300 First performance unit 301 Base member 302 Cover member 303 LED board 331 Decorative pattern 400 Second performance unit 401 Base member 402 Cover member 403 LED board 420 Decorative part 600 Third performance unit 800 Fourth performance unit 801 Base member 802 Cover member 803 LED board

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player and is provided with a performance movable body ,
an electronic component arranged to be visible to a player;
A specific member provided around the electronic component;
a light-transmitting member that is a member having light-transmitting properties and that is provided so that a player can see the electronic components and the specific member through the member;
a display means for moving and displaying a pseudo movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position;
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance;
Equipped with
the light-transmitting member is provided in front of the electronic component and the specific member,
The performance execution means includes:
A special effect can be executed to notify the player that the game is controlled to the advantageous state.
A specific effect can be executed before the special effect is executed,
A moving performance can be executed by moving the movable body for performance,
The display means includes:
The pseudo movable body display can be moved and displayed in the specific performance and the special performance,
When the pseudo-movable object display is moved in the specific performance, the pseudo-movable object display can be moved from the first display position to the second display position, and then hidden without being moved from the second display position to the first display position, and a suggestion image suggesting the execution of the special performance can be displayed in a display area including the second display position;
When the pseudo-movable object display is moved during the special performance, the pseudo-movable object display may be moved from the first display position to the second display position, and then moved from the second display position to the first display position, and then hidden;
The pseudo movable object display is not displayed as moving during the period in which the movement performance is being performed.
Amusement machine.